Copyright 2012 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description October 2012 Hardware Release: R2 and R3 Software Release: i6.9 Document Revision B.01 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 2 of 403 Notice This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd. No part of this publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of Ceragon Networks Ltd. This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind. Registered Trademarks Ceragon Networks is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. FibeAir is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. CeraView is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders. Trademarks CeraMap, PolyView, EncryptAir, ConfigAir, CeraMon, EtherAir, and MicroWave Fiber, are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders. Statement of Conditions The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Ceragon Networks Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or equipment supplied with it. Open Source Statement The Product may use open source software, among them O/S software released under the GPL or GPL alike license ("GPL License"). Inasmuch that such software is being used, it is released under the GPL License, accordingly. Some software might have changed. The complete list of the software being used in this product including their respective license and the aforementioned public available changes is accessible on http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 3 of 403 Revision History Rev Date Author Description Approved by Date A January 19, 2012 Baruch Gitlin First revision for release 6.9. Tomer Carmeli January 19, 2012 A.01 March 15, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Revise PDV value for PTP optimized transport. Tomer Carmeli March 15, 2012 A.02 March 22, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Revised RFU-C frequency bands. Rami Lerner March 26, 2012 A.03 April 2, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Revise RFU-C frequency specifications. Rami Lerner April 2, 2012 A.04 July 1, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Reorganized document structure, updated feature descriptions. Eran Shecter July 1, 2012 A.05 July 12, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Eliminated RADIUS server priorities; modified explanation of TDM protection in Multi-Radio. Eran Shecter July 12, 2012 A.06 July 29, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Revise Licensing section. Eran Shecter July 29, 2012 B August 14, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Correct hardware version compatibility information. Eran Shecter August 14, 2012 B.01 October 29, 2012 Baruch Gitlin Revise RFU-C mediation device losses. Eran Shecter/Rami Lerner October 29, 2012 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 4 of 403 Table of Contents 1. Synonyms and Acronyms .............................................................................. 23 2. Introduction .................................................................................................... 26 2.1 Product Overview ......................................................................................................... 27 2.2 IP-10G Advantages ...................................................................................................... 28 2.2.1 Efficient Utilization of Spectrum Assets ....................................................................... 28 2.2.2 Spectral Efficiency ........................................................................................................ 28 2.2.3 Radio Link .................................................................................................................... 28 2.2.4 Wireless Network ......................................................................................................... 29 2.2.5 Scalability ..................................................................................................................... 29 2.2.6 Availability .................................................................................................................... 29 2.2.7 Network Level Optimization ......................................................................................... 30 2.2.8 Network Management .................................................................................................. 30 2.2.9 Power Saving Mode with High Power Radio ............................................................... 30 2.3 Functional Block Diagrams .......................................................................................... 31 2.4 Nodal Configuration Option .......................................................................................... 33 2.4.1 Nodal Configuration Benefits ....................................................................................... 33 2.4.2 Nodal Design ................................................................................................................ 33 2.4.3 Nodal Enclosure Design............................................................................................... 34 2.4.4 Nodal Management ...................................................................................................... 35 2.4.5 Centralized System Features in a Nodal Configuration ............................................... 36 2.4.6 Ethernet Connectivity in a Nodal Configuration ........................................................... 36 2.5 Solution Overview ........................................................................................................ 37 2.6 System Overview ......................................................................................................... 41 3. Release and Version Information .................................................................. 42 3.1 New Features and Enhancements ............................................................................... 43 3.2 Hardware Compatibility ................................................................................................ 44 3.3 Version Matrix .............................................................................................................. 45 4. Hardware Description..................................................................................... 49 4.1 Hardware Architecture ................................................................................................. 50 4.2 Front Panel Description................................................................................................ 51 4.3 Ethernet Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 53 4.3.1 GbE Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 54 4.3.2 100Base-FX support .................................................................................................... 55 4.4 Management Interfaces ............................................................................................... 56 4.5 Link Aggregation (LAG)................................................................................................ 57 4.5.1 Creating a LAG Group ................................................................................................. 57 4.5.2 Adding Ports to a LAG Group ...................................................................................... 58 4.5.3 Removing Ports from a LAG Group ............................................................................. 59 4.6 TDM Interface Options ................................................................................................. 60 4.7 Radio Interface ............................................................................................................. 61 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 5 of 403 4.8 Power Interfaces .......................................................................................................... 62 4.9 Additional Interfaces ..................................................................................................... 63 4.10 Front Panel LEDs ......................................................................................................... 64 4.11 External Alarms ............................................................................................................ 65 5. Licensing......................................................................................................... 66 5.1 License Overview ......................................................................................................... 67 5.2 Working with License Keys .......................................................................................... 67 5.3 Licensed Features ........................................................................................................ 67 6. Feature Description ........................................................................................ 69 6.1 Equipment Protection ................................................................................................... 70 6.1.1 Equipment Protection Overview ................................................................................... 71 6.1.2 1+1 HSB Protection ..................................................................................................... 72 6.1.3 2+0 Multi-Radio and 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection ........................... 75 6.1.4 2+2 HSB Protection ..................................................................................................... 77 6.1.5 Switchover Triggers ..................................................................................................... 79 6.2 Ethernet Line Protection............................................................................................... 80 6.2.1 Ethernet Line Protection Options ................................................................................. 81 6.2.2 Multi-Unit LAG .............................................................................................................. 83 6.2.3 Ethernet Line Protection Using Splitters ...................................................................... 86 6.3 Capacity and Latency ................................................................................................... 87 6.3.1 Capacity Summary ....................................................................................................... 88 6.3.2 Ethernet Header Compression .................................................................................... 89 6.3.3 Latency ......................................................................................................................... 96 6.3.4 Asymmetrical Scripts .................................................................................................... 97 6.4 Radio Features ........................................................................................................... 100 6.4.1 Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) ........................................................................... 101 6.4.2 ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power .......................................................................... 106 6.4.3 Radio Traffic Priority ................................................................................................... 108 6.4.4 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) ........................................................... 109 6.4.5 Multi-Radio ................................................................................................................. 113 6.4.6 Automatic State Propagation in Multi-Radio .............................................................. 116 6.4.7 Diversity...................................................................................................................... 117 6.4.8 ATPC Override Timer ................................................................................................. 123 6.4.9 Disabling the Radio .................................................................................................... 124 6.4.10 Behavior in Radio Disable Conditions ........................................................................ 125 6.5 Ethernet Features ...................................................................................................... 126 6.5.1 Ethernet Switching ..................................................................................................... 127 6.5.2 Ethernet Services ....................................................................................................... 130 6.5.3 Network Resiliency and xSTP .................................................................................... 134 6.5.4 Automatic State Propagation ..................................................................................... 144 6.6 Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) .......................................................................... 146 6.6.1 Integrated Quality of Service (QoS) Overview ........................................................... 147 6.6.2 Standard QoS ............................................................................................................ 149 6.6.3 Enhanced QoS ........................................................................................................... 152 6.6.4 Standard and Enhanced QoS Comparison................................................................ 164 6.7 TDM Solution ............................................................................................................. 165 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 6 of 403 6.7.1 TDM Trails and Cross-Connect (XE) ......................................................................... 166 6.7.2 Smart TDM Pseudowire ............................................................................................. 170 6.7.3 Wireless SNCP .......................................................................................................... 179 6.7.4 Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery (ABR) ........................................................................ 184 6.7.5 ACM for TDM Services .............................................................................................. 194 6.7.6 AIS Signaling and Detection ...................................................................................... 196 6.8 Synchronization .......................................................................................................... 197 6.8.1 Synchronization Overview.......................................................................................... 198 6.8.2 IP-10G Synchronization Solution ............................................................................... 200 6.8.3 Available Synchronization Interfaces ......................................................................... 201 6.8.4 Synchronization Configuration ................................................................................... 202 6.8.5 Synchronization Using TDM Trails ............................................................................. 203 6.8.6 SyncE from Co-Located TDM Trails .......................................................................... 204 6.8.7 Synchronization Using Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Optimized Transport ......... 205 6.8.8 Native Sync Distribution Mode ................................................................................... 207 6.8.9 SyncE PRC Pipe Regenerator Mode ......................................................................... 211 6.8.10 SSM Support and Loop Prevention ........................................................................... 212 7. Radio Frequency Units (RFUs) .................................................................... 213 7.1 RFU Overview ............................................................................................................ 214 7.2 RFU Selection Guide ................................................................................................. 215 7.3 RFU-C ........................................................................................................................ 216 7.3.1 Main Features of RFU-C ............................................................................................ 216 7.3.2 RFU-C Frequency Bands ........................................................................................... 217 7.3.3 RFU-C Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications............................. 228 7.3.4 RFU-C Mediation Device Losses ............................................................................... 229 7.3.5 RFU-C Antenna Connection ...................................................................................... 229 7.3.6 RFU-C Waveguide Flanges ....................................................................................... 230 7.4 1500HP/RFU-HP ........................................................................................................ 231 7.4.1 Main Features of 1500HP/RFU-HP ........................................................................... 231 7.4.2 1500HP/RFU-HP Frequency Bands .......................................................................... 233 7.4.3 1500HP/RFU-HP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications ............ 234 7.4.4 1500HP/RFU-HP Functional Block Diagram and Concept of Operation ................... 235 7.4.5 1500HP/RFU-HP Comparison Table ......................................................................... 237 7.4.6 1500HP/RFU-HP System Configurations .................................................................. 238 7.4.7 1500HP/RFU-HP Space Diversity Support ................................................................ 238 7.4.8 Split Mount Configuration and Branching Network .................................................... 240 7.4.9 Split-Mount Branching Loss ....................................................................................... 245 7.4.10 1500HP/RFU-HP All Indoor Configurations and Branching Network ........................ 246 7.4.11 1500HP/RFU-HP All Indoor Compact (Horizontal) .................................................... 257 7.4.12 1500HP/RFU-HP Models and Part Numbers............................................................. 261 7.4.13 OCB Part Numbers .................................................................................................... 262 7.4.14 Generic All-Indoor Configurations Part Numbers ...................................................... 263 7.5 RFH-HS ...................................................................................................................... 267 7.5.1 Main Features of RFU-HS.......................................................................................... 267 7.5.2 RFU-HS Frequency Bands ........................................................................................ 268 7.5.3 RFU-HS Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications .......................... 269 7.5.4 RFU-HS Antenna Types ............................................................................................ 269 7.5.5 RFU-HS Antenna Connection .................................................................................... 270 7.5.6 RFU-HS Mediation Device Losses ............................................................................ 270 7.6 RFU-SP ...................................................................................................................... 272 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 7 of 403 7.6.1 Main Features of RFU-SP .......................................................................................... 272 7.6.2 RFU-SP Frequency Bands ........................................................................................ 273 7.6.3 RFU-SP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications .......................... 274 7.6.4 RFU-SP Direct Mount Installation .............................................................................. 275 7.6.5 RFU-SP Antenna Connection .................................................................................... 275 7.6.6 RFU-SP Mediation Device Losses ............................................................................. 276 7.7 1500P ......................................................................................................................... 277 7.7.1 1500P Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications ............................. 277 7.7.2 1500P Mediation Device Losses ................................................................................ 278 8. Typical Configurations ................................................................................. 279 8.1 IP-10G Configuration Options .................................................................................... 280 8.2 Point-to-Point Configurations ..................................................................................... 281 8.2.1 Basic 1+0 Configuration ............................................................................................. 282 8.2.2 1+1 HSB ..................................................................................................................... 283 8.2.3 1+0 with 32 E1s.......................................................................................................... 284 8.2.4 1+0 with 64 E1s.......................................................................................................... 285 8.2.5 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s No Multi-Radio ............................................................ 286 8.2.6 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s Multi-Radio .................................................................. 287 8.2.7 2+0/XPIC Link with 32 E1s + STM-1 Mux Interface, no Multi-Radio, up to 168 E1s over the radio ..................................................................................................................... 288 8.2.8 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s ................................................................................................. 289 8.2.9 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s ................................................................................................. 290 8.2.10 1+1 HSB with 84 E1s ................................................................................................. 291 8.2.11 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Mux Interface (Up to 84 E1s over the radio) ..... 292 8.2.12 Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Mux (up to 150 E1s over the radio) .......................................................................................................................... 293 8.3 Nodal Configurations .................................................................................................. 294 8.3.1 Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux .............................. 295 8.3.2 Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink ............................................. 296 8.3.3 Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux .............................. 297 8.3.4 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site ........................ 298 8.3.5 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site ............... 299 8.3.6 Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux ........... 300 8.3.7 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Mux ...................................................... 301 8.3.8 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 ....................................................... 302 8.3.9 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (5 hops total), with STM-1 Mux ................................................................................................................................... 303 8.3.10 Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (3 hops total), with 2 x STM-1 Mux ................................................................................................................. 304 9. FibeAir IP-10G Management ........................................................................ 305 9.1 Management Overview .............................................................................................. 306 9.2 Management Communication Channels and Protocols ............................................. 307 9.3 Web-Based Element Management System (Web EMS) ........................................... 309 9.4 Command Line Interface (CLI) ................................................................................... 310 9.4.1 Text CLI Configuration Scripts ................................................................................... 310 9.5 Floating IP Address .................................................................................................... 311 9.6 In-Band Management ................................................................................................. 312 9.6.1 In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode ................................................. 312 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 8 of 403 9.7 Out-of-Band Management ......................................................................................... 313 9.8 System Security Features .......................................................................................... 314 9.8.1 Ceragons Layered Security Concept ........................................................................ 314 9.8.2 Defenses in Management Communication Channels ................................................ 315 9.8.3 Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures ........................................ 316 9.8.4 Secure Communication Channels ............................................................................. 318 9.8.5 Security Log ............................................................................................................... 321 9.9 Ethernet Statistics ...................................................................................................... 323 9.9.1 Ingress Line Receive Statistics .................................................................................. 323 9.9.2 Ingress Radio Transmit Statistics .............................................................................. 323 9.9.3 Egress Radio Receive Statistics ................................................................................ 324 9.9.4 Egress Line Transmit Statistics .................................................................................. 324 9.9.5 Radio Ethernet Capacity ............................................................................................ 324 9.9.6 Radio Ethernet Utilization........................................................................................... 324 9.10 Software Update Timer .............................................................................................. 325 9.11 CeraBuild ................................................................................................................... 325 10. Network Management ................................................................................... 326 10.1 OAM ........................................................................................................................... 327 10.1.1 Configurable RSL Threshold Alarms and Traps ........................................................ 327 10.1.2 Alarms Editing ............................................................................................................ 327 10.1.3 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) ..................................................................... 328 10.2 Automatic Network Topology Discovery with LLDP Protocol .................................... 330 10.3 NMS Options .............................................................................................................. 331 11. Standards and Certifications ....................................................................... 332 11.1 Carrier Ethernet Functionality .................................................................................... 333 11.2 Supported Ethernet Standards .................................................................................. 334 11.3 MEF Certifications for Ethernet Services ................................................................... 334 11.4 Supported Pseudowire Encapsulations ..................................................................... 335 11.5 Standards Compliance ............................................................................................... 336 11.6 Network Management, Diagnostics, Status, and Alarms ........................................... 337 12. Specifications ............................................................................................... 338 12.1 General Specifications ............................................................................................... 339 12.1.1 6-15 GHz .................................................................................................................... 339 12.1.2 18-42 GHz .................................................................................................................. 339 12.2 Transmit Power Specifications ................................................................................... 340 12.2.1 RFU-C Transmit Power (dBm) ................................................................................... 341 12.2.2 1500HP/RFU-HP Transmit Power (dBm) .................................................................. 341 12.2.3 RFU-HS Transmit Power (dBm) ................................................................................ 342 12.2.4 RFU-SP Transmit Power (dBm) ................................................................................. 342 12.2.5 1500P Transmit Power (dBm) .................................................................................... 342 12.3 Receiver Threshold Specifications ............................................................................. 343 12.3.1 RFU-C Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) .......................................... 344 12.3.2 1500HP/RFU-HP Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @BER = 10-6) .......................... 346 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 9 of 403 12.3.3 RFU-HS Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) ....................................... 348 12.3.4 RFU-SP Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) ........................................ 350 12.3.5 1500P Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) ........................................... 352 12.4 Radio Capacity Specifications ................................................................................... 354 12.4.1 Radio Capacity without Header Compression ........................................................... 354 12.4.2 Radio Capacity with Legacy MAC Header Compression .......................................... 358 12.4.3 Radio Capacity with Multi-Layer Enhanced Header Compression ............................ 362 12.5 Ethernet Latency Specifications ................................................................................. 366 12.5.1 Ethernet Latency 3.5 MHz Channel Bandwidth ...................................................... 366 12.5.2 Ethernet Latency 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth ......................................................... 366 12.5.3 Ethernet Latency 14 MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................................................... 367 12.5.4 Ethernet Latency 28 MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................................................... 367 12.5.5 Ethernet Latency 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................................................... 368 12.5.6 Ethernet Latency 56 MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................................................... 368 12.6 E1 Latency Specifications .......................................................................................... 369 12.6.1 E1 Latency 3.5 MHz Channel Bandwidth ............................................................... 369 12.6.2 E1 Latency 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................................................................. 369 12.6.3 E1 Latency 14 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................................ 370 12.6.4 E1 Latency 28 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................................ 370 12.6.5 E1 Latency 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................................ 371 12.6.6 E1 Latency 56 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................................ 371 12.7 Interface Specifications .............................................................................................. 372 12.7.1 Ethernet Interface Specifications ............................................................................... 372 12.7.2 E1 Interface Specifications ........................................................................................ 372 12.7.3 Smart TDM Pseudowire Interface Specifications ...................................................... 372 12.7.4 Optical STM-1 SFP Interface Specifications .............................................................. 373 12.7.5 Auxiliary Channel Specifications ................................................................................ 373 12.8 Mechanical Specifications .......................................................................................... 374 12.9 Power Input Specifications ......................................................................................... 374 12.10 Power Consumption Specifications ........................................................................... 375 12.10.1 Power Consumption with RFU-HP in Power Saving Mode ....................... 375 12.11 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................... 376 13. Components and Accessories .................................................................... 377 13.1 Cable and Accessory Overview ................................................................................. 378 13.2 IDU Unit ...................................................................................................................... 381 13.3 Nodal Enclosure Units................................................................................................ 381 13.4 T-Card Options ........................................................................................................... 382 13.5 SFP Options ............................................................................................................... 383 13.6 Additional IDU Accessories ........................................................................................ 383 13.7 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Electrical) .................................................................. 384 13.7.1 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Copper) ..................................................................... 384 13.7.2 Ethernet RJ45 - RJ45 Cables .................................................................................... 384 13.7.3 WSC Protection Cable ............................................................................................... 385 13.7.4 Ethernet Cross-Connect Cable .................................................................................. 385 13.7.5 Ethernet Y Cable ........................................................................................................ 386 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 10 of 403 13.8 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Optical) ...................................................................... 387 13.8.1 Optical Y Cables, Adaptors, and Extension Cables ................................................... 387 13.8.2 Optical H Cables ........................................................................................................ 388 13.9 E1 Cables ................................................................................................................... 389 13.9.1 E1 Open-End Extension Cable .................................................................................. 389 13.9.2 E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End ............................................................. 389 13.9.3 E1 RJ-45 Male-to-Male Extension Cable ................................................................... 390 13.9.4 E1 Termination Cables............................................................................................... 391 13.9.5 E1 RJ-45 - RJ-45 Cables ........................................................................................... 392 13.9.6 E1 MDR69 - MDR69 Cross Cables (for Chaining Applications) ................................ 392 13.9.7 E1 Special Cables ...................................................................................................... 393 13.9.8 E1 Y Cable ................................................................................................................. 394 13.10 E1 Expansion Panels ................................................................................................. 395 13.10.1 E1 Expansion Panel with RJ-45 Female Sockets ..................................... 395 13.10.2 E1 Expansion Panel to 75 ohm ................................................................. 396 13.10.3 E1 75 ohm Extension for 1+1 HSB Configurations ................................... 397 13.11 Alarms Cables ............................................................................................................ 398 13.12 User Channel Cables ................................................................................................. 399 13.13 IF Cable ...................................................................................................................... 400 13.14 Software License Marketing Models .......................................................................... 401 13.14.1 ACM License ............................................................................................. 401 13.14.2 L2 Switch License ...................................................................................... 401 13.14.3 Capacity Upgrade License ........................................................................ 401 13.14.4 Network Resiliency License ....................................................................... 402 13.14.5 TDM Traffic Only License .......................................................................... 402 13.14.6 Synchronization Unit License .................................................................... 402 13.14.7 Enhanced QoS License ............................................................................. 403 13.14.8 Asymmetrical Scripts License .................................................................... 403 13.14.9 Enhanced Header Compression License .................................................. 403
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 11 of 403 List of Figures Functional Block Diagram ................................................................................... 31 FibeAir IP-10G Block Diagram ............................................................................ 32 Main Nodal Enclosure .......................................................................................... 34 Extension Nodal Enclosure ................................................................................. 34 Scalable Nodal Enclosure ................................................................................... 35 IP-10G Complete Support for TDM and Packet Transport Networks ................ 37 IP-10G in Hybrid TDM and Ethernet Network ..................................................... 38 IP-10G All-Packet Solution with Integrated Switching and Pseudowire .......... 38 IP-10G in Wireless Native 2 Ring ......................................................................... 39 IP-10G End-to-End Service Management ........................................................... 39 Integrated Hybrid/All-Packed Solution Using FibeAir IP-10 Products .............. 40 Typical Point-to-Point Configurations ................................................................ 41 Typical Node Configurations .............................................................................. 41 IP-10G Front Panel and Interfaces ...................................................................... 51 IP-10G Front Panel with Dual Feed Power ......................................................... 51 IP-10G Front Panel with Dual Feed Power and 16 X E1 T-Card ........................ 51 1+1 HSB Protection Connecting the IDUs ....................................................... 72 1+1 HSB Node with BBS Space Diversity ........................................................... 73 3 x 1+1 Aggregation Site ..................................................................................... 73 Multi-Radio 2+0 with Line Protection Traffic Flow .......................................... 76 Hardware Protection with Single Interface Using Optical Splitter .................... 81 Full protection with Dual Interface Using Optical Splitters and LAG ............... 81 Full Protection Using Multi-Unit LAG ................................................................. 81 Multi-Unit LAG Basic Operation ....................................................................... 84 Layer 1 Header Suppression ............................................................................... 90 Legacy MAC Header Compression ..................................................................... 91 Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression ................................................... 93 Symmetrical Chain Example ............................................................................... 97 Asymmetrical Chain Example ............................................................................. 97 Symmetrical Aggregation Site Example ............................................................. 98 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 12 of 403 Asymmetrical Aggregation Site Example ........................................................... 98 Adaptive Coding and Modulation with Eight Working Points ......................... 102 Adaptive Coding and Modulation ..................................................................... 103 IP-10G ACM with Adaptive Power Contrasted to Other ACM Implementations ....................................................................................................................... 106 Channel Mask Comparison ............................................................................... 107 Dual Polarization ................................................................................................ 109 XPIC - Orthogonal Polarizations ....................................................................... 110 XPIC Impact of Misalignments and Channel Degradation ........................... 110 XPIC Impact of Misalignments and Channel Degradation ........................... 111 Typical 2+0 Multi-Radio Link Configuration ..................................................... 113 Typical 2+2 Multi-Radio Terminal Configuration with HSB Protection........... 114 Direct and Reflected Signals ............................................................................. 118 Diversity Signal Flow ......................................................................................... 119 Ethernet Switching............................................................................................. 127 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G ..................................................... 131 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G - Node Failure ............................. 131 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G - Node Failure (continued) ........ 132 Ring-Optimized RSTP Solution ......................................................................... 136 Resilient In-Band Ring Management ................................................................ 140 Resilient Out-of-Band Ring Management ......................................................... 141 Basic IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring ................................................... 141 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring with Dual-Homing .............................. 142 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - 1+0 .................................................... 142 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - Aggregation Site .............................. 143 Smart Pipe Mode QoS Traffic Flow ................................................................... 147 Managed Switch and Metro Switch QoS Traffic Flow ...................................... 148 IP-10G Enhanced QoS ....................................................................................... 153 Classifier Traffic Flow ........................................................................................ 154 TrTCM Policers and MEF 10.2 ........................................................................... 155 TrTCM Policers Leaky Bucket Mechanism .................................................... 156 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 13 of 403 Synchronized Packet Loss ................................................................................ 159 Random Packet Loss with Increased Capacity Utilization Using WRED ....... 159 WRED Profile Curve ........................................................................................... 160 Queue Priority Configuration Example ............................................................. 161 Example 1 Hybrid Scheduling Illustration .................................................. 162 Example 1 Hierarchical Scheduling Illustration ......................................... 163 Basic Cross-Connect Operation ....................................................................... 166 Cross-Connect Configurations ......................................................................... 168 TDM Cross-Connect Aggregation Example ..................................................... 169 PW T-Card Connected to Ethernet Port (Eth3) ................................................. 170 Smart TDM Pseudowire Bandwidth Utilization with CESoP ........................... 171 Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Tail Sites ............................................................................................................... 173 Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Intermediate Aggregation Sites ................................................................... 173 Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Fiber PoP Sites ....................................................................................................... 174 Smart TDM Pseudowire with Native Service Stitching at Fiber Site ............... 174 Smart TDM Pseudowire End-to-End Overlay ................................................... 175 Smart TDM Pseudowire as part of Integrated CSG Solution .......................... 175 Wireless SNCP Operation.................................................................................. 180 Wireless SNCP - Branching Points ................................................................... 180 Wireless SNCP Mixed Wireless Optical Network .......................................... 182 SNCP and ABR Comparison ............................................................................. 184 Dual Homing with ABR-Based TDM Protection ............................................... 187 TDM and Ethernet Aggregation Case Study .................................................... 188 TDM-only Aggregation Ring with 100% Protection Based on SNCP 1+1 ....... 189 TDM Aggregation Ring - SNCP 1:1 Protection Bandwidth is Used for Ethernet ....................................................................................................................... 189 A Native Ethernet Ring with 100% or Partial Protection Based on STP ......... 190 Normal State ....................................................................................................... 190 Non-Affecting Failure ......................................................................................... 190 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 14 of 403 Medium Severity Failure .................................................................................... 191 Worst Case Failure............................................................................................. 191 A Native2 Ring with Protected-ABR at Work .................................................... 191 ABR Advantages: Double Data Capacity, with no Impact on TDM in Failure State .............................................................................................................. 192 Ceragons Unique ACM Adaption for TDM ....................................................... 194 Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Synchronization .......................................... 199 Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)......................................................................... 200 Synchronization Configuration ......................................................................... 202 Synchronization using Native E1 Trails ........................................................... 203 Sync from Co-Located E1 Mode ....................................................................... 204 PTP Optimized Transport .................................................................................. 206 Native Sync Distribution Mode ......................................................................... 207 Native Sync Distribution Mode Usage Example .............................................. 208 Native Sync Distribution Mode Tree Scenario .............................................. 209 Native Sync Distribution Mode Ring Scenario (Normal Operation) ............. 209 Native Sync Distribution Mode Ring Scenario (Link Failure) ....................... 210 Figure 1: 1500HP 2RX in 1+0 SD Configuration ............................................... 235 Figure 2: 1500HP 1RX in 1+0 SD Configuration ............................................... 235 Space Diversity with Multiple RFUs .................................................................. 239 Space Diversity with Single RFU ...................................................................... 239 All-Indoor Vertical Branching ............................................................................ 240 Split-Mount Branching and All-Indoor Compact .............................................. 240 Old OCB .............................................................................................................. 241 New OCB ............................................................................................................ 241 Old OCB Type 1 ............................................................................................... 242 Old OCB Type 1 and Type 2 Description ....................................................... 242 Block Diagram of Trunk System ....................................................................... 246 All-Indoor System with Five IP-10 Carriers ...................................................... 246 All-Indoor System with Ten IP-10 Carriers ....................................................... 247 All-Indoor Installations ...................................................................................... 247 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 15 of 403 Subrack for ETSI Rack ....................................................................................... 248 RFU with Branching ........................................................................................... 248 ICB Branching Chain ......................................................................................... 249 ICC ...................................................................................................................... 250 ICCD .................................................................................................................... 250 Fan Tray in 19 Frame Rack .............................................................................. 251 T12 Rigid Waveguide ......................................................................................... 251 T13 Rigid Waveguide ......................................................................................... 251 4+1 XPIC Assembly Configuration.................................................................... 252 Additional Assembly Configuration Examples ................................................ 252 Lab Rack (Open Frame) Examples ................................................................... 253 19 Rack Example .............................................................................................. 254 ETSI Rack Example ............................................................................................ 254 Configuration with More than Ten Carriers Two Connected Racks ............ 255 1500HP RFU All-Indoor 1Rx RF Unit ................................................................. 257 1500HP RFU All-Indoor Space Diversity ........................................................... 257 1500HP RFU All-Indoor 1Rx RF Unit, 11G 40MHz ............................................ 258 1+1 HSB Compact Front View ........................................................................... 258 1+1 HSB Compact Rear View ............................................................................ 258 PDU with 10 Switches PN: 32T-PDU10 ............................................................. 260 Basic 1+0 Configuration .................................................................................... 282 1+1 HSB Configuration ...................................................................................... 283 1+0 with 32 E1s .................................................................................................. 284 1+0 with 64 E1s .................................................................................................. 285 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s No Multi-Radio .................................................... 286 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s Multi-Radio .......................................................... 287 2+0/XPIC Link, with 32 E1s + STM-1 Mux Interface, no Multi-Radio, up to 168 E1s Over the Radio ....................................................................................... 288 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s .......................................................................................... 289 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s .......................................................................................... 290 1+1 HSB with 84 E1s .......................................................................................... 291 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 16 of 403 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Mux Interface ............................................ 292 Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Mux (up to 150 E1s over the radio) ....................................................................................................... 293 Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux .................... 295 Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink .................................... 296 Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux .................... 297 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site ............. 298 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site ..... 299 Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux .. 300 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Mux ........................................... 301 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 ............................................. 302 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (5 hops total), with STM- 1 Mux ............................................................................................................. 303 Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (3 hops total), with 2 x STM-1 Mux .............................................................................................. 304 Integrated IP-10G Management Tools .............................................................. 306 In-Band Management Isolation ......................................................................... 312 Security Solution Architecture Concept ........................................................... 314 OAM Functionality ............................................................................................. 327 IDU 1+0 ............................................................................................................... 378 Termination Cable .............................................................................................. 378 Adaptors ............................................................................................................. 378 IDU 1+1 ............................................................................................................... 378 Protection (Y) Cable ........................................................................................... 378 Termination Cable .............................................................................................. 378 Adaptors ............................................................................................................. 378 Ethernet + 32 E1s, 1+0 ....................................................................................... 379 Ethernet + 32 E1s, 1+1 HSB ............................................................................... 380 Basic IP-10G Unit ............................................................................................... 381 IP-10G Unit with Dual-Feed Power .................................................................... 381 Main Nodal Enclosure Unit ................................................................................ 381 Extension Nodal Enclosure Unit ....................................................................... 381 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 17 of 403 E1 T-Card ............................................................................................................ 382 STM-1 T-Card...................................................................................................... 382 Pseudowire T-Card ............................................................................................ 382 SFP Optical Interface Plug-In ............................................................................ 383 WSC Protection Cable ....................................................................................... 385 Ethernet Cross-Connect Cable ......................................................................... 385 Ethernet Y Cable ................................................................................................ 386 Optical Y Cable, Adaptor, and Extension Cable .............................................. 387 E1 Open-End Extension Cable .......................................................................... 389 E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End .................................................... 389 E1 Male-to-Male Extension Cable ..................................................................... 390 E1 Y Cable .......................................................................................................... 394 E1 Expansion Panel with RJ-45 Female Sockets ............................................. 395 E1 75 ohm Expansion Panel .............................................................................. 396 E1 75 ohm Extension for 1+1 HSB Configurations .......................................... 397 Alarms Cable ...................................................................................................... 398 Alarms Y Cable ................................................................................................... 398 User Channel Cable ........................................................................................... 399 User Channel Cable with Y Cable ..................................................................... 399 User Channel Cable with Two Y Cables (Synchronous) ................................. 399
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 18 of 403 List of Tables FibeAir IP-10 Series Overview ............................................................................. 37 New Features in Version I6.9 ............................................................................... 43 Enhancements of Existing Features in Version I6.9 .......................................... 43 Feature Support in R2 and R3 ............................................................................. 45 Feature Support by Software Version ................................................................ 45 IP-10G Interfaces .................................................................................................. 51 Ethernet Interface Functionality .......................................................................... 54 Management Interfaces ....................................................................................... 56 T-Card in Add-In Slot ........................................................................................... 60 16 X E1 T-Card ...................................................................................................... 60 STM 1 Mux T-Card ................................................................................................ 60 16 x E1 TDM Pseudowire (PW) Processing T-Card ............................................ 60 License Types ...................................................................................................... 67 Comparison of IP-10G Protection Options ......................................................... 71 HSB Protection Switchover Triggers .................................................................. 79 Ethernet Line Protection Comparison ................................................................ 82 Multi-Unit LAG Failure Scenarios ....................................................................... 85 Header Compression ........................................................................................... 89 Ethernet Header Compression Comparison Table ............................................ 95 ACM Working Points (Profiles) ......................................................................... 102 BBS and IFC Comparison .................................................................................. 122 Managed Switch Mode ....................................................................................... 128 VLANs Reserved for Internal Use in Managed Switch Mode .......................... 128 Metro Switch Mode ............................................................................................ 129 Carrier Grade Ethernet Feature Summary ........................................................ 130 Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in CN Ports ......................................................... 135 Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in PN Ports ......................................................... 135 Per-Queue Counters Availability ....................................................................... 158 Example 1 Hybrid Scheduling ........................................................................ 162 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 19 of 403 Example 2 Hierarchical Scheduling ............................................................... 163 IP-10G Standard and Enhanced QoS Features ................................................ 164 Ceragon's Unique ACM Adaption for TDM ....................................................... 195 RFU Selection Guide .......................................................................................... 215 RFU-C Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications ................. 228 RFU-C Mediation Device Losses ....................................................................... 229 RFU-C Waveguide Flanges ............................................................................. 230 1500HP/RFU-HP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications . 234 1500HP/RFU-HP Comparison Table .................................................................. 237 New OCB Component Summary ....................................................................... 244 All-Indoor Compact Placement Components ................................................... 259 RFU Models ........................................................................................................ 261 OCB Part Numbers............................................................................................. 262 OCB Part Numbers for All Indoor Compact ..................................................... 262 All-Indoor Configurations (1+0 /1+1 HSB) ........................................................ 263 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC) ....................................................... 263 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity) .......................... 264 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity) .......................... 264 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 Single Pol) .............................................. 265 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 Single Pol Space Diversity) ................... 265 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC Upgrade ready) ............................. 265 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC Space Diversity Upgrade-Ready) . 266 All-Indoor Configurations (19" Without Rack) ................................................. 266 RFU-HS Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications ............... 269 RFU-SP Frequency Bands ................................................................................. 273 RFU-SP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications ............... 274 RFU-HS-SP Antennas ........................................................................................ 275 1500P Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications .................. 277 1500P Mediation Device Losses ....................................................................... 278 1+1 Components ................................................................................................ 282 1+1 HSB Components........................................................................................ 283 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 20 of 403 1+0 with 32 E1s Components (Each Side of Link) ........................................... 284 1+0 with 64 E1s Components (Each Side of Link) ........................................... 285 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s (no Multi-Radio) Components (Each Side of Link)286 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s (Multi-Radio) Components (Each Side of Link) ... 287 Required Components (Each Side of Link) ...................................................... 288 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s Components (Each Side of the Link) ............................ 289 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s Components (Each Side of the Link) ............................ 290 1+1 HSB with 84 E1 Components (Each Side of the Link) .............................. 291 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Components (Each Side of the Link) ...... 292 Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Components (Each Side of the Link) .................................................................................................... 293 Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Chain) ................................................................................................ 295 Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink Components (Entire Node) ............................................................................................................. 296 Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Chain) ................................................................................................ 297 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Components (Entire Ring) ........................................................................... 298 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Components (Entire Ring) ........................................................................... 299 Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Node) .......................................................................... 300 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Components (Entire Ring) ........ 301 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 Components (Entire Ring) . 302 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Ring) ........................................................................... 303 Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link with 2 x STM-1 Components (Entire Ring) ........................................................................... 304 Dedicated Management Ports ........................................................................... 307 PolyView Server Receiving Data Ports ............................................................. 308 Web Sending Data Ports ................................................................................... 308 Web Receiving Data Ports ................................................................................. 308 Additional Management Ports for IP-10G ......................................................... 308 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 21 of 403 Supported Ethernet Standards ......................................................................... 334 Ethernet Cable and Splitter (Copper) Marketing Models ................................. 384 Ethernet RJ45 - RJ45 Cable Marketing Models ................................................ 384 WSC Protection Cable Marketing Model .......................................................... 385 Ethernet Protection Cable Marketing Model .................................................... 385 Ethernet Y Cable Marketing Model ................................................................... 386 Optical Y Cables, Adaptors, and Extension Cable Marketing Models ............ 387 Optical H Cable Marketing Models .................................................................... 388 E1 Open-End Extension Cable Marketing Models ........................................... 389 E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End Marketing Models ...................... 389 E1 Male-to-Male Extension Cable Marketing Models ....................................... 390 E1 Open-End Termination Cables ..................................................................... 391 E1 RJ-45 Female (Socket) Termination Cables ................................................ 391 E1 RJ-45 Male Termination Cables ................................................................... 391 E1 MDR69 - MDR69 Cross Cables (for Chaining Applications) ...................... 392 E1 Special Cables .............................................................................................. 393 E1 Y Cable Marketing Models ........................................................................... 394 Expansion Panel, Adaptor, and Cable Marketing Models ............................... 395 75 ohm Expansion Panel Marketing Models .................................................... 396 75 ohm Extension Marketing Models................................................................ 397 Alarm Cable Marketing Models ......................................................................... 398 User Channel Cable Marketing Models ............................................................ 399 IF Cable Marketing Models ................................................................................ 400
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 22 of 403 About This Guide This document describes the main features, components, and specifications of the FibeAir IP-10G high capacity IP and Migration-to-IP network solution. This document also describes a number of typical FibeAir IP-10G configuration options. This document applies to hardware versions R2 and R3 and software version I6.9. What You Should Know This document describes applicable ETSI standards and specifications. A North America version of this document (ANSI, FCC) is also available. Target Audience This manual is intended for use by Ceragon customers, potential customers, and business partners. The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information about the FibeAir IP-10G for use in system planning, and determining which FibeAir IP-10G configuration is best suited for a specific network. Related Documents FibeAir IP-10G Installation Guide - DOC-00023199 FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E User Guide, DOC-00034612 FibeAir IP-10 MIB Reference - DOC-00015446 FibeAir IP-10 License Management System - DOC-00019183 FibeAir CeraBuild Commission Reports Guide, DOC-00028133 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 23 of 403 1. Synonyms and Acronyms
ABR Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery ACM Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACR Adaptive Clock Recovery AES Advanced Encryption Standard AIS Alarm Indication Signal ATPC Automatic Tx Power Control BBS Baseband Switching BER Bit Error Ratio BLSR Bidirectional Line Switch Ring BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units BWA Broadband Wireless Access CBS Committed Burst Size CCDP Co-channel dual polarization CFM Connectivity Fault Management CIR Committed Information Rate CLI Command Line Interface CoS Class of Service DA Destination Address DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point EBS Excess Burst Size EIR Excess Information Rate EOW Engineering Order Wire FTP (SFTP) File Transfer Protocol (Secured File Transfer Protocol) GbE Gigabit Ethernet HSB Hot-standby HTTP (HTTPS) Hypertext Transfer Protocol (Secured HTTP) IFC IF Combining IDC Indoor Controller IDU Indoor unit LANs Local area networks LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LMS License Management System FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 24 of 403 LOF Loss Of Frame LTE Long-Term Evolution MAID Maintenance Association (MA) Identifier (ID) NMS Network Management System NTP Network Time Protocol OAM Operation Administration & Maintenance (Protocols) OOF Out-of-Frame PDV Packed Delay Variation PM Performance Monitoring PN Provider Network (Port) PSN Packet Switched Network PTP Precision Timing-Protocol PW Pseudowire QoE Quality of-Experience QoS Quality of Service RDI Reverse Defect Indication RFU Radio Frequency Unit RMON Ethernet Statistics RSL Received Signal Level RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol SD Space Diversity SFTP Secure FTP SLA Service level agreements SNCP TDM trails protection OR Wireless Sub-Network Connection Protection SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SP Strict Priority STP Spanning Tree Protocol SSH Secured Shell (Protocol) SSM Synchronization Status Messages SyncE Synchronous Ethernet TC Traffic Class TOS Type of Service VC Virtual Containers Web EMS Web-Based Element Management System WG Wave guide FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 25 of 403 WFQ Weighted Fair Queue WRED Weighted Random Early Detection WRR Weighted Round Robin XC Cross-Connect XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 26 of 403 2. Introduction This chapter includes: Product Overview IP-10G Advantages Functional Block Diagrams Nodal Configuration Option Solution Overview System Overview FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 27 of 403 2.1 Product Overview FibeAir IP-10G is a high capacity carrier-grade wireless Ethernet backhaul product. Combining advanced Ethernet and TDM networking functionality with best-in-class microwave radio performance, a FibeAir IP-10G system facilitates cost-effective, risk-free migration to IP/Ethernet and can be integrated in any pure IP/Ethernet, Native 2 (hybrid), or TDM network. FibeAir IP-10G features a powerful, integrated Ethernet switch for advanced networking functionality, as well as a comprehensive set of QoS tools and functionality and many other advanced networking features. For TDM, IP-10G includes built-in native TDM support, with an option to add Ceragons Smart TDM Pseudowire, channelized STM-1, or additional native TDM capacity through the addition of a T-Card. IP-10G also includes an optional TDM Cross-Connect for nodal site applications. These features and options provide a flexible and scalable converged all-packet solution for legacy TDM services. With advanced service management and Operation Administration & Maintenance (OA&M) tools, IP-10G simplifies network design, reduces CAPEX and OPEX, and improves overall network availability and reliability to support services with stringent SLA. The FibeAir IP-10G family covers the entire licensed frequency spectrum and offers a wide capacity range, from 10 Mbps to 1 Gbps over a single radio carrier, using a single Radio Frequency Unit (RFU), depending on traffic scenario based on legacy MAC and enhanced Multi-Layer header compression. Additional functionality and capacity, including Multi-Layer header compression, can be enabled via license keys without any need to upgrade the hardware. By enabling more capacity, at lower latencies, to any location, with proper traffic management mechanisms and an optional downstream boost, FibeAir IP-10G is built to enhance end user Quality of Experience. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 28 of 403 2.2 IP-10G Advantages The following are just some of the advantages that IP-10G provides. 2.2.1 Efficient Utilization of Spectrum Assets IP-10G provides efficiencies at three levels -- spectral efficiency, radio link, and wireless network. By combining superior radio performance, advanced compression, and a holistic end-to-end approach to capacity, operators can effectively provide up to five times more traffic to their users. In other words, IP-10G enables more revenue-generating subscribers in a given RAN. 2.2.2 Spectral Efficiency IP-10G provides a high degree of spectral efficiency in a given spectrum channel by optimizing link capacity using adaptive coding and modulation techniques. In addition, IP-10G provides several options for header compression: Legacy MAC header compression Provides up to 45% in additional Ethernet throughput. Multi-Layer (Enhanced) header compression (license-enabled) Provides up to 300% additional effective Ethernet throughput, depending on frame size, channel bandwidth, and modulation. 2.2.3 Radio Link Latency IP-10G boasts ultra-low latency features that are essential for 3G and LTE deployments. With low latency, IP-10G enables links to cascade further away from the fiber PoP, allowing wider coverage in a given network cluster. Ultra-low latency also translates into longer radio chains, broader radio rings, and shorter recovery times. Moreover, maintaining low packet delay variation ensures proper synchronization propagation across the network. System Gain IP-10Gs high system gain enables the use of small antennas and long link spans, resulting in high overall capacity while maintaining critical and real-time traffic, saving on both operational and capital expenditures by using smaller antennas for a given link budget. Power Adaptive ACM IP-10G sets the industry standard for Advanced Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM), increasing network capacity over an existing infrastructure while reducing sensitivity to environmental interferences. In addition, IP-10G provides a unique technological combination of ACM with Adaptive Power to ensure high availability and unmatched link utilization. IP-10Gs ACM implementation includes the ability to configure a minimum modulation profile below which the system may not step down. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 29 of 403 2.2.4 Wireless Network Enhanced QoS IP-10G enables operators to deploy differentiated services with stringent SLAs while maximizing the utilization of network resources. IP-10G enables granular CoS classification and traffic management, network utilization monitoring, and support of EIR traffic without affecting CIR traffic. Enhanced QoS provides a larger selection of classification criteria, color-awareness, up to 255 MEF 10.2-compliant TrTCM policers that offer per service (VLAN+CoS) granularity, WRED for improved congestion management, eight priority queues with configurable buffer length, improved congestion management using WRED protocols, enhanced counters, and other enhanced functionality. Protected ABR IP-10G uses Protected ABR to effectively double the capacity of wireless rings. Protected ABR is a unique network-level method of dynamic capacity allocation for TDM and Ethernet flows. By using the bidirectional capabilities of the ring, TDM-based information is transmitted in one direction and unused protection capacity is allocated to Ethernet traffic. OA&M With advanced service management and Operation Administration & Maintenance (OA&M) tools, IP-10G simplifies network design, reduces operational and capital expenditures, and improves overall network availability and reliability to support services with stringent SLA. 2.2.5 Scalability FibeAir IP-10G is a scalable solution that is based on a common hardware that supports any channel size, modulation scheme, capacity, network topology, and configuration. Scalability and hardware efficiency simplify logistics and allow for commonality of spare parts. A common hardware platform enables customers to upgrade the feature set as the need arises - Pay As You Grow - without requiring hardware replacement. 2.2.6 Availability MTBF. FibeAir IP-10G provides an unrivaled reliability benchmark, with radio MTBF exceeding 112 years, and average annual return rate around 1%. Ceragon radios are designed in-house and employ cutting-edge technology with unmatched production yield, and a mature installed-base exceeding 100,000 radios. In addition, advanced radio features such as multi-radio and cross polarization (XPIC) enable the system to achieve 100% utilization of radio resources by load balancing based on instantaneous capacity per carrier. Important resulting advantages are reduction in capital expenditures due to less spare parts required for roll- out, and reduction in operating expenditures, since maintenance and troubleshooting are infrequently required. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 30 of 403 ACM Adaptive Modulation has a remarkable synergy with FibeAir IP- 10Gs built-in Layer 2 QoS mechanism. Since QoS provides priority support for different classes of service, according to a wide range of criteria, it is possible to configure the system to discard only low priority packets as conditions deteriorate. Adaptive Power and Adaptive Coding & Modulation provides maximum availability and spectral efficiency in any deployment scenario. 2.2.7 Network Level Optimization FibeAir IP-10G optimizes overall network performance, scalability, resilience, and survivability by using hot-standby (HSB) configurations with no single point of failure. In addition, ring and mesh deployments increase resiliency with standard STP as well as with a proprietary enhancement to the industry standard RSTP, resulting in faster recovery time. FibeAir IP-10G helps create a more robust network, with minimum downtime and maximum service grade, ensuring better user experience, better immunity to failures, lower churn, and reduced expenditures. 2.2.8 Network Management Each IP-10 Network Element includes an HTTP web-based element management system (Web EMS) that enables the operator to perform element configuration, RF, Ethernet, and PDH performance monitoring, remote diagnostics, alarm reports, and more. In addition, FibeAir IP-10G provides an SNMP-based northbound interface for network management. For network management, Ceragon offers NetMaster, a comprehensive NMS that provides centralized operation and maintenance capability for the complete range of network elements in an IP-10G system. NetMaster is built using state-of-the-art technology as a scalable, cross-platform NMS that supports distributed network architecture. Ceragon also offers PolyView, with best-in-class end-to-end Ethernet service management, network monitoring, and NMS survivability using advanced OAM. PolyView provides simplified network provisioning, configuration error prevention, monitoring, and troubleshooting tools that ensure better user experience, minimal network downtime, and reduced expenditures on network-level maintenance. 2.2.9 Power Saving Mode with High Power Radio FibeAir IP-10G offers an optional ultra-high power radio solution that transmits the highest power in the industry, while employing an innovative Power Saving Mode that saves up to 30% power consumption. Power Saving Mode enables the deployment of smaller antennas, and reduces the need for repeater stations. Moreover, installation labor cost and electricity consumption are reduced, achieving an overall diminished carbon footprint. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 31 of 403 2.3 Functional Block Diagrams Related topics: Ethernet Switching Nodal Configuration Option Featuring an advanced architecture, FibeAir IP-10G uniquely integrates the latest radio technology with TDM and Ethernet networking. The FibeAir IP- 10G radio core engine is designed to support both native Ethernet and native TDM over the air interface enhanced with Adaptive Power and Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) for maximum spectral efficiency in any deployment scenario. This versatile solution is equipped with an optional integrated TDM Cross-Connect and an SNCP TDM protection engine on top of a MEF-certified Ethernet switch. The modular design is easily scalable with the addition of units or license keys. IP-10G supports the following modes for Ethernet switching: Smart Pipe Ethernet interface is enabled for user traffic. The unit effectively operates as a point-to-point Ethernet microwave radio. Managed Switch Ethernet switching functionality is enabled based on VLANs. Metro Switch Ethernet switching functionality is enabled based on an S-VLAN-aware bridge. Functional Block Diagram
IP-10G can be installed in a standalone or a nodal configuration. The nodal configuration adds a backplane, which is required for certain functionality such as the TDM Cross-Connect and XPIC. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 32 of 403 FibeAir IP-10G Block Diagram
The CPU acts as the IDUs central controller, and all management frames received from or sent to external management applications must pass through the CPU. In a nodal configuration, the main units CPU serves as the central controller for the entire node. The Mux assembles the radio frames, and holds the logic for protection, as well as Frequency and Space Diversity. The modem represents the physical layer, modulating, transmitting, and receiving the data stream. Note: CPU and memory utilization can be monitored by users via the CLI or SNMP. This can be useful for troubleshooting. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 33 of 403 2.4 Nodal Configuration Option IP-10G can be used in two distinct modes of operation: Standalone configuration Each IP-10G IDU is managed individually. Nodal configuration Up to six IP-10G IDUs are stacked in a dedicated modular shelf, and act as a single network element with multiple radio links. The following features are centralized in a nodal configuration: Management Ethernet Switching TDM Cross-Connect A nodal setup supports any combination of 1+0, 1+1, and 2+0/XPIC configurations. 2.4.1 Nodal Configuration Benefits The stackable nodal configuration offers many advantages. For new systems, the nodal configuration offers: Low initial investment without compromising future growth potential Risk-free deployment in light of unknown future growth patterns: Additional capacity Additional sites Additional redundancy For migration and replacement scenarios, the nodal configuration offers: Optimized tail-site solution Low initial footprint that can be increased gradually as legacy equipment is swapped 2.4.2 Nodal Design Each IP-10G IDU in a nodal configuration operates as either the main unit or an extension unit. The IDUs role is determined by its position in the nodal enclosure. The lowest unit in the enclosure (Unit Number 1) always serves as the main unit. The main unit performs the following functions: Provides a central controller for management Provides the Cross-Connect for TDM traffic Provides radio and line interfaces Extension units provide radio and line interfaces, and are accessed through the main unit. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 34 of 403 2.4.3 Nodal Enclosure Design Two types of nodal enclosures are available for a nodal configuration: Main Nodal Enclosure Each node must have a main nodal enclosure, which can hold two IP-10G IDUs. Extension Nodal Enclosure Up to two extension nodal enclosures can be stacked on top of the main nodal enclosure. Each extension nodal enclosure can contain two IP-10G IDUs. Main Nodal Enclosure
Extension Nodal Enclosure
Each nodal enclosure includes a backplane. The rear panel of an IP-10G IDU includes an extra connector for connection to the backplane. The following interfaces are implemented through the backplane: TDM Cross-Connect Multi-Radio Protection XPIC You can add additional extension nodal enclosures and IDUs in the field as required, without affecting traffic. Replacing an IDU or an extension unit does affect traffic. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 35 of 403 Scalable Nodal Enclosure
Using the stacking method, units in the bottom nodal enclosure act as main units, whereby a mandatory active main unit can be located in either of the two slots, and an optional standby main unit can be installed in the other slot. The switchover time is <50 ms for all traffic-affecting functions. Units located in nodal enclosures other than the one on the bottom act as expansion units. Radios in each pair of units can be configured as either dual independent 1+0 links, or single fully redundant 1+1 HSB links. 2.4.4 Nodal Management In a nodal configuration, all management is performed through the main unit. The main unit communicates with the extension units through the nodal backplane. The main units CPU operates as the nodes central controller, and all management frames received from or sent to external management applications must pass through the CPU. A nodal configuration has a single IP management address, which is the address of the main unit. In a protected 1+1 configuration, the node has two IP addresses, those of each of the main units. The IP address of the active main unit is used to manage the node. Several methods can be used for IP-10G node management: Local terminal CLI CLI via telnet Web-based management SNMP The NMS represents the node as a single unit. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 36 of 403 The Web-Based EMS enables access to all IDUs in the node from its main window. In addition, the management system provides access to other network equipment through In-Band or Out-of-Band network management. To ease the reading and analysis of several IDU alarms and logs, the system time should be synchronized to the main units time. 2.4.5 Centralized System Features in a Nodal Configuration The following IP-10G functions are configured centrally through the main unit in a nodal configuration: IP Communications All communication channels are opened through the main units IP address. User Management Login, adding users, and deleting users are performed centrally. TDM Cross-Connect TDM trail definition, PM measurement, and status reporting are performed centrally from the main unit. Nodal Time Synchronization System time is automatically synchronized for all IDUs in the node. Nodal Software Version Management Software can be upgraded or downgraded in all IDUs in the node from the main unit. Nodal Configuration Backup Configuration files can be created, downloaded, and uploaded from the main unit. Nodal Reset Extension units can be reset individually or collectively both from the main unit and locally. All other functions are performed for each IDU individually. 2.4.6 Ethernet Connectivity in a Nodal Configuration Ethernet traffic in a nodal configuration is supported by interconnecting IDU switches with external cables. Traffic flow (dropping to local ports, sending to the radio) is performed by the switches, in accordance with learning tables. Each IDU in the stack can be configured individually for Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, or Metro Switch mode. For additional information: Ethernet Switching FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 37 of 403 2.5 Solution Overview IP-10G is part of the FibeAir IP-10 series that includes IP-10G, packet-only IP- 10E, all-outdoor IP-10C for access, and high-capacity high-density IP-10Q, which is optimized for high-capacity MPLS-aware Ethernet microwave radio where fiber connections are not available. The FibeAir series provides a variety of solutions for a large number of deployment scenarios. FibeAir IP-10 Series Overview Single Carrier/Single Direction TDM and Ethernet Ethernet IP-10G IP-10E IP-10C
As a key component of the FibeAir platform, IP-10G provides complete support for TDM and packet transport networks. IP-10G Complete Support for TDM and Packet Transport Networks
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 38 of 403 IP-10Gs integrated switching, TDM cross-connect (XC), and nodal capabilities are illustrated in the following figure. IP-10G in Hybrid TDM and Ethernet Network
IP-10Gs Smart Pseudowire solution adds another dimension to IP-10G as a migration solution for all-packet networks in which packet segments may be joined with hybrid or TDM segments. Pseudowire can bridge the gap between legacy TDM equipment and the all-packet present and future. IP-10G All-Packet Solution with Integrated Switching and Pseudowire
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 39 of 403 IP-10G provides redundancy and network-level resiliency. In addition to standard RSTP, which is designed to work with any mesh topology, IP-10G offers a proprietary ring-optimized implementation of RSTP. IP-10G in Wireless Native 2 Ring
IP-10G is fully MEF-9 and MEF-14 certified for all Carrier Ethernet services (E- Line and E-LAN). IP-10G also supports TDM trails, and provides end-to-end service management, with OAM that includes 802.1ag CFM and automatic "link trace" processing for storing of the last known working path. IP-10G End-to-End Service Management
Together with the other FibeAir IP-10 products, IP-10G provides an optimal solution for all split-mount tail and node sites, with IP-10Gs smart pseudowire T-Card used selectively to provide an all-packet solution for legacy TDM islands in the network. IP-10E provides a solution for all-packet FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 40 of 403 networks, while IP-10C provides the ideal option for all-outdoor all-Ethernet sites. Integrated Hybrid/All-Packed Solution Using FibeAir IP-10 Products
For additional information: Typical Configurations FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 41 of 403 2.6 System Overview IP-10G provides a large variety of configuration options, including protection options (1+1 HSB, 2+2 HSB), Multi-Radio, XPIC, and diversity (BBS Space and Frequency Diversity, IF Combining). The following are some of the typical point-to-point IP-10G configurations. Typical Point-to-Point Configurations
Typical Node Configurations
For additional information: Typical Configurations FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 42 of 403 3. Release and Version Information This chapter includes: New Features Hardware Compatibility Version Matrix FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 43 of 403 3.1 New Features and Enhancements Version i6.9 introduces the following features: New Features in Version I6.9 Feature For Further Information Smart TDM Pseudowire Smart TDM Pseudowire Enhanced, Multi-Layer Header Compression Ethernet Header Compression RADIUS Server Support RADIUS Support Version i6.9 also introduces significantly enhanced functionality for existing features: Enhancements of Existing Features in Version I6.9 Feature Enhancement For Further Information Enhanced Utilization Statistics Improved accuracy for radio throughput and link utilization statistics. Ethernet Statistics Enhanced QoS Enhanced parsing option: Up to Layer 4 (UDP, TCP) Frame type discovery for supporting full header compression Flow to Service classification for 256 different flows Enhanced CoS and Color classification method: QoS policy rules (port table, Ethertype table) Service ID (256 services) ACM drop level per queue/ACM drop level per service Ingress TrTCM policers per service (Two-Rate Three-Color Marker, according to MEF 10.2) Re-marking options (P-bits and CFI or DEI) Statistics: Per service Enhanced QoS
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 44 of 403 3.2 Hardware Compatibility Software version i6.9 is intended to run on IP-10G (R2 and R3) and IP-10E (R3). Attempting to install this software version on IP-10 R1 may make the system inoperative, requiring the hardware to be sent to the manufacturer for replacement. In addition, note that IP-10G systems with software version 3.0.34 (an earlier version loaded in production for some systems) must be upgraded to an officially released version while in standalone mode rather than in a nodal configuration. R3 and R2 can be used in the same node and in the same link R3 and R2 use the same software version/image R3 and R2 cannot be mixed in the same node for 1+1, 2+0, and 2+2 configurations R3 and R2 configuration files are not compatible FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 45 of 403 3.3 Version Matrix IP-10G R3 requires software release i6.7 and higher. Certain features described in this document are only supported in hardware version R3. The following table compares feature support in R2 and R3. Feature Support in R2 and R3 Feature R2 R3 SyncE Support SyncE output only SyncE input and output SyncE regenerator support for Smart Pipe mode Ethernet Header Compression Layer 1 Header Suppression Legacy MAC Header Compression Same as R2, with a license-enabled option for Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression Enhanced QoS Standard and Enhanced QoS Additional Enhanced QoS Features: MEF 10.2-compliant traffic policers for SLA enforcement: Dual-rate (CIR + EIR) per VLAN/CoS Enhanced monitoring and SLA Assurance: Per VLAN/CoS statistics Improved traffic queues statistics Utilization Statistics Improved accuracy for radio throughput and link utilization statistics In addition, the following table describes feature support by software version. Feature Support by Software Version Feature Software Version Additional Notes For Further Information Equipment Protection Features 1+1 HSB Protection i6.5ca and up 1+1 HSB Protection 2+2 HSB Protection i6.6.2 and up 2+2 HSB Protection Ethernet Line Protection Features Multi-Unit LAG i6.8 and up Multi-Unit LAG Capacity and Latency Features Legacy Compression MAC Header Compression (Legacy Mode) Enhanced Multi- Layer Header Compression i6.9 License required Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 46 of 403 Feature Software Version Additional Notes For Further Information Asymmetrical Scripts i6.8 and up License required Asymmetrical Scripts Radio Features ACM i6.5ca and up Added minimum ACM profile and MRMC profile below threshold alarm in i6.8 Added minimum ACM profile in i6.8 License required Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power I6.7 and up License (ACM) required ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power 1+1 BBS Space Diversity i6.7 and up Diversity 1+1 BBS Frequency Diversity i6.8 and up Diversity 2+0 Multi-Radio i6.7 and up Added 2+0 Multi Radio with Line Protection in i6.8 Multi-Radio XPIC i6.6.1 and up Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC ATPC Override Timer i6.7 and up ATPC Override Timer Radio Disabling i6.6.1 and up Disabling the Radio Radio Traffic Priority i6.7 and up Radio Traffic Priority Ethernet Features Ethernet Statistics i6.5ga and up Ethernet Statistics Ethernet Switching Applications i6.5ga and up License required for Managed Switch and Metro Switch Ethernet Switching Special and Internal VLANs i6.5ca and up Ethernet Switching Ethernet Services i6.7 and up Ethernet Services Link Aggregation (LAG) i6.6.1 and up Link Aggregation (LAG) Standard RSTP i6.6.2 and up Provider mode added in I6.7 Network Resiliency Ring-Optimized RSTP i6.5ga and up License required Network Resiliency FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 47 of 403 Feature Software Version Additional Notes For Further Information Automatic State Propagation i6.5ga and up Improved for 2+0 Multi-Radio in i6.8 Automatic State Propagation Quality of Service (QoS) Features Standard QoS i6.5ga and up Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) Enhanced QoS i6.7 and up Feature enhanced in i6.9 License required Enhanced QoS TDM Features TDM Adaptive Band Recovery (ABR) Path Protection i6.6.2 and up Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery TDM Trails and Cross-Connect i6.5ca and up TDM Trails and Cross-Connect TDM Trail Path Protection (SNCP) i6.5ga and up Wireless SNCP STM-1 Support i6.6 and up Requires T-Card TDM Interface Options Pseudowire Support i6.9 and up Requires T-Card Smart TDM Pseudowire Synchronization Features Network Frequency Distribution Feature available for co-located TDM trails from version: i6.6.1 Frequency distribution added in i6.7 SSM support in radio interfaces added in i6.8 License required for configuration of an external source as a clock source for synchronous Ethernet output Synchronization PRC Pipe Regenerator Mode i6.7 and up SyncE PRC Pipe Regenerator Mode Management and Security Features User Access Control i6.6.1 and up Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures Secure Communication Channels i6.6.1 and up Secure Communication Channels FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 48 of 403 Feature Software Version Additional Notes For Further Information Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File i6.8 and up Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File RADIUS Server I6.9 and up RADIUS Support Security Log i.6.8 and up Security Log Alarms Editing iI6.7 and up Alarms Editing Management Interfaces i6.5ca and up Management Interfaces Downloading Text CLI Configuration Scripts i6.5ga and up Command Line Interface (CLI) NTP Support i6.5ga and up Management Overview Alarm on RSL Level Degradation i6.8 and up Configurable RSL Threshold Alarms and Traps AIS Signaling and Detection i.6.6.1 and up AIS Signaling and Detection SNMP Support i6.5ca and up SNMP Floating IP Address i6.6.1 and up Floating IP Address In-Band Management Isolation in Single Pipe Mode i.6.8 and up In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode LLDP i6.8 and up Automatic Network Topology Discovery with LLDP Protocol CFM (Service OAM) i6.5ga and up Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Software Update Timer i6.8 and up Software Update Timer
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 49 of 403 4. Hardware Description This chapter includes: Hardware Architecture Front Panel Description Ethernet Interfaces Management Interfaces Link Aggregation (LAG) TDM Interface Options Radio Interface Power Interfaces Additional Interfaces Front Panel LEDs External Alarms Front Panel Additional Interfaces FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 50 of 403 4.1 Hardware Architecture A basic IP-10G system consists of an IP-10G indoor unit (IDU) and a radio frequency unit (RFU). An IF cable connects the IDU to the RFU, transmits traffic and management data between the IDU and the RFU, and provides 48 V power to the RFU. An IP-10G unit includes two GE combo ports and five FE electrical ports. An IP-10G unit also includes 16 E1 interfaces. The IP-10G has a slot in which a T-Card can be inserted for additional TDM functionality. Options are: 16 additional E1s Channelized STM-1Pseudowire Some hardware versions include a dual-feed power connection for increased protection. IP-10G can work with a variety of RFU types, including split-mount, remote- mount, and all-indoor configurations. A description of each RFU, as well as a comparison chart of the capacity and features supported in each RFU, is provided in this document. Available assembly options are: With or without XPIC support With or without dual-feed power option For additional information: Radio Frequency Units FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 51 of 403 4.2 Front Panel Description This section describes the IP-10Gs front panel. The following sections provide detailed descriptions of the IP-10G interfaces. IP-10G Front Panel and Interfaces
IP-10G Front Panel with Dual Feed Power
IP-10G Front Panel with Dual Feed Power and 16 X E1 T-Card
IP-10G Interfaces Interface For Further Information 2 X GE Combo Ports Ethernet Interfaces 5 X FE Electrical Ports Ethernet Interfaces 16 X E1s TDM Interface Options TDM Interfaces Add-On Card TDM Interface Options Craft Terminal Additional Interfaces FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 52 of 403 Interface For Further Information Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Additional Interfaces User Channel Additional Interfaces Protection Interface Additional Interfaces RFU Interface Radio Interface Power Interface Power Interfaces Dual-Feed Power Option Power Interfaces Front Panel Alarms Front Panel
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 53 of 403 4.3 Ethernet Interfaces Related Topics: Ethernet Switching Link Aggregation (LAG) FibeAir IP-10G contains two GbE Ethernet interfaces and five FE interfaces on the front panel. For the GbE interfaces, you can choose between two optical and two electrical physical interfaces. Both pairs of GbE interfaces are labeled Eth1 and Eth2. The optical interfaces are located to the left of the electrical interfaces. The FE interfaces are labeled Eth3 through Eth7. All the FE interfaces except Eth3 are dual function interfaces. They can be configured as traffic ports or functional ports for wayside or management, as shown in the table below. In Single Pipe mode, only a single Ethernet interface can be used. The options are: Eth1: Electrical GbE or Optical GbE. Eth3: Electrical FE In Managed Switch and Metro Switch modes, there are no interface limitations. This means that any GbE and/or FE ports can be used. Each interface has a functional LED that indicates how the interface is configured: For GbE interfaces, when an interface is configured as an electrical (RJ-45) interface, its functional LED is turned on. For FE interfaces, when an interface is configured as a functional interface, its functional LED is turned on. The maximum frame length is 1632 bytes for all Ethernet traffic interfaces. An interface configured for Wayside is limited to 1628 bytes. It is possible to use an electrical interface at one end of the link, and an optical interface at the other end. In order to change interfaces, it is essential to disable the active interface first, and then to enable the other interface. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 54 of 403 Ethernet Interface Functionality Interface Name Interface Rate Functionality Smart Pipe Carrier Ethernet Switching Protection FE 10/100 External protection/disabled External protection/disabled Eth1 Electrical GbE - 10/100/1000 OR Optical 1000Base-X 1000 OR Optical 100Base-FX 100 Disabled/Traffic Disabled/Traffic Eth2 Electrical GbE - 10/100/1000 OR Optical 1000Base-X 1000 OR Optical 100Base-FX 100 Disabled or Multi-Unit LAG mirroring port. Disabled/Traffic Eth3 FE 10/100 Disabled/Traffic Disabled/Traffic Eth4 FE 10/100 Disabled/Wayside Disabled/Traffic/Wayside Eth5 FE 10/100 Disabled/Management Disabled/Traffic/Management Eth6 FE 10/100 Disabled/Management Disabled/Traffic/Management Eth7 FE 10/100 Disabled/Management Disabled/Traffic/Management 4.3.1 GbE Interfaces The IP-10G supports two dual GbE interfaces. For each of these interfaces, the user can configure the desired interface: Electrical GbE (10/100/1000) interface, Optical 1000Base-X (SFP) interface or Optical 100Base-FX. It is NOT supported and NOT possible to use SFP with electrical stack. SFP supports only optical stack. In Single Pipe mode, only a single Ethernet interface can be used as a user interface. The Eth2 interface can be also used as a mirroring port for Multi- Unit LAG. Options are: Eth1: Electrical GbE (10/100/1000), Optical 1000Base-X or Optical 100Base-FX. Eth2: May be used as a mirroring port for Multi-Unit LAG. Eth3: Electrical FE It is possible to use an electrical interface at one end of the link, and an optical interface at the other end. In order to change interfaces, it is essential to disable the active interface first, and then to enable the other interface. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 55 of 403 The following table lists recommended SFP manufacturers.
Part Number Item Description Manufacturer Name Manufacturer PN AO-0049-0 XCVR,SFP,850nm,1.25Gb,MM,500M,W.DDM PHOTON PST120-51TP+ AO-0049-0 XCVR,SFP,850nm,1.25Gb,MM,500M,W.DDM Wuhan Telecom. Devices (WTD) RTXM191-551 AO-0049-0 XCVR,SFP,850nm,1.25Gb,MM,500M,W.DDM CORETEK (*) CT-1250NSP-SB1L AO-0049-0 XCVR,SFP,850nm,1.25Gb,MM,500M,W.DDM Fiberxon FTM-8012C-SLG
AO-0037-0 XCVR,SFP,1310nm,1.25Gb,SM,10km Wuhan Telecom. Devices (WTD) RTXM191-401 AO-0037-0 XCVR,SFP,1310nm,1.25Gb,SM,10km CORETEK (*) CT-1250TSP-MB4L-A AO-0037-0 XCVR,SFP,1310nm,1.25Gb,SM,10km Fiberxon FTM-3012C-SLG AO-0037-0 XCVR,SFP,1310nm,1.25Gb,SM,10km AGILENT AFCT-5710PZ * Electrically, these SFP modules work properly but they tend to get mechanically stuck in the IP-10 cage. 4.3.2 100Base-FX support 100Base-FX provides an optical 100Mbps SFP interface. It can be used only on the Eth1 and Eth2 interfaces. Only Full-Duplex operation mode is supported. Auto-negotiation is not supported. The following types of SFP enclosures are supported:
Part Number Item Description Manufacturer Name Manufacturer PN ao-0072-0 XCVR,SFP S1.1 Wuhan Telecom. Devices (WTD) wtd-rtxm139-400 Note: 100Base-FX refers to Multi-Mode fiber and is defined in IEEE 802.3 clause 26. 100Base-LX10 refers to Single-Mode fiber and is defined in IEEE 802.3 clause 58. In the current release, only single mode 100Base-LX10 is supported. For additional information: Ethernet Interface Specifications Multi-Unit LAG FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 56 of 403 4.4 Management Interfaces An IP-10G can be configured to use between 0 and 3 Ethernet management interfaces. The default number of interfaces is 2. Interfaces Eth5, Eth6, and Eth7 are the only interfaces that can be assigned to be management ports, in the order shown in the following table. Management Interfaces Configured Number of Management Interfaces Management Interfaces 1 Eth7 2 (default) Eth7, Eth6 3 Eth7, Eth6, Eth5 0 None Management interfaces are connected to the switch (bridge) and are configured to learning mode. In a nodal configuration, only the main units management interfaces are available. Management frames should always be assigned maximum priority in order to ensure that network management remains available in a loaded network. In order to achieve this, the IP-10G automatically assigns to all management frames (frames incoming from the management interfaces) a p-bit value of 7, which is the highest priority by default. Management interfaces can be configured to have one of the following capacities: 64kbps, 128kbps, 256kbps, 512kbps, 1024kbps, 2048kbps (default). Capacity is limited by the port ingress rate limit. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 57 of 403 4.5 Link Aggregation (LAG) Link aggregation (LAG) enables the user to group several ports into a single logical channel bound to a single MAC address. This logical channel is known as a LAG group. Traffic sent to the ports in a LAG group is distributed by means of a load balancing function. The 802.3ad standard specifies that all ports in a LAG group must have the same data rate and must be configured as full duplex. This is the responsibility of the user. Note: Only static LAG is supported (no support for LACP protocol). Two methods are available for LAG traffic distribution: Simple XOR: In this method, the three LSBs of DA and SA are XORed and the result is used to select one of the ports in the group. This is meant for simpler testing and debugging. Hash (default): In this method, the hash function used by the traffic switch for address table lookups is used to select one of the ports in the group. This is meant for better statistical load balancing. LAG groups may include ports with the following constraints: Only traffic ports (including the radio port), not functional ports, can belong to a LAG group. LAG can only be used in IDUs which are configured for Managed Switch or Metro Switch. All ports in a LAG group must be in the same IDU (same switch) There can be up to three LAG groups per IDU. A LAG can contain from 1 to 5 physical ports. GbE ports (Eth1 and Eth2) and FE ports (Eth3 though Eth7) cannot be in the same LAG group, even if the GbE ports are configured as 100Mbps. The Radio port (Eth8) can only be in a LAG group with GbE ports. 4.5.1 Creating a LAG Group LAG groups are virtual interfaces that do not permanently exist in the system. A LAG group is a logical interface with its own MAC address that differs from that of the component interfaces. A LAG group is created as soon as the first physical port is added to the LAG group. When a LAG group is created by adding a first port to it, the LAG group automatically inherits all the ports characteristics, except for the following: xSTP role (edge, non-edge) Path cost The LAG group is initially assigned default values for these parameters. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 58 of 403 All Ethernet interface parameters can be configured in a LAG group. These parameters are inherited by the groups physical component interfaces, and are unavailable for physical ports belonging to the LAG group, with the following exceptions: Admin Flow control Ingress rate limiting policer name Shaper (egress rate limiting) Peer interface parameters MAC address IP address Slot ID Port number Description 4.5.2 Adding Ports to a LAG Group The following settings must be identical between a LAG group and the ports being added to it. If they are not identical, the ports inclusion in the LAG will be blocked: QoS configuration Port MAC DA QoS classification Port VID QoS classification Port initial QOS classification Port default QoS classification Port VLAN PBITs priority remap Egress scheduling scheme Data rate Type (access/trunk or cn/pn) Interface (electrical/optical) Duplex Auto-negotiation VLANs VLAN list must be identical allow all is considered a different value (must be equal in all ports) Learning state In addition, ports with CFM MEP/MIPs cannot be added to a LAG group (which may have its own MEP/MIPs). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 59 of 403 4.5.3 Removing Ports from a LAG Group Ports removed from a LAG group keep the existing port parameters, but are initially disabled in order to prevent loops. In addition, when the last port is removed from a LAG group, the LAG group is deleted. Therefore, it is necessary to remove all MEP/MIPs from a LAG group before removing the last port. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 60 of 403 4.6 TDM Interface Options IP-10G contains an MDR69 connector in which 16 E1 ports are available (ports 1 through 16). Above the MDR69 connector is an add-on slot which can contain a field- upgradable T-Card with either 16 additional E1 ports, an STM-1 port, or 16 E1 pseudowire processing. The T-Cards are field-upgradable, and add a new dimension to the IP-10Gs migration flexibility. The STM-1 port provides an interface for up to 63 E1 lines inside a standard channelized STM-1 signal. Each E1 line is transported by a VC-12 container, which behaves like a regular line interface. T-Card in Add-In Slot
16 X E1 T-Card
STM 1 Mux T-Card
16 x E1 TDM Pseudowire (PW) Processing T-Card
For additional information: Smart TDM Pseudowire E1 Interface Specifications Smart TDM Pseudowire Interface Specifications Optical STM-1 SFP Interface Specifications FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 61 of 403 4.7 Radio Interface The IP-10Gs radio interface is represented in the system as Eth8. The radio interface uses an N-Type connector to connect, via a coaxial cable, to the RFU. The radio interface can be disabled if necessary. For example, in certain applications, users require extra line interfaces but have no need for additional radio carriers. IP-10G IDUs can be added to a node to provide extra switching or line ports. In this scenario, disabling the radio interface on the additional IDUs prevents unnecessary alarms and other indications. For additional information: Disabling the Radio FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 62 of 403 4.8 Power Interfaces The IP-10G power interface is connected via a proprietary two pin connector, at the end of a 24-12AWG cable supplying -48VDC (nominal). Some hardware versions include a dual-feed power connection for increased protection. In dual power units, the system will indicate whether received voltage in each connection is above or below the threshold power of approximately 40.5V, as follows: The LED (and its WEB representation) will only be on if the voltage is above the threshold. An alarm is raised if voltage is below the threshold. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 63 of 403 4.9 Additional Interfaces An IP-10G contains the following additional interfaces: Terminal Console The terminal console is a DB9 interface. A local craft terminal can be connected to the terminal console for local CLI management of the individual IDU. If the IDU is the main unit in a nodal configuration, access to other units in the configuration is also available through the terminal console of the main unit. The terminal console has the following parameters: Baud: 115200 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow Control: None Engineering Order Wire (EOW) (optional) User Channels The IP-10G front panel includes two user-selectable user channels (RJ-45). The following options are available for the user channels: Two RS-232 Asynchronous user channels (9600bps each) Two V.11 Asynchronous user channels (9600bps each) One RS-232 Asynchronous user channel, and one V.11 Asynchronous user channel (9600bps each) One V.11 Synchronous Co-Directional user channel (64Kbps) One V.11 Synchronous Contra Directional user channel (64Kbps) Backplane Connector IP-10G has an extra connector on the back panel for connection to the backplane used in nodal configurations. Protection Interface (PROT) IP-10G has an Ethernet protection control interface for use in 1+1 HSB standalone configurations. Note: In nodal configurations, the nodal backplane provides the protection interface. For additional information: Equipment Protection Auxiliary Channel Specifications FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 64 of 403 4.10 Front Panel LEDs The following LEDs are located beneath the external alarms on the front panel: LINK Indicates status of the radio link. IDU Indicates status of the Ethernet interface. RFU Indicates status of the RF module. PROT Indicates the main and standby unit alarm and protection status. RMT Indicates status of the remote unit. These LEDs indicate the following: LINK Green Radio link is operational Orange Minor BER alarm on the radio Red Loss of signal, major BER alarm on the radio IDU Green IDU is functioning normally Orange Fan failure Red Alarm on IDU (all severities) RFU Green RFU is functioning normally Orange Loss of communication between the IDU and the RFU Red RFU failure PROT Main Unit Green No alarms Standby Unit Yellow No alarms Orange Forced switch, protection lock Red Physical errors (no cable, cable failure) Off Protection is disabled, or not supported on the device RMT Green Remote IDU is functioning normally Orange Minor alarm on the remote IDU Red Major alarm on the remote IDU FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 65 of 403 4.11 External Alarms IP-10G includes a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface. The external alarms interface supports five input alarms and a single output alarm. The input alarms are configurable according to: 1 Intermediate 2 Critical 3 Major 4 Minor 5 Warning The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 66 of 403 5. Licensing This chapter includes: License Overview Working with License Keys Licensed Features FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 67 of 403 5.1 License Overview FibeAir IP-10G offers a pay as-you-grow concept to reduce network costs. Future capacity growth and additional functionality is enabled with license keys and an innovative stackable nodal solution using the same hardware. Licenses are divided into two categories: Per Radio Each IDU (both sides of the link) require a license. Per Configuration Only one license is required for the system. A 1+1 configuration requires the same set of licenses for both the active and the protected IDU. In nodal configurations, for licenses that are not per radio, licenses should be assigned to the main (bottom) IDU in the enclosure. 5.2 Working with License Keys Ceragon provides a web-based License Management System (LMS). The LMS enables authorized users to generate license keys, which are generated per IDU serial number. In order to upgrade a license, the license-key must be entered into the IP-10G, followed by a cold reset. When the system returns online following the reset, its license key is checked and implemented, enabling access to new capacities and/or features. For more detailed information, refer to FibeAir IP-10 License Management System, DOC-00019183. 5.3 Licensed Features As your network expands and additional functionality is desired, license keys can be purchased for the features described in the following table. License Types License Name Description For Addition Information Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) Enables the Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) feature. An ACM license is required per radio. If additional IDUs are required for non-radio functionality, no license is required for these units. Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) L2 Switch Enables Carrier Ethernet Switching functionality (Managed Switch and Metro Switch). A license is required for any IDU that requires the use of two or more Ethernet ports. Ethernet Switching Capacity Upgrade Enables you to increase your systems radio capacity in gradual steps by upgrading your capacity license. Capacity upgrades apply to the sum of Ethernet and TDM capacity.
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 68 of 403 License Name Description For Addition Information Network Resiliency Enables the following features for improving network resiliency: xSTP If Ring-Optimized RSTP or legacy RSTP is required, an L2 Switch license must also be purchased. TDM trails protection (SNCP) Only one Network Resiliency license is required for an east-west configuration. Network Resiliency and xSTP Wireless SNCP Synchronization Unit Enables the Synchronization unit required for Native Sync Distribution mode or SyncE support. Synchronization Enhanced QoS Enables the Enhanced QoS feature, which includes a larger selection of classification criteria, color- awareness, up to 255 MEF 10.2-compliant TrTCM policers that offer per service (VLAN+CoS) granularity, WRED for improved congestion management, eight priority queues with configurable buffer length, improved congestion management using WRED protocols, enhanced counters, and other enhanced functionality. A license is required per radio. Enhanced QoS Asymmetrical Scripts Enables the use of asymmetrical scripts. Asymmetrical Scripts Enhanced Header Compression Enables the use of Multi-Layer header compression, which can increase effective throughput by up to 300%. Ethernet Header Compression For additional information: Software License Marketing Models FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 69 of 403 6. Feature Description This chapter includes: Equipment Protection Ethernet Line Protection Capacity and Latency Radio Features Ethernet Features Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) TDM Solution Synchronization FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 70 of 403 6.1 Equipment Protection This section includes: Equipment Protection Overview 1+1 HSB Protection 2+0 Multi-Radio and 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection 2+2 HSB Protection Switchover Triggers Related topics: Ethernet Line Protection Floating IP Address FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 71 of 403 6.1.1 Equipment Protection Overview Equipment protection is possible in both standalone and nodal configurations. The following protected configurations are available: 1+1 HSB 2+0 Multi-Radio 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection 2+2 HSB and Multi-Radio The following table summarizes the degree of protection provided by the various IP-10G configuration options. Comparison of IP-10G Protection Options Configuration # of IDUs per Terminal # of RFUs per Terminal Radio Capacity Normal Radio Capacity Unit Failure Native TDM Protection XPIC Support ACM Support BBS (SD/FD) Support 1+1 HSB 2 2 1 1 Protected TDM trails are duplicated in the active and standby IDUs. No Optional 1 Optional 2+0 Multi-Radio 2 2 2 RFU Failure 1 2
IDU (Slave) Failure 1 3
IDU (Master) Failure - 0 TDM capacity is doubled but not protected. 4
Optional Optional No 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection 2 2 2 RFU Failure 1 5
IDU (Slave or Master) Failure - 1 6
TDM capacity is doubled but not protected. 7
Optional Optional 8 No 2+2 HSB with Multi-Radio 4 4 2 2 Full protection Optional Optional No
1 ACM is not supported when BBS (SD/FD) is used. 2 With graceful degradation. 3 With graceful degradation. 4 Protection can optionally be provided using the SNCP/ABR mechanism. This is done by defining a primary TDM trail over one radio carrier and a secondary trail over the other radio carrier. The secondary trail will back up the primary trail in the event of any failure (assuming the main IDU performing the node TDM XC is functional). 5 With graceful degradation. 6 With graceful degradation. 7 Protection can optionally be provided using the SNCP/ABR mechanism. This is done by defining a primary TDM trail over one radio carrier and a secondary trail over the other radio carrier. The secondary trail will back up the primary trail in the event of any failure (assuming the main IDU performing the node TDM XC is functional). 8 ACM support is only provided for Ethernet traffic, not for TDM trails. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 72 of 403 6.1.2 1+1 HSB Protection This feature cannot be used with the following: Multi-Radio 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection Smart TDM Pseudowire Related topics: Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) A 1+1 configuration scheme can be used to provide full protection in the event of IDU or RFU failure. The two IDUs operate in active and standby mode. If there is a failure in the active IDU or RFU, the standby IDU and RFU pair switches to active mode. TDM trails are duplicated in the active and standby IDUs, so that both Ethernet and TDM traffic is protected. In a 1+1 configuration, the protection options are as follows: Standalone The IDUs must be connected by a dedicated Ethernet protection cable. Each IDU has a unique IP address. Nodal The IDUs are connected by the backplane of the nodal enclosure. There is one IP address for each of the main units. 1+1 HSB can be used with BBS Space or Frequency Diversity. The following figure illustrates a 1+1 HSB configuration in a standalone setup, with an Ethernet protection cable connecting the two IDUs via their Protection ports. 1+1 HSB Protection Connecting the IDUs
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 73 of 403 The following figure illustrates a 1+1 HSB Space Diversity configuration in a standalone setup. 1+1 HSB Node with BBS Space Diversity
The following figure shows an example of a 1+1 HSB nodal configuration used in an IP-10G 3 x 1+1 aggregation site. In this example, the node includes the following components: One main nodal enclosure with two IDUs One configured as Main The other configured as Protected One extension nodal enclosure with two IDUs configured as Extension One extension nodal enclosure with one IDU configured as Extension 3 x 1+1 Aggregation Site
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 74 of 403 IP-10G units in a 1+1 HSB configuration constitute a completely redundant system, including management. Each unit can be managed with its own IP address, and the whole node can be accessed via the active unit. To ensure that the user can always access the active unit directly, even in the event of switchover, a floating IP address can be configured. This provides a single IP address that will always provide direct access to the currently active main unit. In a 1+1 HSB configuration, it is necessary for both units to have the same configuration. IP-10G includes a mismatch mechanism that detects if there is a mismatch between the configurations of the local and mate units. This mechanism is activated by the system periodically and independently of other protection mechanisms, at fixed intervals. It is activated asynchronously in both the active and the standby units. Once the mismatch mechanism detects a configuration mismatch, it raises a Mate Configuration Mismatch alarm. When the configuration of the active and standby unit is changed to be identical, the mechanism clears the Mate Configuration Mismatch alarm. For addition information: Switchover Triggers Floating IP Address FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 75 of 403 6.1.3 2+0 Multi-Radio and 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection This feature requires: Nodal configuration This feature cannot be used with the following: 1+1 HSB 2+2 HSB Space and frequency diversity ACM Related topics: Multi-Radio Nodal Configuration Option Wireless SNCP 2+0 Multi-Radio provides a significant degree of protection, in addition to doubling capacity by enabling two separate radio carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. In the event of RFU failure, or failure of the slave IDU, one RFU and IDU remain in operation, with graceful degradation of service to ensure that not all data is lost, but rather, a reduction of bandwidth occurs. However, if there is a failure of the master IDU, traffic and management access is lost. The IDU and line protection option increases protection to the master IDU. If there is a failure in the master IDU, the slave IDU becomes the master, and continues to provide service. Thus, a 2+0 Multi-Radio configuration with IDU and line protection provides protection for the failure of any IDU or RFU in the node. The IDU and line protection feature protects Ethernet traffic. It also protects management of the node, since node management is handled by the master IDU. Graceful degradation is provided with the help of IP-10Gs integrated QoS mechanism, which ensures that high-priority traffic is maintained in the event of reduced bandwidth. Notes: TDM traffic is not protected in Multi-Radio, either with or without line protection. However, TDM protection can be provided by duplicating each TDM trail in both radio channels using SNCP. The primary trail is defined in the master IDU, and the secondary trail is defined in the slave IDU. TDM trails are not supported when Multi-Radio with line protection is active in ACM adaptive mode. When using Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection, ACM is supported for Ethernet traffic, but not for TDM trails. 6.1.3.1 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection Basic Operation Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection is available for adjacent pairs of IDUs in a nodal enclosure (slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 76 of 403 The active unit is the IDU that currently holds the line interfaces and it is also a Multi-Radio master unit. The following diagram illustrates the traffic flow in Multi-Radio with line protection. Multi-Radio 2+0 with Line Protection Traffic Flow
T D M T D M Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet TDM T D M T D M E t h e r n e t
T D M Cross-Connect (XC) Module Ethernet
T D M TDM E t h e r n e t Ethernet TDM TDM Ethernet Orange lines represent the Ethernet traffic flow, while blue lines represent TDM traffic flow. The active IDU holds the line interfaces for Ethernet traffic, the line interfaces for TDM traffic, and the interface with the Cross-Connect module. The active IDU acts as a Multi-Radio master unit by distributing the Ethernet traffic between its own radio channel and the radio channel of its mate. At the receive side of the link, the active IDU combines the data from both radio channels to create a single Ethernet stream. When a protection switch occurs, the new active IDU also becomes the Multi-Radio main unit. The following events will cause a protection switchover: GbE line Loss of Carrier (LOC) TDM interface Loss of Signal (LOS) STM-1 LOS User manual switch Note: Radio failure or BER in the radio channel will not cause a protection switchover. Multi-Radio protects against radio channel failure by blocking the defective radio. For addition information: Switchover Triggers FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 77 of 403 6.1.4 2+2 HSB Protection This feature requires: Nodal configuration This feature cannot be used with the following: 2+0 Multi-Radio with line protection Related topics: Nodal Configuration Option 2+2 HSB protection provides full redundancy between two pairs of IDUs. Each pair is a 2+0 link, which can be configured for XPIC or in different frequencies. If there is a failure in one of these pairs, the other pair takes over. A 2+2 protection scheme must be implemented by means of a nodal configuration. Each pair is inserted into its own main nodal enclosure, with a protection cable to connect the main IDUs (in slot 1) in each pair. Protection is performed between the pairs. At any given time, one pair is active and the other is standby. A 2+2 configuration scheme is only possible between units in a main nodal enclosure (slots 1 and 2). Extension nodal enclosures (slots 3 6) cannot be used in a 2+2 configuration. 2+2 protection can be used together with XPIC and/or Multi-Radio. The following figure illustrates a 2+2 configuration with both XPIC and Multi- Radio. The RFUs marked V are set to vertical polarization, while the RFUs marked H are set to horizontal polarization. 2+2 with XPIC, Multi-Radio, and 2 x STM1
In a 2+2 configuration, the lower IDU in each pair is a master unit, and does the following: Sends and receives traffic to and from the user through line interfaces. Receives protection information from the slave unit in the pair. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 78 of 403 Sends and receives protection information to and from a second master unit. At any one time, one master unit is the decision unit, and the other is the report unit. In a 2+2 configuration, the upper IDU in each pair is a slave unit, and does the following: Sends and receives traffic through line interfaces. Sends protection information to the master unit in the pair. Slave units always behave as report units. In other words, they are told by the master unit whether to be in active or standby mode. 2+2 operation is similar to 1+1, as follows: The same criteria (interfaces LOS, LOC, LOF) are monitored and compared between active and standby units, with the comparison carried out by master units. All enabled interfaces of all four IDUs are monitored. A missing slave unit is interpreted as LOS in its interfaces. A missing master causes a no mate condition. 6.1.4.1 XPIC and 2+2 Protection 2+2 XPIC is a common application. Since XPIC and 2+2 HSB Protection operate through unrelated mechanisms, a number of safeguards exist to assure their proper operation in tandem. The XPIC recovery mechanism is disabled in a 2+2 HSB configuration. The reason for this is that in case of a failure in a link, the system must switch to the standby pair instead of attempting to recover the link, as done in 2+0 XPIC. Additionally, in order to assure that the conditions for XPIC exist (in particular, having the same radio script and frequencies), the following mechanisms are active in a 2+2 XPIC configuration: The following parameters can be changed only in the master units. The changes are implemented in the corresponding slave units automatically: Radio script Radio TX frequency Radio RX frequency If the change failed to be implemented in the slave unit for any reason, the change in the master unit is rolled back, and an error message is displayed. For addition information: Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) Switchover Triggers Floating IP Address FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 79 of 403 6.1.5 Switchover Triggers Switchover triggers for 1+1 and 2+2 HSB protection configurations are described in the following table, according to their priority, with the highest priority triggers on top. HSB Protection Switchover Triggers Priority Fault Remark 1 Mate Power OFF - 2 Lockout Does not persist after cold reset. 3 Force Switch Does not persist after cold reset. 4 Local Radio LOF - 5 TDM Line LOS/SFP LOS/GBE LOC Electrical GBE LOC is configurable. Only the active unit is monitored in this case. 6 Change Remote request due to "Radio LOF" - 7 Local Radio Excessive BER Configurable. Irrelevant in ACM adaptive mode 8 Change Remote due to Radio Excessive BER Irrelevant in ACM adaptive mode 9 Manual Switch -
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 80 of 403 6.2 Ethernet Line Protection This section includes: Ethernet Line Protection Options Multi-Unit LAG Ethernet Line Protection Using Splitters FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 81 of 403 6.2.1 Ethernet Line Protection Options IP-10G offers a number of Ethernet line protection options for various multi- unit configuration scenarios in which two IP-10G IDUs are connected to an external switch or router. These are: Single Interface with Splitter A single interface in the external switch or router is connected to each of the two IDUs using a splitter. A splitter can be used with Fast Ethernet ports and optical GbE ports. Dual Interface with Optical Splitter Two interfaces in the external switch or router are configured as a static LAG, and each interface is connected to each IDU using a splitter. Splitters can be used with Fast Ethernet ports and optical GbE ports. Dual Interface with Multi-Unit LAG Two interfaces in the external switch or router are configured as a static LAG, and each interface is connected to one IDU. Full protection of each interface is provided by a LAG that includes interfaces in both IDUs. Multi-Unit LAG can be used with both optical and electrical GbE ports. Hardware Protection with Single Interface Using Optical Splitter Full protection with Dual Interface Using Optical Splitters and LAG Full Protection Using Multi-Unit LAG
All of these line protection methods are available for any of the following configurations: 1+1 HSB 2+0 Multi Radio with IDU and Line Protection 2+2 Multi-Radio All BBS diversity configurations FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 82 of 403 The following table compares the advantages and limitations of the Ethernet line protection schemes described in this section. Ethernet Line Protection Comparison Protection Scheme Extent of Protection Interfaces Switching Mode Splitters Required Dual interface with Multi- Unit LAG Full Ethernet line protection for IDU and switch/router interfaces. Optical GbE Electrical GbE Smart Pipe 0 Single Interface with Optical Splitter Protection for failure of IDU interface, but not for failure of external switch/router interface. Optical GbE Fast Ethernet Smart Pipe Managed Switch Metro Switch 1 Dual Interface with Optical Splitters Full Ethernet line protection for IDU and switch/router interfaces. Optical GbE Fast Ethernet Managed Switch Metro Switch 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 83 of 403 6.2.2 Multi-Unit LAG This feature requires: Smart Pipe switching mode Related topics: Link Aggregation (LAG) Ethernet Switching Diversity With Multi-Unit LAG, the switch or router relates to two IDUs as a single device. There is no need for splitters, and Multi-Unit LAG can be used to protect either the electrical GbE ports or the optical GbE ports. In contrast, splitters can only be used to protect optical GbE ports or Fast Ethernet ports. Multi-Unit LAG can only be used in Smart Pipe mode. The service disruption time in case of failure in one of the LAG physical ports is less than 50ms in most cases. An IP-10G system using Multi-Unit LAG has dual (redundant) GbE interfaces. Each of these interfaces is connected to a separate interface on an external switch or router. The IP-10G interfaces are active and enabled on both the active or master unit and the standby or slave unit. On the external unit, a static LAG must be configured on the interfaces that are connected to the IDUs. If the IP-10G IDUs are in Multi-Radio mode with IDU and line protection, any link failure triggers graceful degradation and is transparent to the external unit. If an IDU itself experiences unit failure, the interface to which it is connected on the external unit is disabled. If the disabled IDU is the standby unit, or if it is the active unit and Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection is enabled, the functioning IDU maintains connectivity with the external unit via the interface to which the functioning IDU is connected. Multi-Unit LAG is supported with any of the following protection features: 1+1 HSB 1+1 Space or Frequency Diversity 2+2 HSB 2+0 Multi Radio with line protection Multi-Unit LAG is supported in both standalone and nodal configurations. Multi-Unit LAG supports both electrical and optical interfaces. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 84 of 403 The following figure illustrates the basic operation of Multi-Unit LAG. Multi-Unit LAG Basic Operation
An external switch is connected to the HSB-protected IDU link by means of two static Link Aggregation (LAG) ports. The external switch can be another IP-10G IDU or any third party equipment that supports static LAG protocol. The first LAG port of the external switch is connected to Eth1 of the active IDU and the second LAG port is connected to Eth1 of the standby IDU. Eth2 of the active IDU is connected to Eth2 of the standby IDU, as shown in the above figure. This port (Eth2) is used for traffic mirroring, as described below. In the uplink direction (toward the radio), the external switch splits the packets between the two LAG interfaces, which are connected to the active and standby IDUs. Ethernet packets received from the LAG interface in the active IDU are sent to the radio. Ethernet packets received from the LAG interface in the standby IDU are mirrored to the active IDU on Eth2. The active unit receives these packets from Eth2 and sends them to the radio. In the downlink (from the radio), the active IDU receives Ethernet packets from the radio and forwards all of the packets to the External Switch through Eth1. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 85 of 403 The following table describes the behavior of Multi-Unit LAG Ethernet line protection in various failure scenarios. Multi-Unit LAG Failure Scenarios Scenario Reaction Failure in port1 in active Initiate protection switchover. Failure in port1 in standby LAG protocol on the external switch recognizes the port failure and uses the second LAG port (the one that is connected to the active IDU). No protection switchover is initiated. Failure in the mirroring port Standby unit shuts down Eth1 to indicate failure to the external switch. After resolving the failure, the standby unit reopens port1 automatically. No protection switchover is initiated. In a 2+2 HSB configuration, Multi-Unit LAG can be activated between slot 1 of the active nodal enclosure and slot 1 of the standby nodal enclosure and/or between slot 2 of the active nodal enclosure and slot 2 of the standby nodal enclosure, respectively. Notes: Eth1 and Eth2 must have the same type of physical interface (e.g., both optical or both electrical). To improve protection switchover delays, it is recommended to disable auto-negotiation and automatic state propagation on all the interfaces. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 86 of 403 6.2.3 Ethernet Line Protection Using Splitters FE interfaces can be split using either an appropriate splitter or an external protection panel designed for that purpose. Optical SFP interfaces can be split using either an optical splitter or an external protection panel. The electrical GbE interface cannot be split. However, protection can be provided in Single Pipe mode using Multi-Unit LAG. A Line LOC Protection switchover can only be triggered by LOC on the optical- (SFP) interface. The electrical interfaces' LOC (10/100 or 10/100/1000) cannot initiate a protection switchover. For additional information: Multi-Unit LAG FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 87 of 403 6.3 Capacity and Latency This section includes: Capacity Summary Ethernet Header Compression Latency Asymmetrical Scripts FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 88 of 403 6.3.1 Capacity Summary Modulations QPSK to 256 QAM Radio capacity Up to 20/50/100/220/280/500 Mbps throughput over 3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz channels Radio capacity with legacy MAC Header Compression Up to 20/58/125/281/370/532 Mbps throughput Radio capacity with Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression (license-enabled) 51/146/317/713/938/1,000 Mbps throughput. All licensed bands L6, U6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 28, 32, 38, 42 GHz Highest scalability From 10 Mbps to 500 Mbps, using the same hardware, including the same RFU, and up to 1 Gbps with Multi-Layer Enhanced Header Compression. For additional information: Radio Capacity Specifications FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 89 of 403 6.3.2 Ethernet Header Compression IP-10G offers several Ethernet header compression methods, which enable operators to significantly improve Ethernet throughout over the radio link without affecting user traffic: No Header Compression (Layer 1 Header Suppression) Removes the IFG and Preamble fields. This mechanism operates automatically even if no header compression is selected by the user. MAC Header Compression (Legacy Mode) Operates at Layer 2, compressing the MAC SA and the MAC DA. The user can enable or disable MAC header compression. Multi-Layer Header Compression (Enhanced Compression) Users can configure the depth of Enhanced Compression, up to Layer 4. Enhanced Compression requires software version i6.9 and hardware version R3. Enhanced Compression also requires a license. Header Compression
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 90 of 403 6.3.2.1 Layer 1 Header Suppression Even when no header compression is enabled, IP-10G performs Layer 1 header suppression. Layer 1 header suppression removes the IFG and Preamble fields (20 bytes), replacing them with a GFP header. Headers fields in Layers 2 through 4 are not compressed at all. The following figure provides a detailed diagram of Layer 1 header suppression. Layer 1 Header Suppression L3/L4 headers (optional) & Payload CRC MAC DA MAC SA 0x0800/0x86DD 0x8100 (opt) C-Vlan (opt) 6B 6B 2B 2B 2B 4B L 2
h e a d e r
( M A C ) M A C 0x8A88 (opt) S-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Preabmle 12B 8B L 1
h e a d e r
( P H Y ) L3/L4 headers (optional) & Payload CRC 4B GFP header 4B 0x0800/0x86DD 0x8100 (opt) C-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B 2B 0x8A88 (opt) S-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B MAC DA MAC SA 6B 6B
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 91 of 403 6.3.2.2 MAC Header Compression (Legacy Mode) IP-10Gs legacy MAC header compression operates on Layer 2, and supports up to eight flows. Legacy MAC header compression improves effective throughput over the radio link by up to 45% or more without affecting user traffic. Legacy MAC header compression compresses the MAC SA and the MAC DA fields (12 bytes). Layer 1 header suppression is also active, replacing the IFG and Preamble fields (20 bytes) with a GFP header. Legacy MAC header compression does not require a license, and can be enabled and disabled by the user. By default, legacy MAC header compression is disabled. The following figure provides a detailed diagram of how the frame structure is affected by legacy MAC header compression. Legacy MAC Header Compression L3/L4 headers (optional) & Payload CRC MAC DA MAC SA 0x0800/0x86DD 0x8100 (opt) C-Vlan (opt) 6B 6B 2B 2B 2B 4B L 2
h e a d e r
( M A C ) M A C 0x8A88 (opt) S-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Preabmle 12B 8B L 1
h e a d e r
( P H Y ) L3/L4 headers (optional) & Payload CRC 4B Flow ID GFP header 4B 0x0800/0x86DD 0x8100 (opt) C-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B 2B 0x8A88 (opt) S-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B 1B
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 92 of 403 6.3.2.3 Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression This feature requires: Hardware version R3 Enhanced Header Compression license Related topics: Licensing Multi-Layer (Enhanced) header compression identifies traffic flows and replaces the header fields with a "flow ID". This is done using a sophisticated algorithm that learns unique flows by looking for repeating frame headers in the traffic stream over the radio link and compressing them. The principle underlying this feature is that packet headers in todays networks use a long protocol stack that contains a significant amount of redundant information. In Enhanced Compression mode, the user can determine the depth to which the compression mechanism operates, from Layer 2 to Layer 4. Operators must balance the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to ensure maximum efficiency. Up to 256 concurrent flows are supported. Up to 68 bytes of the L2-4 header can be compressed. In addition Layer 1 header suppression is also performed, replacing the IFG and Preamble fields (20 bytes) with a GFP header. Multi layer header compression can be used to compress the following types of header stacks: Ethernet MAC untagged IPv4 TCP UDP IPv6 TCP UDP MPLS Ethernet MAC + VLAN IPv4 TCP UDP IPv6 TCP UDP MPLS Ethernet MAC with QinQ IPv4 TCP UDP IPv6 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 93 of 403 TCP UDP MPLS PBB-TE The following figure provides a detailed diagram of how the frame structure is affected by Multi-Layer (Enhanced) header compression. Multi-Layer (Enhanced) Header Compression Payload CRC MAC DA MAC SA 0x0800/0x86DD 0x8100 (opt) C-Vlan (opt) IPv4/6 UDP/TCP 6B 6B 2B 2B 2B 24/40B 8/28B 4B L 2
h e a d e r
( M A C ) L 3
h e a d e r M A C 0x8A88 (opt) S-Vlan (opt) 2B 2B Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Preabmle 12B 8B L 4
h e a d e r L 1
h e a d e r
( P H Y ) Payload CRC 4B Compressed header & Flow ID GFP header 4B
IP-10Gs Multi-Layer (enhanced) header compression can improve effective throughput by up to 300% or more without affecting user traffic. 6.3.2.4 Enhanced Header Compression Compatibility The IP-10Gs configuration monitoring mechanism is used to provide backwards compatibility with legacy hardware and software versions that do not support Multi-Layer (enhanced) header compression. A configuration mismatch may occur in the following scenarios: The remote IDU is using a pre-I6.9 software release. The remote IDU is using a pre-R3 hardware release. The remote IDU is configured to Legacy compression mode. In each of these scenarios, both sides of the link will use Legacy compression mode and an alarm will be raised to indicate that there is a configuration mismatch. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 94 of 403 6.3.2.5 Enhanced Header Compression Counters In order to help operators optimize Multi-Layer (Enhanced) header compression, IP-10G provides counters when Enhanced Compression is enabled. These counters include real-time information, such as the number of currently active flows and the number of flows by specific flow type. This information can be used by operators to monitor network usage and capacity, and optimize the Multi-Layer compression settings. By monitoring the effectiveness of the compression settings, the operator can adjust these settings to ensure that the network achieves the highest possible effective throughput. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 95 of 403 6.3.2.6 Ethernet Header Compression Comparison The following table summarizes the basic features of IP-10Gs legacy and enhanced Ethernet header compression mechanisms. Ethernet Header Compression Comparison Table No Compression (L1 header suppression only) MAC (L2) Header Compression (Legacy Mode) Multi-Layer (L2-4) Header Compression (Enhanced Compression) Hardware R2 and R3 R2 and R3 R3 SW license - - Enhanced Compression license required L1 header suppression (removing IFG and Preamble fields) Yes Yes Yes Compressed headers - L2: MAC SA (6 bytes) MAC DA (6 bytes) L2: Ethertype (2 bytes) MAC SA (6 bytes) MAC DA (6 bytes) Outer VLAN header (4 bytes) Inner VLAN header (4 bytes) MPLS header (4 bytes) B-MAC header (22 bytes) L3: IPv4 header (24 bytes) IPv6 header (40 bytes) L4: UDP header (8 bytes) TCP header (28 bytes) Number of flows - 8 256
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 96 of 403 6.3.3 Latency IP-10G provides best-in-class latency (RFC-2544) for all channels, making it LTE (Long-Term Evolution) ready: <0.21ms for 28/56MHz channels (1518 byte frames) <0.4 ms for 14MHz channels (1518 byte frames) <0.9 ms for 7MHz channels (1518 byte frames) 6.3.3.1 Benefits of IP-10Gs Top-of-the-Line Low Latency IP-10Gs ability to meet the stringent latency requirements for LTE systems provides the key to expanded broadband wireless services: Longer radio chains Larger radio rings Shorter recovery times More capacity Easing of Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) limitations 6.3.3.2 Frame Cut-Through Support Frames assigned to high priority queues can pre-empt frames already in transmission over the radio from other queues. Transmission of the pre- empted frames is resumed after the cut-through with no capacity loss or re- transmission required. This feature provides services that are sensitive to delay and delay variation, such as VoIP and Pseudowires, with true transparency to lower priority services. Notes: Frame Cut-Through is not supported in the current software release, but is planned for future release. Contact your Ceragon representative for up-to-date information on availability. For additional information: Ethernet Latency Specifications E1 Latency Specifications FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 97 of 403 6.3.4 Asymmetrical Scripts This feature requires: Asymmetrical scripts license IP-10G provides several asymmetrical radio script options that enable operators to optimize spectrum use by increasing downlink capacity and decreasing uplink capacity by at least 50%. Traditionally, microwave point-to-point links are symmetrical, providing equal amounts of bandwidth for TX and RX traffic flows. However, in many cellular applications, the demand for bandwidth is asymmetrical, with a much greater demand for downlink than for uplink bandwidth. For the purpose of illustration, assume a chain that consists of two 14 MHz channels, for a total of 28 MHz. The following figure depicts a symmetrical configuration that uses two adjacent spectrum segments of 7 MHz each. Each signal in the link consumes two segments of 7 MHz each, for a total of 14 MHz on the uplinks and 14 MHz on the downlinks. Symmetrical Chain Example
The following is an example of an asymmetrical chain using the same 14MHz channels in slices of 7 MHz. The entire 28 MHz uplink and downlink spectrum is divided into eight segments of 7 MHz each, but one segment is moved from the right uplink to the left downlink, increasing its capacity by 50%, from 14 MHz to 21 MHz. Similarly, one segment is moved from the left uplink to the right downlink, expanding the capacity of the right downlink by 50% (from 14 MHz to 21 MHz. Note: This example shows just one of several ways in which capacity can be reallocated in an asymmetrical configuration. Asymmetrical Chain Example
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 98 of 403 The following illustration provides an example of a symmetrical aggregation site in which the right link aggregates traffic from two downlinks. In this example, all the links are symmetrical, while the aggregation link has double the capacity of each of the downlinks. For purposes of this example, the downlinks each have a capacity of 14 MHz, consisting of two 7 MHz segments. The aggregation link has a capacity of 28 MHz, consisting of four 7 MHz segments. Symmetrical Aggregation Site Example
The aggregation site shown in this example can be rearranged asymmetrically to provide 42 MHz to the aggregation downlink by combining six segments with 7 MHz in each segment. The capacity of the other downlinks can be increased to 21 MHz by combining three segments with 7 MHz in each segment for each downlink. Note: This example shows just one of several ways in which capacity can be reallocated in an asymmetrical configuration. Asymmetrical Aggregation Site Example
To activate an asymmetrical script, the user must upgrade the uplink script (narrow TX, wide RX) at one end of the link, and upgrade the downlink script (wide TX, narrow RX) at the other end of the link. This operation requires reset. To avoid loss of management to the remote site, it is recommended to upgrade the remote site first. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 99 of 403 Notes: This feature requires an Asymmetrical Scripts license. When using an asymmetrical script, the capacity license relates to the TX side of each link. There are asymmetrical scripts with and without ACM and with and without XPIC. For addition information: Licensing FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 100 of 403 6.4 Radio Features This section includes: Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power Radio Traffic Priority Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) Multi-Radio Diversity ATPC Override Timer Disabling the Radio FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 101 of 403 6.4.1 Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) This feature cannot be used with the following: BBS Space Diversity BBS Frequency Diversity 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection Related topics: ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power ACM for TDM Services Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC 1+1 HSB Protection Radio Traffic Priority FibeAir IP-10G employs full-range dynamic ACM. IP-10Gs ACM mechanism copes with 90 dB per second fading in order to ensure high transmission quality. IP-10Gs ACM mechanism is designed to work with IP-10Gs QoS mechanism to ensure that high priority voice and data packets are never dropped, thus maintaining even the most stringent service level agreements (SLAs). The hitless and errorless functionality of IP-10Gs ACM has another major advantage in that it ensures that TCP/IP sessions do not time-out. Without ACM, even interruptions as short as 50 milliseconds can lead to timeout of TCP/IP sessions, which are followed by a drastic throughout decrease while these sessions recover. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 102 of 403 6.4.1.1 Eight Working Points IP-10G implements ACM with eight available working points, as follows: ACM Working Points (Profiles) Working Point (Profile) Modulation Profile 0 QPSK Profile 1 8 PSK Profile 2 16 QAM Profile 3 32 QAM Profile 4 64 QAM Profile 5 128 QAM Profile 6 256 QAM Strong FEC Profile 7 256 QAM Light FEC Adaptive Coding and Modulation with Eight Working Points
6.4.1.2 Hitless and Errorless Step-by Step Adjustments ACM works as follows. Assuming a system configured for 128 QAM with ~170 Mbps capacity over a 28 MHz channel, when the receive signal Bit Error Ratio (BER) level reaches a predetermined threshold, the system preemptively switches to 64 QAM and the throughput is stepped down to ~140 Mbps. This is an errorless, virtually instantaneous switch. The system continues to operate at 64 QAM until the fading condition either intensifies or disappears. If the fade intensifies, another switch takes the system down to 32 QAM. If, on the other hand, the weather condition improves, the modulation is switched back to the next higher step (e.g., 128 QAM) and so on, step by step .The switching continues automatically and as quickly as needed, and can reach all the way down to QPSK during extreme conditions. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 103 of 403 Adaptive Coding and Modulation
6.4.1.3 ACM Radio Scripts An ACM radio script is constructed of a set of profiles. Each profile is defined by a modulation order (QAM) and coding rate, and defines the profiles capacity (bps). When an ACM script is activated, the system automatically chooses which profile to use according to the channel fading conditions. The ACM TX profile can be different from the ACM RX profile. The ACM TX profile is determined by remote RX MSE performance. The RX end is the one that initiates an ACM profile upgrade or downgrade. When MSE improves above a predefined threshold, RX generates a request to the remote TX to upgrade its profile. If MSE degrades below a predefined threshold, RX generates a request to the remote TX to downgrade its profile. ACM profiles are decreased or increased in an errorless operation, without affecting E1s or Ethernet traffic. ACM scripts can be activated in one of two modes: Fixed Mode. In this mode, the user can select the specific profile from all available profiles in the script. The selected profile is the only profile that will be valid, and the ACM engine will be forced to be OFF. This mode can be chosen without an ACM license. Adaptive Mode. In this mode, the ACM engine is running, which means that the radio adapts its profile according to the channel fading conditions. Adaptive mode requires an ACM license. In the case of XPIC/ACM scripts, all the required conditions for XPIC apply. 6.4.1.4 Configurable Maximum and Minimum ACM Profile The user can define both a maximum and a minimum profile. For example, if the user selects a maximum profile of 5, the system will not climb above the profile 5, even if channel fading conditions allow it. If the user selects a minimum profile of 3 (32 QAM), the system will not climb below 32 QAM. If the channels SNR degrades below the 32 QAM threshold, the radio will lose carrier synchronization, and will report loss of frame. Note: In software versions older than i6.8, the minimum profile cannot be defined by the user, and will always be 0 (QPSK) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 104 of 403 6.4.1.5 ACM Benefits The advantages of IP-10Gs dynamic ACM include: Maximized spectrum usage Increased capacity over a given bandwidth Eight modulation/coding work points (~3 db system gain for each point change) Supports both Ethernet and TDM traffic Hitless and errorless modulation/coding changes, based on signal quality Adaptive Radio Tx Power per modulation for maximal system gain per working point Configurable drop priority between TDM traffic and Ethernet traffic An integrated QoS mechanism that enables intelligent congestion management to ensure that high priority traffic is not affected during link fading Each E1 channel is assigned a priority to enable differentiated E1 dropping during severe link degradation 6.4.1.6 ACM and Built-In QoS IP-10Gs ACM mechanism is designed to work with IP-10Gs QoS mechanism to ensure that high priority voice and data packets are never dropped, thus maintaining even the most stringent SLAs. Since QoS provides priority support for different classes of service, according to a wide range of criteria, you can configure IP-10G to discard only low priority packets as conditions deteriorate. If you want to rely on an external switchs QoS, ACM can work with them via the flow control mechanism supported in the radio. 6.4.1.7 ACM and 1+1 HSB When ACM is activated together with 1+1 HSB protection, it is essential to feed the active IDU via the main channel of the coupler (lossless channel), and to feed the standby unit via the secondary channel of the coupler (-6db attenuated channel). This maximizes system gain and optimizes ACM behavior for the following reasons: In the TX direction, the power will experience minimal attenuation. In the RX direction, the received signal will be minimally attenuated. Thus, the receiver will be able to lock on a higher ACM profile (according to what is dictated by the RF channel conditions). If the standby IDU is fed via the main channel of the coupler, when the remote unit transmits in QPSK modulation (profile-0), there is a chance that the active unit will have its LOF alarm raised, because its RSL will be 6db below the RSL of the standby unit, while the standby unit will have its LOF alarm cleared. In this scenario, a protection switch is not initiated, even though the active IDU is in LOF, and the standby IDU appears to be functioning normally. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 105 of 403 When activating an ACM script together with 1+1 HSB protection, if an LOF alarm is raised, both the active and the standby receivers degrade to the lowest available profile (highest RX sensitivity). Because RX sensitivity is very high, the receivers may have false lock, which will result in a switchover. If the LOF alarm remains, protection switchovers may appear alternately every one second. This may cause management instability and may even prevent management access to the units completely. In order to avoid this scenario, it is important to carefully follow the instructions for setting up 1+1 HSB protection. In particular, make sure that the link is established with lockout configuration in order to avoid alternate switchovers. Once the link is up and running, lockout can be disabled. The following ACM behavior should be expected in a 1+1 configuration: In the TX direction, the Active TX will follow the remote Active RX ACM requests (according to the remote Active Rx MSE performance). The Standby TX might have the same profile as the Active TX, or might stay at the lowest profile (profile-0). That depends on whether the Standby TX was able to follow the remote RX Active units ACM requests (only the active remote RX sends ACM request messages). In the RX direction, both the active and the standby units follow the remote Active TX profile (which is the only active transmitter). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 106 of 403 6.4.2 ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power This feature requires: ACM script ACM enabled prior to enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power RFU-C with software version 2.01 or higher When planning ACM-based radio links, the radio planner attempts to apply the lowest transmit power that will perform satisfactorily at the highest level of modulation. During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, most radio systems cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal degradation, resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity. IP-10G is capable of adjusting power on the fly, and optimizing the available capacity at every modulation point, as illustrated in the figure below. This figure shows how operators that want to use ACM to benefit from high levels of modulation (e.g., 256 QAM) must settle for low system gain, in this case, 18 dB, for all the other modulations as well. With FibeAir IP-10G, operators can automatically adjust power levels, achieving the extra 4 dB system gain that is required to maintain optimal throughput levels under all conditions. The following figure contrasts the transmit output power achieved by using ACM with Adaptive Power to the transmit output power at a fixed power level, over an 18-23 GHz link. IP-10G ACM with Adaptive Power Contrasted to Other ACM Implementations
For this feature to be used effectively, it is essential for the operator not to breach any regulator-imposed EIRP limitations. For example, if used, the operator must license the system for the maximum possible EIRP. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 107 of 403 The Adaptive Transmit Power feature, together with ACM, can work in one out of two scenarios: Increase capacity (increase throughput of existing link) With the option to use Adaptive TX Power. Increase availability (new link) Adaptive TX Power is not applicable. The first scenario is for operators that have existing PDH links with several links in a low class (modulation order), and want to use ACM to carry the same PDH circuits with additional Ethernet traffic without occupying more spectrum bandwidth. The second scenario is for operators who plan a new link for a specific availability and capacity, but want to take advantage of the ACM capability to achieve lower capacity even in higher fades. In the first scenario the operator must plan the link according to a low class channel mask. When radio path conditions allow, the link will increase the modulation. This modulation increase may require lowering the output power (see figure below), in order to decrease the non-linearity of the transmitter for the higher constellations and in order for the transmitted spectrum to stay within the licensed low class channel mask. The following figure demonstrates the differences between a low class mask (e.g., class 2) and a high class mask (e.g., class 5). Channel Mask Comparison
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 108 of 403 6.4.3 Radio Traffic Priority Related topics: Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) Since radio bandwidth may vary in ACM, situations may arise in which it is necessary to drop some of the outgoing traffic. The system dynamically allocates bandwidth to traffic according to user-defined priorities. At the radio level, the system can discern between the following types of traffic: High-priority Ethernet traffic Low-priority Ethernet traffic High-priority TDM trails Low-priority TDM trails Users can configure the following parameters: The amount (in Mbps) of high priority Ethernet Bandwidth For each TDM trail, whether it is high or low priority The priority order between the different types of traffic. the following schemes are available (from high to low priority): High-TDM-over-high-Ethernet, meaning: 1. TDM high priority 2. Ethernet high priority 3. TDM low priority 4. Ethernet low priority High-Ethernet-over-TDM, meaning: 1. Ethernet high priority 2. TDM high priority 3. TDM low priority 4. Ethernet low priority TDM-over-Ethernet (default), meaning: 1. TDM high priority 2. TDM low priority 3. Ethernet For this mechanism to work properly, both sides of the link should be identically configured: Each TDM trail on both sides of a link should be assigned the same priority. Both sides of the link should have the same amount of high priority Ethernet bandwidth. Both sides of the link should use the same priority scheme. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 109 of 403 6.4.4 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) This feature requires: 2+0 or 2+2 configuration Nodal configuration XPIC is one of the best ways to break the barriers of spectral efficiency. Using dual-polarization radio over a single-frequency channel, a dual polarization radio transmits two separate carrier waves over the same frequency, but using alternating polarities. Despite the obvious advantages of dual- polarization, one must also keep in mind that typical antennas cannot completely isolate the two polarizations. In addition, propagation effects such as rain can cause polarization rotation, making cross-polarization interference unavoidable. Dual Polarization
The relative level of interference is referred to as cross-polarization discrimination (XPD). While lower spectral efficiency systems (with low SNR requirements such as QPSK) can easily tolerate such interference, higher modulation schemes cannot and require XPIC. IP-10Gs XPIC algorithm enables detection of both streams even under the worst levels of XPD such as 10 dB. IP-10G accomplishes this by adaptively subtracting from each carrier the interfering cross carrier, at the right phase and level. For high-modulation schemes such as 256 QAM, an improvement factor of more than 20 dB is required so that cross-interference does not adversely affect performance. In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that if one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be affected. This mechanism also ensures that when the failure is cleared, both carriers will be operational. 6.4.4.1 XPIC Benefits The advantages of FibeAir IP-10Gs XPIC option include: BER of 10e-6 at a co-channel sensitivity of 5 dB Multi-Radio Support FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 110 of 403 6.4.4.2 XPIC Implementation In a single channel application, when an interfering channel is transmitted on the same bandwidth as the desired channel, the interference that results may lead to BER in the desired channel. IP-10G supports a co-channel sensitivity of 33 dB at a BER of 10e-6. When applying XPIC, IP-10G transmits data using two polarizations: horizontal and vertical. These polarizations, in theory, are orthogonal to each other, as shown in the figure below XPIC - Orthogonal Polarizations
In a link installation, there is a separation of 30 dB of the antenna between the polarizations, and due to misalignments and/or channel degradation, the polarizations are no longer orthogonal. This is shown in the figure below. XPIC Impact of Misalignments and Channel Degradation
Note that on the right side of the figure you can see that CarrierR receives the H+v signal, which is the combination of the desired signal H (horizontal) and the interfering signal V (in lower case, to denote that it is the interfering signal). The same happens in CarrierL = V+h. The XPIC mechanism takes the data from CarrierR and CarrierL and, using a cost function, produces the desired data. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 111 of 403 XPIC Impact of Misalignments and Channel Degradation
IP-10Gs XPIC reaches a BER of 10e-6 at a co-channel sensitivity of 5 dB! The improvement factor in an XPIC system is defined as the SNR@threshold of 10e-6, with or without the XPIC mechanism. 6.4.4.3 Conditions for XPIC XPIC is enabled by loading an XPIC script to the radio in the IDU. In order for XPIC to be operational, all the following conditions must be met: Communications with the RFU are established in both IDUs: An RFU must be connected to each IDU The frequency of both radios should be equal. 1+1 HSB protection must not be enabled. The same script must be loaded in both IDUs. The IDU cannot be in standalone mode. If any of these conditions is not met, an alarm will alert the user. In addition, events will inform the user which conditions are not met. 6.4.4.4 XPIC Recovery Mechanism The XPIC mechanism is based on signal cancellation and assumes that both of the transmitted signals are received (with a degree of polarity separation). If for some reason, such as hardware failure, one of the carriers stops receiving a signal, the working carrier may be negatively affected by the received signals, which cannot be canceled in this condition. The purpose of the XPIC recovery mechanism is to save the working link while attempting to recover the faulty polarization. The mechanism works as follows: The indication that the recovery mechanism has been activated is a loss of modem preamble lock, which takes place at SNR~10dB. The first action taken by the recovery mechanism is to cause the remote transmitter of the faulty carrier to mute, thus eliminating the disturbing signal and saving the working link. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 112 of 403 Following this, the mechanism attempts at intervals to recover the failed link. In order to do so, it takes the following actions: The remote transmitter is un-muted for a brief period. The recovery mechanism probes the link to find out if it has recovered. If not, it again mutes the remote transmitter. This action is repeated in exponentially larger intervals. This is meant to quickly bring up both channels in case of a brief channel fade, without seriously affecting the working link if the problem has been caused by a hardware failure. The number of recovery attempts is user-configurable Note: Every such recovery attempt will cause a brief traffic hit in the working link. All the time intervals mentioned above (recovery attempt time, initial time between attempts, multiplication factor for attempt time, number of retries) can be configured by the user, but it is recommended to use the default values. The XPIC recovery mechanism is enabled by default, but can be disabled by the user. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 113 of 403 6.4.5 Multi-Radio This feature requires: 2+0 or 2+2 configuration Nodal configuration This feature cannot be used with the following: 1+1 HSB BBS Space Diversity BBS Frequency Diversity Related topics: 2+0 Multi-Radio and 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection 2+2 HSB Protection Automatic State Propagation Multi-Radio enables two separate radio carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. This provides an Ethernet link over the radio with double capacity, while still behaving as a single Ethernet interface. The IDUs in a Multi-Radio setup operate in master and slave mode. In Multi-Radio mode, traffic is divided among the two carriers optimally at the radio frame level without requiring Ethernet Link Aggregation, and is not dependent on the number of MAC addresses, the number of traffic flows, or momentary traffic capacity. During fading events which cause ACM modulation changes, each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers between modulations, increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and maximizing spectrum utilization. The result is 100% utilization of radio resources in which traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio capacity per carrier and is independent of data/application characteristics, such as the number of flows or capacity per flow. Typical 2+0 Multi-Radio Link Configuration
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 114 of 403 Typical 2+2 Multi-Radio Terminal Configuration with HSB Protection
6.4.5.1 Multi-Radio and 2+2 HSB Multi-Radio can be used in a 2+2 configuration. As in any 2+2 configuration, this provides full protection for both Ethernet and TDM traffic. 6.4.5.2 Multi-Radio Basic Operation Multi-radio is available for adjacent pairs of IDUs in a nodal enclosure (slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6). The lower IDU in the enclosure is always the master, and the upper IDU is always the slave. In regular 1+0 operation, the radio link of each IDU is represented as Eth8. In Multi-Radio mode, the radio port of the master IDU uses the available bandwidth of both radio channels, while the slave IDU does not have any direct Ethernet connection to its own radio. In other words, the slave IDU does not have an Eth8 interface since the radio resource is being used by the master IDU. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 115 of 403 The following diagram illustrates the Multi-Radio traffic flow: MODEM MODEM LVDS Traffic splitter Eth & LVDS MODEM Duplication MODEM Traffic combiner LVDS Eth LVDS LVDS Eth 8 x Eth 8 Master Slave x
At the transmitting side, outgoing traffic at Eth8 in the master IDU is split between its own radio and that of the slave. Each radio transmits its share of the data. At the receiving side, the slave sends the data it receives to the master, which combines it with the data received from its own radio link, recovering all the data. Data is distributed between the two links at the Layer 1 level in an optimal way. Therefore, the distribution is not dependent on the contents of the Ethernet frames. In addition, the distribution is proportional to the available bandwidth in every link: If both links have the same capacity, half the data will be sent through each link. In ACM conditions, the links could be in different modulations; in this case, data will be distributed proportionally in order to maximize the available bandwidth. Links can also have different capacities because of different numbers of TDM trails configured through the link; as before, Multi-Radio makes maximum use of available capacity by distributing proportionally to the available bandwidth. Note: The Multi-Radio feature is applicable for Ethernet data only. For TDM, each link remains separate, and users can configure trails to either radio (or both, by using SNCP or ABR). In order for Multi-Radio to work properly, the two radio links should use the same radio script. Note that in the case of ACM, the links may use different modulations, but the same base script must still be configured in both links. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 116 of 403 6.4.5.3 Graceful Degradation of Service 2+0 Multi-Radio provides for protection and graceful degradation of service in the event of failure of an RFU or the slave IDU. This ensures that if one link is lost, not all data is lost. Instead, bandwidth is simply reduced until the link returns to service. Graceful degradation in Multi-Radio is achieved by blocking one of the radio links from Multi-Radio data. When a link is blocked, the transmitter does not distribute data to this link and the receiver ignores it when combining. The blocking is implemented independently in each direction, but TX and RX always block a link in a coordinated manner. The following are the criteria for blocking a link: Radio LOF Link ID mismatch Minimum ACM point user configurable (including none) Radio Excessive BER user configurable Radio Signal degrade user configurable User command used to debug a link When a radio link is blocked, an alarm is displayed to users. 6.4.6 Automatic State Propagation in Multi-Radio Automatic State Propagation (ASP) is used in 1+0 links to quickly close line links in the case of a radio link failure in order to signal the fault to xSTP and other protocols. In the case of Multi-Radio, however, the failure of a single link does not necessarily mean that the entire logical link is down. Therefore, the user can configure whether ASP will be initiated upon a single radio failure or only upon a failure of both radios. The line LOS criterion for closing the local line port operates normally in Multi-Radio, since the radio link is not involved. Note that the criterion is applicable for the main units line interfaces only. The user-defined ASP parameters can be configured separately for Multi- Radio. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 117 of 403 6.4.7 Diversity This section includes: Diversity Overview IP-10G Diversity Options Baseband Switching (BBS) Frequency Diversity Baseband Switching (BBS) Space Diversity IF Combining (IFC) Diversity Type Comparison FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 118 of 403 6.4.7.1 Diversity Overview In long distance wireless links, multipath phenomena are common. Both direct and reflected signals are received, which can cause distortion of the signal resulting in signal fade. The impact of this distortion can vary over time, space, and frequency. This fading phenomenon depends mainly on the link geometry and is more severe at long distance links and over flat surfaces or water. It is also affected by air turbulence and water vapor, and can vary quickly during temperature changes due to rapid changes in the reflections phase. Fading can be flat or dispersive. In flat fading, all frequency components of the signal experience the same magnitude of fading. In dispersive, or frequency selective fading, different frequency components of the signal experience decorrelated fading. Direct and Reflected Signals
Space Diversity and Frequency Diversity are common ways to negate the effects of fading caused by multipath phenomena. Space Diversity is implemented by placing two separate antennas at a distance from one another that makes it statistically likely that if one antenna suffers from fading caused by signal reflection, the other antenna will continue to receive a viable signal. Frequency Diversity is implemented by configuring two RFUs to separate frequencies. The IDU selects and transmits the better signal. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 119 of 403 6.4.7.2 IP-10G Diversity Options Related topics: Multi-Unit LAG IP-10G offers Frequency Diversity and two methods of Space Diversity: Baseband Switching (BBS) Frequency and Space Diversity Each IDU receives a separate signal from a separate antenna. Each IDU compares each of the received signals, and enables the bitstream coming from the receiver with the best signal. Switchover is errorless (hitless switching). IF Combining (IFC) Space Diversity Signals from two separate antennas are combined in phase with each other to maximize the signal to noise ratio. IF Combining is performed in the RFU. Diversity Signal Flow
Note: Frequency and Space Diversity configurations offer the option of Ethernet line protection using Multi-Unit LAG. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 120 of 403 6.4.7.3 Baseband Switching (BBS) Frequency Diversity This feature requires: Two antennas Two RFUs 1+1 HSB configuration Nodal configuration This feature cannot be used with the following: ACM Multi-Radio 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection BBS frequency diversity requires two antennas and RFUs. Each RFU in a frequency diversity node is configured to a different frequency. Any RFU type supported by IP-10G can be used in a BBS Frequency Diversity configuration. Both the active and the standby RFUs transmit simultaneously. One RFU sends its signal to the active IDU, while the other RFU sends its signal to the standby IDU. The IDUs share these signals through the nodal backplane, such that each IDU receives data from both RFUs. The diversity mechanism, which is located within the IDU Mux, is active in both IDUs, and selects the better signal based on: Faulty signal indication An indication from the Modem to the Mux, signaling that there are more errors in the traffic stream than it can correct. The purpose of this indication is to alert the Mux to the fact that those errors are on their way, requiring a hitless switchover in order to prevent them from entering the data stream from the Mux onward. OOF (Out-of-Frame) When the Mux identifies an OOF event, it will initiate a switchover. BBS Frequency Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two IDUs and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event of IDU failure, Frequency Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system remains protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 121 of 403 6.4.7.4 Baseband Switching (BBS) Space Diversity This feature requires: Two antennas Two RFUs 1+1 HSB configuration Nodal configuration This feature cannot be used with the following: ACM Multi-Radio 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection BBS Space Diversity requires two antennas and RFUs. The antennas must be separated by approximately 15 to 20 meters. Any RFU type supported by IP- 10G can be used in a BBS Space Diversity configuration. One RFU sends its signal to the active IDU, while the other RFU sends its signal to the standby IDU. The IDUs share these signals through the nodal backplane, such that each IDU receives data from both RFUs. The diversity mechanism, which is located within the IDU Mux, is active in both IDUs, and selects the better signal based on: Faulty signal indication An indication from the Modem to the Mux, signaling that there are more errors in the traffic stream than it can correct. The purpose of this indication is to alert the Mux to the fact that those errors are on their way, requiring a hitless switchover in order to prevent them from entering the data stream from the Mux onward. OOF (Out-of-Frame) When the Mux identifies an OOF event, it will initiate a switchover. BBS Space Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two IDUs and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event of IDU failure, Space Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system remains protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism. 6.4.7.5 IF Combining (IFC) This feature requires: Dual-receiver RFU (FibeAir 1500HP) The RFU receives and processes both signals, and combines them into a single, optimized signal. The IFC mechanism gains up to 2.5 dB in system gain. Note: 1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only available via BBS. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 122 of 403 6.4.7.6 Diversity Type Comparison The following table shows the relative benefits and limitations of IFC Space Diversity, BBS Space Diversity, and BBS Frequency Diversity. BBS and IFC Comparison IFC BBS Space Diversity BBS Frequency Diversity RFU Support 1500HP (split mount or all indoor) 9 All Ceragon RFUs All Ceragon RFUs Gain Hitless and Errorless Gaining up to 2.5 dB in system gain. Hitless and Errorless Does not add to system gain, but is more reliable with sporadic errors. Hitless and Errorless Does not add to system gain, but is more reliable with sporadic errors. Limitations Symbol rate-dependant. Cannot be used with ACM or Multi-Radio. Cannot be used with ACM or Multi-Radio. Configurations 1+0 1+1 2+2 N+0 N+1 1+1 1+1
9 1500 HP (11 GHz ) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only available via BBS. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 123 of 403 6.4.8 ATPC Override Timer ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each RFU changes the transmitted signal power according to the indication received across the link, in order to achieve a desired RSL on the other side of the link. Without ATPC, if loss of frame occurs the system automatically increases its transmit power to the configured maximum. This may cause a higher level of interference with other systems until the failure is corrected. In order to minimize this interference, some regulators require a timer mechanism which will be manually overridden when the failure is fixed. The underlying principle is that the system should start a timer from the moment maximum power has been reached. If the timer expires, ATPC is overridden and the system transmits at a pre-determined power level until the user manually re-establishes ATPC and the system works normally again. The user can configure the following parameters: Override timeout (0 to disable the feature): The amount of time the timer counts from the moment the system transmits at the maximum configured power. Override transmission power: The power that will be transmitted if ATPC is overridden because of timeout. The user can also display the current countdown value. When the system enters into the override state, ATPC is automatically disabled and the system transmits at the pre-determined override power. An alarm is raised in this situation. The only way to go back to normal operation is to manually cancel the override. When doing so, users should be sure that the problem has been corrected; otherwise, ATPC may be overridden again. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 124 of 403 6.4.9 Disabling the Radio In certain applications, users require extra line interfaces but have no need for additional radio carriers. IP-10G IDUs can be added to a node to provide extra switching or line ports. In this scenario, the radio interface can be overridden in order to eliminate alarms and other indications. The following are two typical applications in which radio disabling is used: 64 x E1 to East/West radio, or 32 x E1 line and XC protected to East/West radio. 64x E1 into radio with full protection (1+1). 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 Radio Enable Radio Enable Radio Disable Radio Disable West East 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 Radio Enable (Active) Protection 1+1 Radio Enable (Stby) Radio Disable (Active) Radio Disable (Stby) 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 16xE1 spiltter 16xE1 spiltter 16xE1 spiltter 16xE1 spiltter 64xE1/T1 to Radio with Protection (1+1) 64xE1/T1 to E-W or 32xE1/T1 interface & XC protection to E-W
6.4.9.1 Radio Disable Configuration The radio interface can be disabled just like any other interface. This change requires a system reset. However, the reset is not performed automatically but can be carried out at the users discretion. This enables the user to save time by performing another operation requiring reset (such as an Ethernet application change or loading a license) before resetting the system, and performing a single reset for both operations. In some cases, disabling the radio interface will affect other interfaces: A radio interface belonging to an Ethernet LAG group cannot be disabled. The user is prompted to remove the Radio port from the LAG first. A radio interface that has been disabled but is still operating pending a reset cannot be added to a LAG group. If the radio interface is associated with any of the following, a warning is displayed, but disabling is allowed after user confirmation: MEP or MIP Ingress rate limit policer Egress rate shaper Non-edge port in xSTP FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 125 of 403 6.4.10 Behavior in Radio Disable Conditions When the radio interface is disabled (after reset), the following features are not available. However, previous configuration of these features is retained and re-applied if the radio is re-enabled. Radio configuration RFU configuration (e.g., frequencies, power level, mute) Thresholds Compression Script loading XPIC RF and IF loopbacks Remote unit configuration Radio PMs Radio aggregate (ES, SES, etc.) Signal level (RSL, TSL) MRMC Radio TDM Radio Ethernet (Frame Error rate, Throughput, Capacity, Utilization) MSE Traffic channels Wayside channel EOW User channel Alarms Radio Loss of Frame Radio Signal Degrade Radio Excessive BER RFU communication failure. Cable open Cable short Link ID mismatch Remote communication error IF loopback IF synthesizer unlock RX AGC is not locked. No Signal from RFU. All auxiliary channels alarms (WSC, UC, EOW). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 126 of 403 6.5 Ethernet Features This section includes: Ethernet Switching Ethernet Services Network Resiliency Automatic State Propagation FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 127 of 403 6.5.1 Ethernet Switching Related topics: Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) Licensing IP-10G supports three modes for Ethernet switching: Smart Pipe Ethernet switching functionality is disabled and only a single Ethernet interface is enabled for user traffic. The unit effectively operates as a point-to-point Ethernet microwave radio. Managed Switch Ethernet switching functionality is enabled based on VLANs. Metro Switch Ethernet switching functionality is enabled based on an S-VLAN-aware bridge. Ethernet Switching
Each switching mode supports QoS. Smart Pipe is the default mode. Managed Switch and Metro Switch require a license. 6.5.1.1 Smart Pipe Mode Using Smart Pipe mode, only a single Ethernet interface is enabled for user traffic and IP-10G acts as a point-to-point Ethernet microwave radio. In Smart Pipe mode, any of the following ports can be used for Ethernet traffic: Eth1: GbE interface (Optical GbE-SFP or Electrical GbE 10/100/1000) Eth3: Fast Ethernet interface All traffic entering the IDU is sent directly to the radio, and all traffic from the radio is sent directly to the Ethernet interface. In Smart Pipe mode, the other Fast Ethernet interfaces can either be configured as management interfaces or they are shut down. In protection mode, only the Optical GbE-SFP port acts as a trigger for switchover. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 128 of 403 6.5.1.2 Managed Switch Mode This feature requires: L2 Switch License Managed Switch mode is an 802.1Q VLAN-aware bridge that enables Layer 2 switching based on VLANs. Each Ethernet port can be configured as an Access port or a Trunk port. Managed Switch Mode Type VLANs Allowed Ingress Frames Allowed Egress Frames Access A default VLAN should be attached to access port. Only Untagged frames (or Tagged with VID=0 "Priority Tagged"). Untagged frames. Trunk A range of VLANs, or "all" VLANs should be attached to trunk port Only Tagged frames. Tagged frames. Hybrid A range of VLANs, or all VLANs should be attached to trunk port. A default VLAN should be attached to access port. Tagged and untagged frames. Tagged and untagged frames. All Ethernet ports are enabled for traffic in Managed Switch mode. The aging time used by the MAC learning table can be configured in Managed Switch mode. The following table lists VLANs that are reserved for internal use in Managed Switch mode. VLANs Reserved for Internal Use in Managed Switch Mode VLAN Description Remark 0 Frames with VLAN=0 are considered untagged. This VLAN is used in order to prioritize untagged traffic - 1 Default VLAN. This VLAN is always defined in the database, and all trunk ports are members of this VLAN. VLAN 1 cannot be deleted from the database and not from Trunk port membership. - 4091 Cannot be used for In-Band management. Traffic frames carrying this VLAN are not allowed in Single Pipe mode. - 4092 Internal VLANs. Single Pipe: Frames carrying these VLANs are not allowed. Managed Switch: "Access" traffic ports cannot be associated with any of these default VLANs. Used for protection internal communication. 4093 Used for Wayside. 4094 Used for internal management. 4095 - Not defined. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 129 of 403 6.5.1.3 Metro Switch Mode This feature requires: L2 Switch License Metro Switch mode is an 802.1AD S-VLAN-aware bridge that enables Layer 2 switching based on S-VLANs. Each Ethernet port can be configured to be a Customer Network port or a Provider network port. Metro Switch Mode Type VLANs Allowed Ingress Frames Allowed Egress Frames Customer Network Specific S-VLAN should be attached to a Customer Network port. Untagged frames (or frames tagged with VID=0 Priority Tagged) or C-VLAN-tagged frames. Untagged frames (or frames tagged with VID=0 Priority Tagged) or C-VLAN- tagged frames. Provider Network A range of S-VLANs, or all S- VLANs should be attached to a Provider Network port. S-VLAN- tagged frames. S-VLAN-tagged frames. QoS can be used in Metro Switch mode. All Ethernet ports can be used for traffic. Users can choose the Ethertype used to recognize the S -VLAN tag. Options are: 88A8 8100 9100 9200 The aging time used by the MAC learning table can be configured in Metro Switch mode. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 130 of 403 6.5.2 Ethernet Services Related topics: Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) Standards and Certifications FibeAir IP-10G is fully MEF-9 and MEF-14 certified for all Carrier Ethernet services (E-Line and E-LAN). Carrier Grade Ethernet Feature Summary Standardized Services Scalability Quality of Service Reliability Service Management MEF-9 and MEF-14 certified for all service types (EPL, EVPL, and E-LAN) Up to 500Mbps per radio carrier Up to 1Gbps per channel (with XPIC) Multi-Radio Integrated non- blocking switch with 4K VLANs 802.1ad provider bridges (QinQ) Scalable nodal solution Scalable networks (1000s of NEs) Advanced CoS classification Advanced traffic policing/rate- limiting CoS-based packet queuing/buffering with 8 queues support Hierarchical scheduling schemes Traffic shaping Tail-drop or WRED Color-awareness (CIR/EIR support) Highly reliable and integrated design Fully redundant 1+1/2+2 HSB and nodal configurations Hitless ACM (QPSK 256QAM) for enhanced radio link availability RSTP Wireless Ethernet Ring/Mesh support 802.3ad link aggregation Fast link state propagation <50 ms restoration time (typical) Extensive multi-layer management capabilities Ethernet service OA&M 802.1ag Advanced Ethernet statistics FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 131 of 403 6.5.2.1 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G In the following figure, end-to-end connectivity per service is verified using periodic 802.1ag CCm messages between service end points. Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G
6.5.2.2 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G - Node Failure Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G - Node Failure
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 132 of 403 Carrier Ethernet Services Based on IP-10G - Node Failure (continued)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 133 of 403 6.5.2.3 Configuration of End-to-End Connectivity Ethernet service support enables the configuration of end-to-end connectivity for Ethernet traffic. This enables the management of Ethernet services via PolyView, Ceragons network management system. For PolyView to make use of this feature, the IDU network elements must be using software version I6.7 or above, which provides the required support. Each Ethernet traffic port has a service type configuration. This does not affect the functionality of the traffic, but the correct configuration is necessary at the element level in order for PolyView to configure the services. There are two possible values: SAP (service access point) The port is the end-point of one or more services. SNP (service network point) The port is an intermediate port for one or more services This parameter is not relevant in Smart Pipe mode. Every VLAN may be assigned to a service. Two parameters are added to each VLAN: evc-id Syntax: string Default: evcX where X is the VLAN number This string must be unique (different string for each VLAN). evc-description Syntax: string Default: evcX where X is the VLAN number Events are raised and SNMP traps are sent every time a port changes its STP role or state to any other role or state. The event will contain the following text: STP event - on port: <port>, root id: <root id>, Bridge role: <bridge role>, Role: <Role>, State: <state> A batch command is available that enables users to configure a range of continuous VLANs, instead of configuring the VLANs individually. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 134 of 403 6.5.3 Network Resiliency and xSTP This feature requires: Network Resiliency license Related topics: Automatic State Propagation Licensing IP-10G supports the following spanning tree Ethernet resiliency protocols: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) (802.1w) Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-optimized RSTP (proprietary) Standard RSTP configurations are identical to those for Ring-Optimized RSTP. The two protocols differ in the following respects: Topologies supported Standard RSTP is meant to work with any mesh topology Ring-Optimized RSTP is meant for ring topologies only Interoperability Standard RSTP is fully interoperable Ring-Optimized RSTP is proprietary Performance Standard RSTP converges in up to a few seconds Ring-Optimized RSTP converges in under 200ms in most cases FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 135 of 403 6.5.3.1 Standard RSTP RSTP ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged LAN. Spanning tree enables a network design to include spare (redundant) links for automatic backup paths, with no danger of bridge loops, and without the need for manual enabling and disabling of the backup links. Bridge loops must be avoided since they result in network flooding. In a general topology, there can be more than one loop, and therefore more than one bridge with ports in a blocking state. For this reason, RSTP defines a negotiation protocol between each two bridges, and processing of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units), before each bridge propagates the information. This serial processing increases the convergence time. Standard RSTP is supported in both Managed Switch mode (regular VLANs) and Metro Switch mode (Provider Bridge). Provider Bridge RSTP is automatically activated when RSTP is enabled in a Metro Switch bridge. In addition, Cisco PVST proprietary address is supported. The following tables describe the behavior of provider bridge RSTP PDUs. Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in CN Ports Spanning Tree type Destination Address Ingress Action Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to all PN ports Provider Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-08 Discard CISCO PVST 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to all PN ports Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in PN Ports Spanning Tree type Destination Address Ingress Action Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to all the ports Provider Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-08 Perform Ring-Optimized RSTP CISCO PVST 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to all the ports
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 136 of 403 6.5.3.2 Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-Optimized RSTP This feature requires: Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode IP-10Gs proprietary RSTP implementation is optimized for Carrier Ethernet wireless rings. Ring-optimized RSTP enhances the RSTP algorithm for ring topologies, accelerating the failure propagation relative to ordinary RSTP. In a ring topology, after the convergence of RSTP, only one port is in a blocking state. RSTP is enhanced for ring topologies by broadcasting the BPDU in order to transmit the notification of the failure to all bridges in the ring. Ring-Optimized RSTP uses the standard RSTP BPDUs: 01-80-C2-00-00-00. With IP-10Gs ring-optimized RSTP, failure propagation is much faster than with regular RSTP. Instead of link-by link serial propagation, the failure is propagated in parallel to all bridges. In this way, the bridges that have ports in alternate states immediately place them in the forwarding state. The ring is revertible. When the ring is set up, it is converged according to RSTP definitions. When a failure appears (e.g., LOF is raised), the ring is converged. When the failure is removed (e.g., LOF is cleared), the ring reverts back to its original state, still maintaining service disruption limitations. RSTP PDUs coming from Edge ports are discarded (and not processed or broadcasted). The figure below shows an example of a ring topology using Ring-Optimized RSTP. In this figure, Switch A is the Root bridge. After the protocol converges, a port in Switch C becomes the Alternate Port, and blocks all transmitted and received traffic. Ring-Optimized RSTP Solution
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 137 of 403 6.5.3.3 Ring-Optimized RSTP Limitations Ring-Optimized RSTP is not interoperable with other Ring-Optimized RSTP implementations from third-party vendors. Ring-Optimized RSTP is designed to provide improved performance in ring topologies. For other topologies, the RSTP algorithm will converge but performance may take several seconds. For this reason, there should be only two edge ports in every node, and only one loop. Ring-Optimized RSTP can be used in Managed Switch and Metro Switch applications, but not in Smart Pipe applications. Ring-Optimized RSTP can be used in a 1+1 protection configuration, but in some cases, the convergence time may be above one second. 6.5.3.4 Ring-Optimized RSTP Supported Topologies This section describes the IP-10G node configurations that can be used as part of a ring topology using Ring-Optimized RSTP. Node Type A The node is connected to the ring with one radio interface (e.g., East) and one line interface (e.g., West). The node contains only one IP-10 IDU. The Radio interface is directed towards one direction (e.g., East), and one of the Gigabit interfaces (electrical or optical) is directed towards the second direction (e.g., West). The other line interfaces are in Edge mode, which means that they are user interfaces, and do not belong the ring itself.
Node Type B Using two IP-10G IDUs, this node is connected to radios in both directions of the ring (East and West). Each IDU supports the radio in one direction. In this topology, Ring-Optimized RSTP is enabled in one IDU. The other IDU operates in Smart Pipe mode. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 138 of 403 The IDUs are connected to each other using one of their Gigabit interfaces (either optical or electrical). Other line interfaces are in Edge mode.
6.5.3.5 Ring-Optimized RSTP Performance The following events will initiate convergence: Radio LOF Link ID mismatch Radio Excessive BER (optional) ACM profile is below a pre-determined threshold (optional) Line LOC Node cold reset (Pipe and/or Switch). Node power down (Pipe and/or Switch). xSTP port Disable/Shutdown Notes: Ring port (non-edge port) shutdown will initiate convergence, but since this is a user configuration, it is not considered a failure, and is not propagated. When the user issues a port shutdown, fast convergence should not be expected. The ring is converged in order to cope with physical layer failures. Any other failure that might disrupt data, such as interface configuration that excludes necessary VLANs will not be taken care of by Ring-Optimized RSTP. The ring shall NOT converge optimally upon path cost configuration, since such a configuration might force the ring to converge into a different steady state. The ring acquires its steady state in a non optimal time, similar to standard RSTP. Convergence performance is as follows: Up to 4 nodes < 150 ms Up to 8 nodes < 200 ms FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 139 of 403 Exceptions: 10% of convergence scenarios might take 600 ms. Excessive BER convergence might end within 600 ms. HW (cold reset) resets, convergence might end within 400-600 ms. Radio TX mute/ un-mute convergence takes, in 5-10% of cases, 500 - 1000 ms. 6.5.3.6 Ring-Optimized RSTP Management You can use either In-Band or Out-of-Band management in a node using RSTP. The advantages of In-Band management are that management is protected by RSTP along with other data traffic, and an additional interface in each node is left free for traffic. In-Band Management In-band management is part of the data traffic. RSTP therefore protects management traffic along with the other network traffic when the ring is re- converged as a result of a ring failure. When In-Band management is used, IDUs set to Managed Switch are configured to In-Band, while IDUs set to Smart Pipe mode are configured to Out-of-Band. IDUs using Smart Pipe mode are connected to their mates, which are using Managed Switch mode, via an external Ethernet cable for management. This is because an IDU in Smart Pipe mode shuts down its Gigabit traffic port in the event of failure, which would prevent management traffic from reaching the IDU. Note: If the IDU in Managed Switch mode loses power, its mate in Smart Pipe mode will lose management access. As a result, the entire node will lose management access. However, if the IDU in Smart Pipe mode loses power, its mate in Managed Switch mode will retain management access. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 140 of 403 The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using In-Band management. Resilient In-Band Ring Management
Out-of-Band Management Out-of-band management uses the Wayside Channel (WSC) for management access to the IDUs in the network. An external switch using some form of STP should be used in order to obtain resilient management access and resolve management loops. When Out-of-Band management is used, all IDUs must be configured to: Out-of-Band WSC Enabled FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 141 of 403 The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using Out-of-Band management. Resilient Out-of-Band Ring Management
6.5.3.7 Basic IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring Topology Examples The following figure provides a basic example of an IP-10G wireless Carrier Ethernet ring. Basic IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 142 of 403 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring with Dual-Homing The following figure shows a redundant site connected to a fiber aggregation network. IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring with Dual-Homing
IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - 1+0 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - 1+0
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 143 of 403 IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - Aggregation Site IP-10G Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring - Aggregation Site
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 144 of 403 6.5.4 Automatic State Propagation Related topics: Multi-Radio Ethernet Switching Network Resiliency Automatic State Propagation ("GigE Tx mute override") enables propagation of radio failures back to the line, to improve the recovery performance of resiliency protocols (such as xSTP). The feature enables the user to configure which criteria will force the GbE port (or ports in case of a remote fault) to be muted or shutdown, in order to allow the network to find alternative paths. In Single Pipe mode, upon radio failure Eth1 is muted when configured as optical or shut down when configured as electrical. In Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode, the radio interface (Eth8) is forced to be disabled (Eth8 cannot be muted, but only disabled in both directions). In 2+0 Multi-Radio mode, Automatic State Propagation can be triggered upon a failure in a single IDU or upon a failure in both IDUs. This behavior is determined by user configuration.
User Configuration Optical (SFP) GbE port functionality - Single Pipe mode Electrical GbE port (10/100/1000) functionality - Single Pipe mode Radio Port functionality Managed/Metro Switch mode Automatic State Propagation disabled. No mute is issued. No shutdown. Local LOF, Link-ID mismatch (always enabled) Mute the LOCAL port when one or more of the following events occurs: 1. Radio-LOF on the LOCAL unit. 2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL unit. Shut down the LOCAL port when one or more of the following events occurs: 1. Radio-LOF on the LOCAL unit. 2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL unit. Ethernet shutdown threshold profile. Mute the LOCAL port when ACM Rx profile degrades below a pre- configured profile on the LOCAL unit Shut down the LOCAL port when ACM Rx profile degrades below a pre-configured profile on the LOCAL unit. This capability is applicable only when ACM is enabled. Local Excessive BER Mute the LOCAL port when an Excessive BER alarm is raised on the LOCAL unit Shut down the LOCAL port when an Excessive BER alarm is raised on the LOCAL unit Local LOC Mute the LOCAL port when a GbE- LOC alarm is raised on the LOCAL unit. No shutdown. Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be muted. Electrical- GbE LOC will not trigger Shutdown, because it will not be possible to enable the port when the LOC alarm is cleared N/A FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 145 of 403 User Configuration Optical (SFP) GbE port functionality - Single Pipe mode Electrical GbE port (10/100/1000) functionality - Single Pipe mode Radio Port functionality Managed/Metro Switch mode Remote Fault Mute the LOCAL port when one or more of the following events is raised on the REMOTE unit: 1. Radio-LOF (on remote). 2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 3. GbE-LOC alarm is raised (on remote). 4. ACM Rx profile crossing threshold (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL. 5. Excessive BER (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL. Shut down the LOCAL port, when one or more of the following events is raised on the REMOTE unit: 1. Radio-LOF (on remote). 2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 3. ACM Rx profile crossing threshold (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL. 4. Excessive BER (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL. Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be muted. Electrical- GbE LOC will not trigger "Shut-down", because it will not be possible to enable the port when LOC alarm is cleared Shut down the LOCAL port, when one or more of the following events is raised on the REMOTE unit: 1. Radio-LOF (on remote). 2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 3. ACM Rx profile crossing threshold (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL. 4. Excessive BER (on remote), only if enabled on the LOCAL.
Notes: It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic State Propagation configuration. If the link uses In-Band management, when the port is muted or shut down, management distributed through the link might be lost. If this occurs, the unit will not be manageable. The unit will only become manageable again when the port is un-muted or enabled. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 146 of 403 6.6 Quality of Service (Traffic Manager) This section includes: Integrated Quality of Service (QoS) Overview Standard QoS Enhanced QoS Standard and Enhanced QoS Comparison FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 147 of 403 6.6.1 Integrated Quality of Service (QoS) Overview Related topics: Radio Traffic Priority Standard and Enhanced QoS Comparison IP-10G offers integrated QoS functionality in all switching modes. In addition to its standard QoS functionality, IP-10G offers an enhanced QoS feature. Enhanced QoS is license-activated. IP-10Gs standard QoS provides for four queues and six classification criteria. Ingress traffic is limited per port, Class of Service (CoS), and traffic type. Scheduling is performed according to Strict Priority (SP), Weighted Round Robin (WRR), or Hybrid WRR/SP scheduling. IP-10Gs enhanced QoS provides eight classification criteria instead of six, color-awareness, increased frame buffer memory, eight priority queues with configurable buffer length, improved congestion management using WRED protocols, enhanced counters, and other enhanced functionality. The figure below shows the QoS flow of traffic with IP-10G operating in Smart Pipe mode. Smart Pipe Mode QoS Traffic Flow
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 148 of 403 The figure below shows the QoS flow of traffic with IP-10G operating in Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode. Managed Switch and Metro Switch QoS Traffic Flow
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 149 of 403 6.6.2 Standard QoS QoS enables users to configure classification and scheduling to ensure that packets are forwarded and discarded according to their priority. QoS configurations are available in all switch applications (Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch). Since it is common to set QoS and rate limiting settings identically in several ports, the QoS configuration can be copied from one port to another. This saves considerable time and prevents configuration mistakes. The following diagram illustrates the QoS flow: Egress Port #y Ingress Port #x Classifier (4 Queues) 5 Policers (Ingress Rate Limiting) Queue Controller Shaper (Egress rate limiting) Marker Scheduler
6.6.2.1 Standard QoS Classifier Using IP-10Gs standard QoS functionality, the system examines the incoming traffic and assigns the desired priority according to the marking of the packets (based on the user port/L2/L3 marking in the packet). In case of congestion in the ingress port, low priority packets are discarded first. The standard QoS classifier is made up of four classification criteria hierarchies: MAC DA (Destination Address) Overwrite Classification and marking is performed for incoming frames carrying a MAC DA that appears in the Static MAC table, according to the following options: Disable No MAC DA classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite (marking). Queue Decision Only classification to queue. No marking. VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Only VLAN P-Bits overwrite (marking). Classification according to a lower criterion. Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Both classification and VLAN P-Bits overwrite. VLAN ID Overwrite If the first criteria is not fulfilled (either because it is disabled, or because the ingress frame does not carry any MAC DA that appears in the S MAC table), classification and/or marking (VLAN P-Bit overwrite, assuming the frame egress is tagged) is decided according to the VLAN ID to Queue table according to the following options: Disable No VLAN ID classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite (marking). Queue Decision Only classification to queue. No marking. VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Only VLAN P-Bit overwrite (marking). Classification is according to the lower criteria (P-Bits or port priority). In this case, P-Bits are assigned as follows (if egress frame is tagged): Frames classified to 1 st queue are given p-bits=0 Frames classified to 2 nd queue are given p-bits=2 Frames classified to 3 rd queue are given p-bits=4 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 150 of 403 Frames classified to 4 th queue are given p-bits=6 Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Both classification and VLAN P-Bit overwrite. Initial Classification is according to the following configuration: VLAN P-Bit Classification is according to VLAN P-Bit. And the queue is assigned according to the VLAN P-Bit to Queue table. IP TOS Classification is according to IP TOS (IP precedence, or IP diffserv). The queue is assigned according to the IP P-Bit to Queue table. VLAN P-Bit over IP TOS Classification according to VLAN P-Bit, if the ingress frame carries a VLAN. For untagged packets with an IP header, classification is according to IP TOS. IP TOS over VLAN P-Bit Classification is according to IP TOS, if the ingress frame has an IP header. If the ingress frame without an IP header carries a VLAN, classification is according to VLAN P-Bit. Port (Default) If any of the above criteria are not fulfilled, the default classification is assigned to the ingress frame according to the port priority. Default Classification. Default priority for frames incoming at the port. 6.6.2.2 Standard QoS Policers IP-10Gs standard QoS provides up to five policers to perform ingress rate limiting. The policers are based on a color blind leaky bucket scheme, and can be applied per port or CoS. For each policer, users can define up to five class maps. Each class map includes the following parameters: Committed Information Rate (CIR) IP-10G supports CIR granularity of 64kbps up to 1 Mbps of CIR, 1 Mbps from 1 Mbps to 1 Gbps of CIR. Packets within the CIR defined for the service are marked Green and passed through the QoS module. Committed Burst Size (CBS) IP-10G supports CBS up to a maximum of 128 kbytes. The default value is 12 kbytes. Packets within the CBS defined for the service are marked Green and passed through the QoS module. Committed Information Rate (CIR) IP-10G supports the following granularity for CIR: 64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps. 1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps. 100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps. Committed Burst Size (CBS) IP-10G supports the following granularity for CBS: For 64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 273,404 Bytes. For 1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 132,585 Bytes. For 100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 4,192,668 Bytes. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 151 of 403 Data type The rate can be limited based on the following data types: None (no limiting), Unknown unicast, Unknown multicast, Broadcast, Multicast, Unicast, Management, ARP, TCP-Data, TCP-Control, UDP, Non- UDP, Non-TCP-UDP, Queue1, Queue2, Queue3, Queue4. Note: Management frames are BPDUs processed by the systems IDC, when processing L2 protocols (e.g., xSTP). Limit Exceed Action Discard Frame. Note: The rate for rate limiting is measured for all Layer 1 bytes, meaning: Preamble (8bytes) + Frame's DA to CRC + IFG (12 Bytes) 6.6.2.3 Queue Management, Scheduling, and Shaping IP-10Gs standard QoS has four priority queues. The queue controller distributes frames to the queues according to the classifier. The fourth queue is the highest priority queue, and the first queue is the lowest priority queue. The scheduler determines how frames are output from the queues. IP-10Gs standard QoS supports the following scheduling schemes: Strict Priority for all queues. Strict Priority for the fourth queue, and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) for the remaining queues. Strict Priority for the fourth and third queues, and WRR for second and first queues. WRR for all queues. In a WRR scheduling scheme, a weight is assigned to each queue, so that frames egress from the queues according to their assigned weight, in order to avoid starvation of lower priority queues. In addition, frames egress in a mixed manner, in order to avoid bursts of frames from the same queue. Each queues weight can be configured. A queue's weight is used by the scheduler when the specific queue is part of a WRR scheduling scheme. Queue-Weight can be configured in the range of 1-32. The default queue weights are 8,4,2,1. The shaper determines the scheduler rate (egress rate limit). The shaper can be enabled and disabled by the user. By default, the shaper is disabled. The shaper rate is set with the following granularity: For 64Kbps <= Rate <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps. For 1000Kbps <= Rate <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps. For 100,000Kbps < Rate <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 152 of 403 6.6.3 Enhanced QoS This feature requires: Enhanced QoS license Related topics: Synchronization Using Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Optimized Transport Licensing Enhanced QoS provides an enhanced and expanded feature set. The tools provided by enhanced QoS apply to egress traffic on the radio port, which is where bottlenecks generally occur. Enhanced QoS can be enabled and disabled by the user. Enhanced QoS capabilities include: Enhanced classification criteria CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS support Policers per service (VLAN+CoS) 255 MEF 10.2-compliant policers with trTCM support. 10
Eight priority queues with configurable buffer length An enhanced scheduler based on Strict Priority, Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ), or a hybrid approach that combines Strict Priority and WFQ Shaper per priority queue WRED support, along with Tail-Drop, for congestion management Configurable P-bit and CFI/DEI re-marker A PTP Optimized Transport dedicated channel for time synchronization protocols Enhanced PM and statistics These and other IP-10G enhanced QoS features enable operators to provide differentiated services with strict SLA while maximizing network resource utilization. Enhanced QoS requires a license, and can be enabled and disabled by the user. The main benefits of enhanced QoS are: Improved available link capacity utilization: Enhanced and configurable queue buffer size (4 Mb total) WRED for best utilization of the link when TCP/IP sessions are transported, providing up to 25% more capacity. Advanced SLA support: Granular SLA enforcement and traffic policing with TrTCM (CIR + EIR) dual-rate limit per service (VLAN / VLAN + CoS)
10 Requires hardware version R3. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 153 of 403 Enhanced service differentiation: 8 CoS queues (as opposed to 4 queues in standard QoS) Additional classification criteria MPLS EXP bits and UDP ports Shaping per CoS queue Sync. Optimized transport - best performance for 1588 packets Monitoring, Assurance and Diagnostics capabilities: Per queue counters Transmitted and dropped traffic Per service counters (VLAN / VLAN + CoS) The following figure illustrates the basic building blocks and traffic flow of enhanced QoS. IP-10G Enhanced QoS
The initial step in the enhanced QoS traffic flow is the classifier, which provides granular service classification based on a number of user-defined criteria. The classifier marks the Service ID, CoS, and color of the frames. If a frames VLAN ID matches a Service ID that is mapped to a policer, the frame is sent to the policer. Untagged frames or frames whose VLAN ID does not match a defined Service ID are sent directly to a queue, based on the frames CoS and color. Enhanced QoS provides up to 255 user-defined TrTCM policers. The policers implement a bandwidth profile, based on CIR/EIR, CBS/EBS, and several other criteria. The next step after the TrTCM policers is queue management. Queue management determines which packets enter which of the eight available queues. Queue management also includes congestion management, which can be implemented by Tail-Drop or WRED. Frames are sent out of the queues according to scheduling and shaping, IP- 10Gs enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling model that includes four priorities, with WFQ within each priority and shaping per FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 154 of 403 queue. This model enables operators to define flexible and highly granular QoS schemes for any mix of services. Finally, the enhanced QoS module re-marks the P-bits and CFI/DEI bits of the most outer VLAN according to the CoS and color decision in the classifier. This step is also known as the modifier. 6.6.3.1 Enhanced QoS Classifier The classifier is a basic element of each QoS mechanism. Each frame is assigned a Class of Service (CoS) and color, based on MEF 10.2 recommendations. The user can define several criteria by which frames are classified. Classifier Traffic Flow
Each frame is assigned a CoS and Color CoS is a 3-bit value from 0-7 that is used for classification to priority queues. Color is a 1-bit value (Green or Yellow) used for policing. Green represents CIR, and Yellow represents EIR. Classification to CoS and Color can be based on the following criteria First hierarchy Based on destination MAC address or source/destination UDP ports. The first classification hierarchy is used to identify and give priority to network protocols. Layer2 protocols such as xSTP and Slow protocols can be classified based on their pre-defined destination MAC address. Higher layer protocols such as NTP can be identified based on UDP ports. Second hierarchy Based on VLAN ID. The second hierarchy is used to classify frames based on network services. Each service is assigned to a different VLAN. Frames can be also prioritized based on their in-band management VLAN ID. Note: To prevent loss of management to the remote sites, classification by In-Band management must be configured before activating the enhanced QoS feature. Especially at the first activation after upgrade, the In-Band management VLAN ID should be assigned CoS 7 and Green color. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 155 of 403 Third hierarchy Based on Priority bits. Options are VLAN 802.1p p-bits, IP DSCP/TOS, and/or MPLS experimental bits. Classification is performed in the order of cardinality listed above. The classifier checks the first hierarchy, the second hierarchy, and the third hierarchy, until a match is found. Each frame is assigned a Service ID Note: Classification to Services is only supported by hardware version R3. Classification to Services is based on VLAN ID. A Service ID is used for policing and for classification to CoS. Each policer is monitored by statistics counters. Each CoS is mapped to one of the 8 available priority queues All the classification criteria are divided into three hierarchies according to their cardinality, from the most specific to the most general. Each queue is assigned a priority Priorities vary from the highest (fourth) to the lowest (first). The scheduling mechanism treats these priorities as strict. WFQ scheduling is performed between queues of the same priority. For detailed information about scheduling, refer to Scheduling and Shaping on page 160. 6.6.3.2 TrTCM Policers IP-10Gs enhanced QoS module includes an enhanced TrTCM policer mechanism that complies with MEF 10.2, and is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism. Up to 255 policers can be defined. The TrTCM policers can change a frames color and CoS settings based on CIR/EIR+CBS/EBS, which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA requirements. Enhanced TrTCM policers can be attached to a service or to a service + CoS combination. MEF 10.2 is the de-facto standard for SLA definitions, and IP-10Gs implementation provides the granularity necessary to implement service- oriented solutions. TrTCM Policers and MEF 10.2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 156 of 403 Note: The enhanced TrTCM policer mechanism requires hardware version R3 and software version i6.9. Hardware version R2 and software versions 6.7 and higher support policers per port and per queue. Services are defined by VLAN. VLAN IDs are mapped to Service IDs, with no more than one VLAN mapped to a single Service ID. Service IDs are then mapped to Policer IDs. For even more granularity, policers can be assigned according to VLAN P-Bit. This Policer per VLAN P-bit option enables the customization of a set of eight policers for a variety of traffic flows within a single service (e.g., GPRS or management). Note: The Policer per VLAN P-Bit option can be enabled only for a Policer with a Policer ID of 8 or a multiple of 8, e.g., Policer8, Policer16, Policer24, , Policer248 . When using the Policer per VLAN P-Bit option, none of the 8 policers that are allocated to the service can be used by other services. As illustrated in the figure below, TrTCM policers use a leaky bucket mechanism to determine whether packets are marked Green, Yellow, or Red. Packets within the Committed Information Rate (CIR) or Committed Burst Size (CBS) are marked Green and sent on to a queue. Packets within the Excess Information Rate (EIR) or Excess Burst Size (EBS) are marked Yellow. These packets are also sent on to a queue, and processed according to the settings of the scheduling and shaping mechanisms. Packets that do not fall within the CIR/CBS+EIR/EBS are marked Red and dropped, without being sent any further. TrTCM Policers Leaky Bucket Mechanism
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 157 of 403 The following parameters can be defined for each policer: Committed Information Rate (CIR) Packets within the CIR defined for the service are marked Green and passed through the QoS module. Packets that exceed the CIR rate are marked Yellow. Committed Burst Size (CBS) Packets within the CBS defined for the service are marked Green and passed through the QoS module. Excess Information Rate (EIR) Packets within the EIR defined for the service are marked Yellow and processed according to network availability. Packets beyond the combined CIR and EIR are marked Red and dropped by the policer. Excess Burst Size (EBS) Packets within the EBS defined for the service are marked Yellow and processed according to network availability. Packets beyond the combined CBS and EBS are marked Red and dropped by the policer. Color Mode Color mode can be enabled (color aware) or disabled (color blind). In color aware mode, all packets that ingress with a CFI/DEI field set to 1 (Yellow) are treated as EIR packets, even if credits remain in the CIR bucket. In color blind mode, all ingress packets are treated as Green packets regardless of CFI/DEI value. A color-blind policer discards any previous color decisions. Coupling Flag If the coupling flag is enabled, frames marked Yellow may be placed in the Green buffer when there are no available Yellow credits in the EIR bucket. Note: Coupling Flag is only relevant in color aware mode. Line Compensation A policer can measure CIR and EIR as Layer1 or Layer2 rates. Layer1 capacity is equal to Layer2 capacity plus 20 additional bytes for each frame (preamble, SFD, and IFG). Line compensation defines the number of bytes to be added to each frame for CIR and EIR calculation. When Line Compensation is 20, the policer operates as Layer1. When Line Compensation is 0, the policer operates as Layer 2. CIR and EIR granularity is: 64 Kbps in range of 64 Kbps to 100 Mbps 1 Mbps in range of 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps CBS and EBS granularity is 1 byte. The TrTCM policer mechanism includes counters for packets dropped and packets transmitted, both per queue and per service. These counters can be viewed via the CLI. Note: Per-service counters require hardware version R3 and software version 6.9. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 158 of 403 Per queue counters are available in hardware versions R2 and R3, as well as software versions i6.7 and up. However, hardware version R3 and software version i6.9 provide additional counters, as shown in the following table: Per-Queue Counters Availability Software Version i6.7 Green bytes passed Green frames dropped Yellow bytes passed Yellow frames dropped i6.9 Same as i6.7, with the addition of: L1 support for Green and Yellow bytes passed (i6.7 supports L2 only) Green frames passed Yellow frames passed 6.6.3.3 Queue Management Queue management is the process by which packets are assigned to priority queues. Queue management also includes congestion management. IP-10G provides the tail-drop method of congestion management, and enhanced QoS also offers Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED). Enhanced QoS supports eight queues with configurable buffer size. The user can specify the buffer size of each queue independently. The total amount of memory dedicated to these queue buffers is 4Mb, and the size of each queue can be set to 0.5, 1, 2, or 4Mb. The default buffer size is 0.5Mb for each queue. The following considerations should be taken into account in determining the proper buffer size: Latency considerations If low latency is required (users would rather drop frames in the queue than increase latency) small buffer sizes are preferable. Note: The actual, effective buffer size of the queue can be less than 0.5Mb based on the configuration of the WRED tail drop curve. Throughput immunity to fast bursts When traffic is characterized by fast bursts, it is recommended to increase the buffer sizes of the priority queues to prevent packet loss. Of course, this comes at the cost of a possible increase in latency. User can configure burst size as a tradeoff between latency and immunity to bursts, according the application requirements. One of the key features of IP-10Gs enhanced QoS is the use of WRED to manage congestion scenarios. WRED provides several advantages over the standard tail-drop congestion management method. WRED enables differentiation between higher and lower priority traffic based on CoS. Moreover, WRED can increase capacity utilization by eliminating the phenomenon of global synchronization. Global synchronization occurs when TCP flows sharing bottleneck conditions receive loss indications at around the FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 159 of 403 same time. This can result in periods during which link bandwidth utilization drops significantly as a consequence of a simultaneous falling to a slow start of all the TCP flows. The following figure demonstrates the behavior of two TCP flows over time without WRED. Synchronized Packet Loss
WRED eliminates the occurrence of traffic congestion peaks by restraining the transmission rate of the TCP flows. Each queue occupancy level is monitored by the WRED mechanism and randomly selected frames are dropped before the queue becomes overcrowded. Each TCP flow recognizes a frame loss and restrains its transmission rate (basically by reducing the window size). Since the frames are dropped randomly, statistically each time another flow has to restrain its transmission rate as a result of frame loss (before the real congestion occurs). In this way, the overall aggregated load on the radio link remains stable while the transmission rate of each individual flow continues to fluctuate similarly. The following figure demonstrates the transmission rate of two TCP flows and the aggregated load over time when WRED is enabled. Random Packet Loss with Increased Capacity Utilization Using WRED
Each one of the eight priority queues can be given a different weight. For each queue, the user defines the WRED profile curve. This curve describes the probability of randomly dropping frames as a function of queue occupancy. Basically, as the queue occupancy grows, the probability of dropping each incoming frame increases as well. As a consequence, statistically more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs. The WRED profile curve can be adjusted for each one of the priority queues. Yellow and Green frames can also be assigned different weights. Usually, FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 160 of 403 Green frames (committed rate) are preferred over Yellow frames (excessive rate), as shown in the curve below. WRED Profile Curve
Note: WRED can also be set to a tail drop curve. A tail drop curve is useful for reducing the effective queue size, such as when low latency must be guaranteed. In order to set the tail drop curve to its maximum level, the drop percentage must be set to zero. 6.6.3.4 Scheduling and Shaping Scheduling and shaping determine how traffic is sent on to the radio from the queues. Scheduling determines the priority among the queues, and shaping determines the traffic profile for each queue. IP-10Gs enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling model that includes four priorities, with Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) within each priority, and shaping per port and per queue. This model enables operators to define flexible and highly granular QoS schemes for any mix of services. Shaping The egress shaper is used to shape the traffic profile sent to the radio. In enhanced QoS mode, there is an egress shaper for each priority queue. The user can configure CIR, CBS, and line compensation. Note: The user can configure the shaper to count in L2 by setting line compensation to zero. The user can also punish short frame senders for the overhead they cause in the network by increasing the line compensation to a value above 20 bytes. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 161 of 403 Scheduling IP-10Gs enhanced QoS mechanism provides Strict Priority and Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ) for scheduling. Users can configure a combination of both methods to achieve the optimal results for their unique network requirements. Each priority queue has a configurable strict priority from 1 to 4 (4=High;1=Low). WFQ weights are used to partition bandwidth between queues of the same priority. Queue Priority Configuration Example
For each queue, the user configures the following parameters: Priority (1 to 4) The priority value is strictly applied. This means the queue with higher priority will egress before a queue with lower priority, regardless of WFQ weights. WFQ weight (1 to 15) Defines the ratio between the bandwidth given to queues of the same priority. For example if queue 6 and queue 7 are assigned WFQ weights of 4 and 8, respectively (using the notations of the above figure), then under congestion conditions queue 7 will be allowed to transmit twice as much bandwidth as queue 6. Note: In order to be able to egress frames, each queue must also have enough credits in its shaper. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 162 of 403 Scheduling Examples This section provides several use cases in which Strict Priority and WFQ are combined to produce a desired scheduling configuration. These are simply two examples of the many ways in which IP-10Gs flexible scheduling mechanism can be configured to achieve a combination of Strict Priority scheduling for the highest priority traffic flows and weighted scheduling for other traffic flows that may be less delay sensitive. Example 1 shows a hybrid setup in which the three highest-priority queues are served according to Strict Priority, and the remaining queues are served according to WFQ. In this example, higher-priority queues are served first. Only after the three highest-priority queues are empty is traffic from the remaining five queues served, according to WFQ and their respective weight. Example 1 Hybrid Scheduling Queue Priority Weight Priority Scheme 1 4 - Strict Priority served according to priority (descending) 2 3 - 3 2 - 4 1 16 WFQ - Same priority served according to weight (16 bytes of Q4, 8 bytes of Q5, 4 bytes of Q6, etc.) 5 1 8 6 1 4 7 1 2 8 1 1 Example 1 Hybrid Scheduling Illustration
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 163 of 403 Example 2 shows a hierarchical scheme in which the highest priority queue is served first, and other queues are only served after the highest-priority queue is empty, according to their respective priorities and weights. Example 2 Hierarchical Scheduling Queue Priority Weight Priority Scheme 1 4 - Highest priority served first 2 3 1 Same priority, same weight, evenly serving 1 byte of Q2 and 1 byte of Q3 3 3 1 4 2 2 Same priority, different weight, serving 2 bytes of Q4 and 1 byte of Q5 5 2 1 6 1 4 Same priority, different weight, serving 4 bytes of Q6, 2 bytes of Q7 and 1 byte of Q8 7 1 2 8 1 1 Example 1 Hierarchical Scheduling Illustration
6.6.3.5 Configurable P-Bit and CFI/DEI Re-Marking When enabled, the re-marker modifies each packets 802.1p P-Bit and CFI/DEI bit fields. 802.1p is modified according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color) field is modified according to the classifier and policer decision. The color is first determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer. Green color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 164 of 403 6.6.4 Standard and Enhanced QoS Comparison The following table summarizes the basic features of IP-10Gs standard and enhanced QoS functionality. IP-10G Standard and Enhanced QoS Features Feature Standard QoS Enhanced QoS License Required No Yes Number of CoS Queues 4 8 (radio only) Frame Buffer Size 1 MBit Additional 4 Mbit (on egress port towards radio only), and configurable CoS Classification Criteria Source Port VLAN 802.1p VLAN ID MAC DA IPv4 DSCP/TOS IPv6 TC Additional classification criteria: UDP Port MPLS EXP bits Scheduling Method Strict Priority, Weighted Round Robin (WRR), or Hybrid Four scheduling priorities with WFQ between queues in the same priority Shaping Per port Per queue Congestion Management Tail-drop Tail-drop, and Weighted Random Early Discard (WRED) CIR/EIR Support (Color- Awareness) CIR only CIR + EIR Policing Per Port Per Port and Per Traffic Type Additional policing capabilities: Per Service (R3 only) CoS to P-bit Re-Marking Default mapping only User-configurable mapping Color-aware PMs and Statistics RMON Statistics RMON Statistics Number of packets accepted and dropped Per service counters Per queue counters and PMs
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 165 of 403 6.7 TDM Solution This section includes: TDM Trails and Cross-Connect (XE) Smart TDM Pseudowire Wireless SNCP Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery ACM for TDM Services AIS Signaling and Detection FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 166 of 403 6.7.1 TDM Trails and Cross-Connect (XE) This feature requires: Nodal configuration The FibeAir IP-10G Cross-Connect (XC) Unit is a high-speed circuit connection scheme for transporting TDM traffic from any given port "x" to any given port "y". Integrated TDM Cross-Connect is performed by defining end to end trails. Each trail consists of segments represented by Virtual Containers (VCs). The Cross-Connect functions as the forwarding mechanism between the two ends of a trail. The Cross-Connect capacity is 180 E1 VCs. Each E1 interface or "logical interface" in a radio in any unit of the stack can be assigned to any VC. The Cross-Connect function is performed through the nodal enclosure backplane. Thus, Cross-Connect functionality requires a nodal configuration. In a protected system, the Cross-Connect function is performed by the active main unit. If a failure occurs, the standby main unit takes over (<50 ms down time). The figure below illustrates the basic Cross-Connect concept. Basic Cross-Connect Operation
As shown above, trails are defined from one end of a line to the other. The Cross-Connect Unit forwards signals generated by the radios to and from the IDUs based on their designated VCs. For instance, in the example above, the Cross-Connect Unit can forward signals on Trail C from Radio 1, VC 3 to Radio 4, VC 1. 6.7.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Operation IP-10G provides the capability for the user to map any pair of interfaces in order to create TDM trails. Interfaces may be the following: E1 line ports: Ports 1-16 are available in the lower SCSI connector; ports 17-32 are available in the upper one (if a T-card is installed in the IP-10G). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 167 of 403 VC-11/12 in STM-1 line port: Available as a T-card. Radio VCs: Each radio in the system has designated channels, each of which can carry a duplex TDM signal. These channels are called VCs and in addition to the TDM signal they carry extra data used for monitoring. Note: Radio VCs are proprietary and do not conform to SDH VCs. They are terminated at line interfaces. After a trail is created the following takes place: TDM traffic is exchanged between the two interfaces. Line interfaces are enabled (if no trails are assigned to them, they are disabled). The trail is monitored in order to raise indications and measure PMs. The switching fabric is located in the main unit. Therefore, it is particularly beneficial that the main unit be protected. 6.7.1.2 TDM Trail Status Reporting A TDM trail is defined as E1 data delivered unchanged from one line interface to another, through one or more radio links. In each node along the trail path, data can be assigned to a different VC number, but its identity across the network is maintained by a Trail ID defined by the user. Each TDM trail in the system is monitored end-to-end. If a problem is found, the following occurs: An alarm is raised indicating that there is a failure in at least one TDM trail. Each trail is updated with its current status. An event is raised stating the problem that was raised or cleared, and in which trail. This information is logged in the event log. An SNMP trap is sent. The following problems may be detected in a TDM trail: Signal Failure There is a severe communication problem somewhere along the path of the trail. End-point interfaces transmit AIS. Trail ID Mismatch The trail ID received from the incoming radio differs from the ID defined by the user for this trail. Invalid Trail Status The software was unable to read statuses for the trail. For troubleshooting end-to-end E1 trails across the network, additional performance monitoring is necessary. Performance monitoring is based on BER measurements rather than code violations; in this way, TDM trail performance monitoring differs from line interface performance monitoring. Performance monitoring for TDM trails is measured in the following cases: End-Point Interfaces Line interfaces in which a trail ends. Radio interfaces which perform SNCP. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 168 of 403 6.7.1.3 TDM Cross-Connect Unit Benefits Benefits of the IP-10G Cross-Connect Unit include: E1 trails are supported based on the integrated E1 Cross-Connect Cross-Connect capacity is 180 E1 trails Cross-Connect is performed between any two physical or logical interfaces in the node, including: E1 interface Radio VC (84 VCs supported per radio carrier) STM-1 Mux VC12 Each trail is timed independently by the Cross-Connect Unit Modularity and flexibility Modular design: pay as-you-grow Simplicity, with minimum components (IDU, backplane) Supports XPIC, Multi-Radio, Frequency Diversity, and Space Diversity The Cross-Connect function provides connectivity for the following types of configurations: Cross-Connect Configurations
For each trail, the following end-to-end OAM functions are supported: Alarms and maintenance signals, including AIS and RDI Performance monitoring counters, including ES, SES, and UAS. Trace ID for provisioning mismatch detection. A VC overhead is added to each VC trail to support the end-to-end OAM functionality and synchronization justification requirements. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 169 of 403 The figure below provides an example of Cross-Connect aggregation: TDM Cross-Connect Aggregation Example
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 170 of 403 6.7.2 Smart TDM Pseudowire This feature requires: Pseudowire T-Card L2 Switch License Managed Switch or Metro Switch This feature cannot be used with the following: 1+1 HSB Protection Related topics: TDM Interface Options Smart TDM Pseudowire Interface Specifications Licensing Ethernet Switching Pseudowire provides a smart solution for migration to all-packet networks. Often, TDM islands exist within a network that has largely converted to all-packet. All-packet segments may be joined with hybrid or TDM segments. Base stations in particular often continue to use TDM equipment after the remaining network segments have migrated to all-packet. Pseudowire bridges the gap between legacy TDM equipment and the all-packet present and future. As part of IP-10Gs Native 2 model, Smart TDM Pseudowire and IP-10Gs built- in native TDM provide an ideal solution for TDM to packet migration. IP-10Gs Smart TDM Pseudowire provides TDM over packet capabilities by means of an optional 16 E1 Pseudowire (PW) processing T-Card that processes TDM data, sends the data through the system in packet format that can be processed by the IDUs Ethernet ports, and converts the data back to TDM format. Up to six PW T-Cards can be used in a single node. Smart TDM Pseudowire features an advanced network processor design, with state of the art Carrier Ethernet and advanced QoS. The TDM PW processing T-Card includes an Ethernet interface that must be connected to one of the Ethernet ports in the same IDU as the PW T-Card. Any electrical Ethernet port can be used, including either GbE or Fast Ethernet ports. The optical GbE ports cannot be used. PW T-Card Connected to Ethernet Port (Eth3)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 171 of 403 6.7.2.1 Smart TDM Pseudowire Supported Standards Smart TDM Pseudowire supports the following standards for both framed and unframed E1 lines: CESoPSN RFC 5086 SAToP RFC 4553 Smart TDM Pseudowire is compliant with the following encapsulations: Ethernet Layer 2 (MEF-8) IP/UDP (IETF) 6.7.2.2 Smart TDM Pseudowire Bandwidth Utilization One of the advantages of IP-10Gs Smart TDM Pseudowire, in contrast to native TDM, is that its structure-aware (CESoP) architecture enables it to make better use of available bandwidth by sending only the used slots (N x DS0), as opposed to ordinary TDM that sends all slots, whether or not they are used. DS0-level cross connect is also possible, enabling users to save not only bandwidth but also E1 interfaces. Smart TDM Pseudowire Bandwidth Utilization with CESoP
6.7.2.3 Smart TDM Pseudowire Synchronization Support Smart TDM Pseudowire supports the following synchronization modes: Common Clock Uses a clock input that is independent from the pseudowire subsystem as a reference for TDM signal synchronization. This reference may come from the following sources: Native sync distribution. External clock reference from a dedicated front panel clock interface. Loop Timing The Tx timing is based on the actual clock from the TDM Rx data flow. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 172 of 403 Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) Clock information is included in the TDM data stream at the point where the data is packetized. The extra information is located in an RTP header that can be used to correct frequency offsets. The clock information is extracted at the point where the packets are received and reconverted to TDM. The extracted clock information is used for the reconversion to TDM. ACR can provide very accurate synchronization, but requires low PDV. For additional information: Native Sync Distribution Mode 6.7.2.4 Smart TDM Pseudowire Benefits The following are some of the benefits of IP-10Gs Smart TDM Pseudowire feature: Pseudowire Protocol Support Smart TDM Pseudowire supports CESoPSN and SAToP for both framed and unframed E1 lines. Packet Network Support Smart TDM Pseudowire supports pseudowire over MPLS, IP, and Ethernet, according to MFA, IETF, and MEF standards. Access E1 lines are at local line interfaces. Aggregation E1 lines can be from the internal radio interface or the internal Cross-Connect Scalability A single node can include up to 6 PW T-Cards, for a total of 96 E1 lines per node. In the IP-10G, any TDM flow from any interface (radio, STM-1, E1) can be converted into PW. The following are some of the scenarios in which Smart TDM Pseudowire can be used to minimize the cost and effort of migration from legacy to all-packet networks: Access/Tail sites Pseudowire E1 lines are located at the local line interfaces. Aggregation/Intermediate sites Pseudowire E1 lines can originate from the internal radio interface or Cross-Connect. Fiber PoP sites E1 data can be transported over the radio links in native format and converted to packet in order to transverse a packet transport aggregation network. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 173 of 403 6.7.2.5 Smart TDM Pseudowire in Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Networks This section provides several examples of how Smart TDM Pseudowire can be used in migration from a hybrid network to an all-packet network. In the following example, PW T-Cards are installed in the tail sites of an all- packet microwave access network, providing for full transformation to an all- packet network. Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Tail Sites
In the following example, native E1 trails are used up to the aggregation site and PW T-Cards are installed in the intermediate aggregation sites, minimizing the cost and effort of migration to an all-packet network by optimizing deployment of the PW T-Cards. Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Intermediate Aggregation Sites
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 174 of 403 In the following example, native E1 trails are used in the access network and PW T-Cards are installed in the fiber PoP sites, providing for seamless integration with any packet aggregation network. Migration from Hybrid to All-Packet Network PW processing T-Card in Fiber PoP Sites
IP-10G with Smart TDM Pseudowire supports several aggregation options and scenarios. One option is native service stitching at a fiber site. In this scenario, Smart TDM Pseudowire converts TDM data to packet format at the tail/hub site. The pseudowire connection is terminated at the fiber site and N x E1 or STM-1 lines are used to connect either to the fiber node via a router/MSPP or directly to the BSC/RNC. Smart TDM Pseudowire with Native Service Stitching at Fiber Site
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 175 of 403 Another option is to implement Smart TDM Pseudowire as an end-to-end overlay, supported as EVC over the aggregation network. In this scenario, Smart TDM Pseudowire converts TDM data to packet format at the tail/hub site. The pseudowire lines are carried as EVCs over the fiber/aggregation network, and terminated at the remote RNC/BSC site using a pseudowire aggregation device supporting N x E1 or STM-1. Note: Typically, a single pseudowire aggregation device can support multiple MW access clouds. Smart TDM Pseudowire End-to-End Overlay
A third option is to implement Smart TDM Pseudowire as CSG integrated with a pseudowire aggregation solution in a CET switch or MPLS router. In this scenario, Smart TDM Pseudowire converts TDM data to packet format at the tail/hub site. The pseudowire lines terminate at the CET switch or MPLS router of a third party partner. This scenario requires integration with respect to data, control, and management. MPLS encapsulation can be considered as an option. Smart TDM Pseudowire as part of Integrated CSG Solution
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 176 of 403 6.7.2.6 Setting Up Pseudowire Services A Pseudowire service is a user-defined, bidirectional flow of information between a TDM signal and a packed flow, which is always transported over layer 2 Ethernet. Such a service interconnects and makes use of the following elements: TDM Signal The TDM signal may be an entire E1 or a sub-set of DS0s (or E1 time- slots). In order to make use of a TDM signal, a regular TDM trail must be manually configured from the relevant interface (which may be any TDM interface anywhere in the system radio channel, STM-1 VC-12, or front panel E1) to one of the 16 internal TDM ports available in the PW T-Card. The TDM port being used for pseudowire should be configured in accordance with the type of signal to be used. In particular, CESoP pseudowire services require the port to be configured to the proper frame type used by the incoming E1. PSN Tunnel A PSN tunnel is the means by which the packets containing the TDM information are sent and received through a PSN network. The type of tunnel to be used should match the relevant transport network. Two types of PSN tunnels are supported: MEF-8 (Ethernet) and UDP/IP. In both cases, the user is responsible for configuration of the tunnel details, including destination address and QoS parameters. Both types of encapsulation can make use of C-VLAN, S-VLAN (with standard Ethertype 0x88a8), or untagged, but not C-VLAN and S-VLAN in the same frame. For IP tunnels, the pseudowire services make use of the PW T-Cards IP address, which is user-configurable. For MEF-8 tunnels, the addressing is done through the T-Cards MAC address, which is fixed, but readable by users. Pseudowire Profile A profile is a set of parameters that determine various operational settings of a PW service. A single profile can be used for any number of services. The following is a short explanation of the main parameters: Payload size In terms of E1 frames per packet. Jitter buffer In milliseconds. LOPS detection thresholds. RTP timestamp usage details (for adaptive clock recovery). Payload suppression and transmission patterns in case of errors. In addition, there are a number of parameters at the PW T-Card level that must be configured properly to ensure proper operation: Ethernet traffic port settings Speed Duplex FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 177 of 403 Auto-negotiation Flow control T-Cards IP address and subnet mask Clock distribution and use of front panel clock interface 6.7.2.7 Smart TDM Pseudowire and Synchronization A key requirement of pseudowire technology is managing the synchronization of TDM signals. For this purpose, the Smart TDM PW T-Card provides a number of synchronization interfaces. These interfaces can be used for pseudowire synchronization, but can also be used to provide extra synchronization capabilities to the entire IP-10G unit. The following are the relevant interfaces and their possible uses: A front panel interface (input and output) This interface may be configured to convey synchronization either as a coded E1 or as a digital uncoded 2.048MHz signal The interface can provide a reference input for: Pseudowire (in common clock mode) IP-10G native synchronization transport (via the system reference interface) The interface can provide an output synchronization signal coming from: Pseudowire recovered clock from Adaptive Clock Recovery IP-10G native synchronization transport reference clock (via the system reference interface) The pinout of this interface is as follows: Clock Input Differential on pins 1(-) and 2(+) Clock Output - Differential on pins 4(-) and 5(+) 1 PPS Output - Differential RS422 - on pins 3(+) and 6(-); for future use not operational in this release. ToD Output - Differential RS422 - on pins 3(+) and 6(-); for future use not operational in this release. A system reference interface to and from IP-10G native synchronization The interface can provide a reference input for: Pseudowire (in Common Clock mode) Front panel output interface The interface may provide an output synchronization signal coming from: Pseudowire recovered clock from Adaptive Clock Recovery Front panel output interface FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 178 of 403 6.7.2.8 Smart TDM Pseudowire Monitoring The following monitoring features are available for Smart TDM Pseudowire: Pseudowire PMs Standard pseudowire PM measurements are provided for each configured service: missing-packets counter packets-reorder counter misorder-dropped counter malformed-packets counter ES SES UAS FC TDM signals PMs PMs are calculated at the ingress of TDM signals to the Smart TDM Pseudowire T-card (from the IP-10G XC): ES SES UAS RMON The Ethernet port provides a number of RMON counters, which are not identical to the IP-10G main bridge counters. For a list and description of these counters, refer to the FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E User Guide, DOC- 00034612. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 179 of 403 6.7.3 Wireless SNCP Related topics: Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery (ABR) AIS Signaling and Detection IP-10G supports an integrated VC trail protection mechanism called Wireless Sub-Network Connection Protection (SNCP). Path-protected trails are a special case of TDM trails, in which not two but three interfaces are configured. It is used to protect TDM traffic from any failure along its end-to-end path. With Wireless SNCP, a backup VC trail can optionally be defined for each individual VC trail. For each backup VC, the following must be defined: Two branching points from the main VC that it is protecting. A path for the backup VC (typically separate from the path of the main VC that it is protecting). For each direction of the backup VC, the following is performed independently: At the first branching point, duplication of the traffic from the main VC to the backup VC. At the second branching point, selection of traffic from either the main VC or the backup VC. Traffic from the backup VC is used if a failure is detected in main VC. Switchover is performed within <50 ms. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 180 of 403 The following figure shows how Wireless SNCP operates. Wireless SNCP Operation
For each main VC trail, the branching points can be any Cross-Connect node along the path of the trail. Wireless SNCP - Branching Points
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 181 of 403 6.7.3.1 SNCP Trail Configuration Besides the protected parameter, SNCP trails differ from unprotected trails in the roles of their interfaces: Interface 1: The end-point interface. Can be line or radio; in the outgoing direction (from interface 1 into the system), traffic is split between interfaces 2 and 3, and in the incoming direction traffic is chosen from them according to certain criteria. Interface 2: The primary interface; it will be initially active. Interface 3: The secondary interface; it will be initially standby.
6.7.3.2 SNCP Switching Criteria Traffic will switch from the currently active interface to the standby interface in the following cases: Signal failure Note: When line interfaces (STM-1) are used along a TDM trail path, AIS detection must be enabled for SNCP to work properly. User command to force traffic to the standby interface Note: Forcing traffic will cause the selected interface to become active (even if its signal fails) until the user cancels this setting (revertive mode is not supported at this stage). 6.7.3.3 SNCP Indications For each protected trail, the following status indications are given: Path status For both active and standby paths Same status indications as given for unprotected TDM trails Current active trail Number of switches since last time counter was reset FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 182 of 403 6.7.3.4 Support for Wireless SNCP in a Mixed Wireless-Optical Network Wireless SNCP is supported over fiber links using IP-10G STM-1 Mux interfaces. This feature provides a fully integrated solution for protected E1 services over a mixed wireless-optical network. Wireless SNCP Mixed Wireless Optical Network
6.7.3.5 SNCP in TDM Rings Wireless SNCP replaces a failed sub-network connection with a standby sub network connection. In IP-10G, this capability is provided at the points where trails leave sub networks. The switching criterion is based on SNCP/I. This protocol specifies that automatic switching is performed if an AIS or LOP fault is detected in the working sub network connection. If neither AIS nor LOP faults are detected, and the protection lockout is not in effect, the scheme used is 1+1 singled- ended. The NMS provides Manual switch to protection and Protection lockout commands. A notification is sent to the management station when an automatic switch occurs. The status of the selectors and the sub network connections are displayed on the NMS screen. 6.7.3.6 Wireless SNCP Benefits Flexibility All network topologies are supported (ring, mesh, tree) All traffic distribution patterns are supported (excels in hub traffic concentration) Any mix of protected and non-protected trails is supported No hard limit on the number of nodes in a ring Simple provisioning of protection FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 183 of 403 Performance Non traffic-affecting switching to protection (<50 m) Switch to protection is done at the E1 VC trail level, works perfectly with ACM (no need to switch the entire traffic on a link) Optimal latency under protection Interoperability Protection is done at the end points, independent of equipment/vendor networks Interoperable with networks that use other types of protection (such as BLSR) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 184 of 403 6.7.4 Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery (ABR) Related topics: Wireless SNCP As an alternative to Wireless SNCP, Adaptive Bandwidth Recovery (ABR) enables full utilization of the bidirectional capabilities inherent in ring technologies to provide TDM path protection while utilizing the protection paths whenever possible for both TDM and Ethernet traffic. With ABR, TDM-based information is transmitted in one direction only, while the unused protection capacity is allocated for Ethernet traffic. In the event of a failure, the unused capacity is re-allocated for TDM transmission. Using ABR, each E1 flow consists of a primary and a protection path. Capacity on the protection path is reserved, but not allocated. Actual capacity allocation only occurs on demand in the event of a failure. In an ordinary non-failure state, only the primary path consumes capacity, freeing capacity on the protection path to other applications, such as mobile broadband. This technique extends the Native 2 approach to dynamic allocation of link capacity between TDM and Ethernet flows to the network level. SNCP and ABR Comparison
6.7.4.1 ABR Operation The ABR feature consists of the following components: Signaling between the end-points of every trail point to exchange information about the quality of the received signals. Each end-point may send an RDI signal along each path (primary and secondary) to the other end point. RDI is sent whenever a valid TDM trail signal is not received. Logic to determine in which cases it is permissible not to send traffic through one of the paths. Under normal conditions, TDM traffic is sent only through the primary path. In order to make proper use of the freed capacity, it is necessary for the Ethernet traffic to use the same path in both directions. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 185 of 403 For this reason, any failure in the primary path will cause both sides to revert to the normal mode of operation (sending traffic through both paths). Traffic will return to the primary path after the failure condition has been cleared (the mechanism is revertive). In order to prevent jittering of the path and unnecessary traffic switches in case of intermittent primary path failures, there is a revertive timer. This timer determines the amount of time required after no failure is detected in the primary path before ceasing traffic transmission through the secondary path Automatically freeing bandwidth whenever TDM traffic is not being sent: Whenever valid TDM traffic is not available at the radio interface for transmission, its bandwidth is automatically re-allocated for Ethernet traffic. This is relevant not only for ABR trails, but for all TDM traffic. In other words, bandwidth is freed up whenever there is no information to transmit. This may occur in the following circumstances: A failure has occurred which interrupts TDM traffic in a certain trail. This may take place in a radio link or an internal connection. No valid TDM input (E1 signal) is received at the end-point. AIS signal is detected at the input (if AIS detection feature is enabled). Selecting the incoming traffic normally as explained for SNCP trails. The ABR mechanism is relevant only for the transmission. Reception is dealt with in the same manner as normal SNCP trails. 6.7.4.2 ABR Configuration A new type of trail (ABR trail) is defined, in addition to protected and unprotected trails. ABR trails are configured exactly in the same way as normal SNCP trails and are subject to the same validations. This is because in the worst-case (failure condition), ABR trails behave like normal SNCP trails, occupying bandwidth in both paths. The following are extra configuration and behavior factors that apply exclusively to ABR trails: Revertive timer: The same timer is used for all trails Forcing ABR trails: When forcing reception of an ABR trail from the secondary path, the system will automatically cause both end-points to transmit traffic through that path, regardless of failure conditions. The traffic will cease to be sent when force none is configured. 6.7.4.3 ABR User Indications The following indications are specific to TDM trails: RDI indication is given per trail to the user. Separate status indications are given for each path. For SNCP trails, status is always given for primary and secondary paths. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 186 of 403 For ABR trails, status is given for paths which are currently transmitting; with no failure conditions; this means the primary path only. PMs are collected as follows: Primary is active No PM is counted on secondary. Secondary is active (due to primary failure or force to standby) PM is counted on primary and on secondary. 6.7.4.4 ABR Operation within SDH/SONET Networks ABR is a proprietary feature, and in order to make full use of it and gain the extra bandwidth that ABR can provide, both end-points should be IP-10G equipment. However, ABR can be used within a standard SDH/SONET network, in the following senses: A radio ring performing ABR protection can have one or more STM-1 optical links between two IP-10G nodes. In this case, ABR will work properly and save bandwidth. The signaling between the end points is carried in the standard VC-11/12 header. Note: In order to make good use of the feature, the TDM primary path should be the path that includes the STM-1 links, since these cannot carry Ethernet traffic, so the saved bandwidth is used in the radio segments. A radio ring performing ABR protection can have one or more SONET/SDH networks transporting trails between two IP-10G nodes; the IP-10G interfaces with the SONET/SDH network using the STM-1 interface. As in the previous case, the signaling between the end points is carried in the standard VC-11/12 header. If one of the end-points of a trail is configured as ABR and the other end- point is located at third-party equipment implementing standard SDH/SONET SNCP, path protection will still be achieved, but performance is reduced to standard SNCP (no bandwidth savings). 6.7.4.5 Bandwidth Recovery Using ABR In a typical SDH network, the receiving node monitors the transmission quality at its east and west link interfaces, and selects the direction from which it will receive transmissions. The transmitting node, therefore, sends traffic in both the east and west directions, causing the redundant use of bandwidth. This form of protection is known as SNCP 1+1 Unidirectional Protection, and while it can generally provide 50 millisecond protection switching, it does so by reserving large quantities of bandwidth over a very expensive wireless spectrum. The novel approach used by ABR involves a change in the role of the transmitting element. In this approach, the transmitting element determines the direction of information transmission east or west. The direction is determined independently for each E1 path, based on status information sent periodically by the receiving node back to the transmitter. The receiving node continues to monitor both directions for the arrival of information, as described previously. This method achieves the goal of protecting traffic without wasting capacity on unused reserved bandwidth. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 187 of 403 In the standby direction, the transmitting node along with all the nodes in the standby path to the receiver removes the E1 bandwidth allocation, and sends periodic signals to the receiver to help it monitor the transmissions from east and west. The de-allocated (recovered) E1 bandwidth can now be utilized by Ethernet traffic. The receiving node continues to accept information flows from either the east or west direction, and detects the path in which the E1 payload is actually transmitted. When a failure occurs in the working direction, the receiving node sends a Reverse Defect Indication (RDI) signal to the transmitter, which automatically switches to the standby path. ABR can be selected for any number of E1 channels, and the resulting path co- exists with all other paths in the network be they unidirectional, bidirectional, protected, or unprotected. The case study below describes a real-life example of how ABR delivers normal-state Ethernet capacity that may triple the Ethernet capacity delivered when using SNCP 1+1. While malfunctions under SNCP 1+1 automatically result in network degradation to a worst-case scenario (known as failure state), a network fault under ABR results in a level of degradation that depends on the exact location of the failure, and worst-case degradation is usually avoided. 6.7.4.6 ABR and Dual Homing ABR can be used in a dual homing configuration, in which there are two possible points of entry into the ring network. This provides added resiliency in case of failure in the transmitting node. In dual homing mode, one transmission node sends the E1 payload, while the other transmission node sends standby signaling as mentioned earlier. Dual Homing with ABR-Based TDM Protection
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 188 of 403 6.7.4.7 ABR and Hybrid Fiber/Microwave Networks In segments of a microwave network that are connected by fiber-optic links, E1 frames must be propagated onto the optical cable, and restored again on the next microwave segment. The same goes for fault indicators. When a wireless E1 is de-allocated and its bandwidth freed for Ethernet traffic, the periodic signals sent from the transmitter to the receiver are also propagated optically and then regenerated on the next microwave segment. 6.7.4.8 ABR Examples In the figure below, the traffic emanating from 18 cell sites is merged into four aggregation sites, making up a metro ring consisting of 28 MHz channels in a 1+0 configuration. In this basic scenario, 2G BTSs support 4 E1s each, yielding a total of 72 E1s. SNCP 1+1 Protection is employed. TDM and Ethernet Aggregation Case Study
In this scenario, the main question is how to migrate the network to support 3G-based data services, given the severe spectrum limitations. This common legacy configuration leaves almost no capacity for Ethernet traffic in this case, approximately 2.3 Mbps per site of guaranteed Ethernet traffic (assuming 64 Bytes frame size). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 189 of 403 TDM-only Aggregation Ring with 100% Protection Based on SNCP 1+1
In the simple, TDM-only, SNCP 1+1 case presented in the figure above, all E1s flow in both directions, meaning that 50% of the total capacity is reserved for failure states. In case of such a failure, E1 traffic is forwarded in the opposite direction. From a capacity point of view, there is no difference between normal state and failure state. TDM Aggregation Ring - SNCP 1:1 Protection Bandwidth is Used for Ethernet
In the SNCP 1:1 scenario depicted in the above figure, TDM-only E1s flow only in one direction. An alternate path is reserved, but no capacity is allocated. In case of a failure, E1s are re-routed in the opposite direction over the reserved path, receiving the non-allocated capacity. When planning a data network for broadband services, one should compute the guaranteed traffic (Committed Information Rate CIR), as well as the possible upside (Excess Information Rate EIR). Given the availability of bandwidth for both classes, you can determine the subscribers overall Quality of Experience. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 190 of 403 A Native Ethernet Ring with 100% or Partial Protection Based on STP
In the scenario that appears in the figure above, when applying 100% protection or in case of a worst case failure, up to 14.5 Mbps of Ethernet capacity are available per site. The whole ring can support 262 Mbps of traffic. So if the 262 Mbps of protected path bandwidth is reserved but not allocated, Ethernet capacity is increased to 29 Mbps per cell site aggregated into 116 Mbps in aggregation site S2, etc. In Ethernet, the various failure state scenarios each have a different effect on capacity, as described in the next section. 6.7.4.9 Ethernet Ring Failure States The figure below depicts three failure states of varying severities, denoted 2, 3 and 4. Non-Affecting Failure. The failure in link A3 does not affect traffic, as STP has in any case blocked this link. Ethernet traffic does not traverse this link. Medium-Severity Failure. The link failure at A2 causes some traffic to flow normally, while some traffic uses the reserved alternate path. Worst-Case Scenario Failure A failure in link A1 causes all traffic to flow over the reserved alternate path Ethernet Rings: Different Severities of Failure States Normal State Non-Affecting Failure
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 191 of 403 Normal State Non-Affecting Failure Medium Severity Failure Worst Case Failure
Link Failure
STP Block
Traffic from S2 to S1
Traffic from S3 to S1 There is no need for an STP block in any of the failure scenarios (1-3), since at least one link in the ring is in any case out of service. 6.7.4.10 Comparison of Protection Methods To Allocate or Not to Allocate Traditional protection schemes include bandwidth reservation and actual allocation of capacity for the alternate path. The reasoning for this was simple in failure state, the network would not be able to restore connectivity in a timely fashion. Today, higher processing speeds and improved network recovery algorithms allow products such as IP-10G to restore connectivity instantly, without pre-allocation of capacity. Therefore, while high-priority E1 traffic is protected, alternate path capacity is reserved, but the unused capacity can be utilized for the delivery of broadband services, allowing data users to enjoy additional capacity when it becomes available. For example: A Native2 Ring with Protected-ABR at Work
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 192 of 403 While 72 E1s lines are delivered all the time, only the relevant 36 E1s are actually carried on each path. On the Ethernet side, up to 262 Mbps of data are available in normal state, while 41 Mbps guaranteed at failure (in the worst case scenario). Much more, even in failures states: 17 Mbps of data per cell site vs. 2.3 mbps in SNCP 1+1 17 Mbps per cell site for A3 failure 6.4 Mbps per cell site for A2/A4 failure In summary, ABR can provide much higher capacities in all scenarios, with the exception of worst case failures. The increased capacity allows operators to improve customer stratification, and enhance subscribers overall Quality-of- Experience (QoE) with better performance in mail delivery, content sharing, backup services, Facebook access, and video streaming. 6.7.4.11 ABR Benefits ABR has significant benefits when applied in a 2G-to-3G migration environment. It enables an operator to enjoy the inherent benefits of hybrid TDM and Ethernet Microwave environments: ABR Advantages: Double Data Capacity, with no Impact on TDM in Failure State
Doubles ring capacity by using the TDM protection path to provide extra capacity for Ethernet services. Leaves revenue-generating 2G voice traffic unaffected in the migration process, with no need for protocol conversion. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 193 of 403 Protects network synchronization and clock using currently deployed E1s, without the need to test and verify new clock recovery mechanisms. Clock recovery techniques are sensitive to delay and delay variation, and therefore have a severe impact on the operators deployment strategy, often limiting the number of links in a chain or a ring. Streamlines the phase-out of legacy E1s in the network, easing the preparation for deployment of all-packet backhaul networks. QoS awareness enables the operator to associate the appropriate class of availability and class of service to each traffic type: Protected or not protected Special low delay considerations Low, medium, or high priority TDM or Ethernet FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 194 of 403 6.7.5 ACM for TDM Services Related topics: Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) A unique advantage of IP-10Gs ACM implementation is its ability to use sophisticated adaptive techniques in a hybrid, TDM/packet model. Using Ceragons innovative Native 2 migration solution, in which TDM and Ethernet traffic is natively and simultaneously carried over a single microwave link, both TDM and Ethernet services can have configurable priority. When more than one E1 channel is connected to a cell site, one of the channels can be given a higher priority in order to maintain network synchronization as well as a minimum level of service. The rest of the E1 channels may be forwarded at a lower priority. The figure below illustrates the benefits of Ceragons unique ACM adaption for TDM based o the number of E1 channel, with the following assumptions: Frequency Band 15 GHz Rain Zone N (120 mm/year) Antennas 1.2 m Distance 18 Km Polarization Horizontal Ceragons Unique ACM Adaption for TDM
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 195 of 403 Ceragon's Unique ACM Adaption for TDM Number of E1 Channels Yearly Downtime (minutes) Availability QAM 80 178 99.96 256 H 80 132 99.97 256 L 68 105 99.98 128 55 71 99.986 64 44 60 99.988 32 33 37 99.993 16 23 26 99.995 8 17 11 99.999 QPSK There are substantial benefits to be gained from applying ACM in a TDM network. The operator can increase capacity on an existing link while maintaining the same availability for its existing revenue-generating services. Additional data E1 channels are easily offloaded in this virtual link to a channel offering slightly lower availability. Optimally, one E1 channel can be given a higher priority connection to maintain synchronization and a minimum level of service at all times (greater than 99.999% availability). The rest of the E1 channels can be associated with a lower priority. This model can be applied effectively even in a TDM-to-Ethernet migration scenario. It is important to note that it is possible to define packet-based services at a higher priority than for TDM services, as some real-time services may run on Ethernet ports, while other, best-effort data services are forwarded over legacy TDM networks. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 196 of 403 6.7.6 AIS Signaling and Detection FibeAir IP-10G supports detection of AIS in incoming signals at TDM line interfaces (E1 or STM-1 VC-11/12). IP-10G also supports AIS signaling in the optional STM-1 interface. In case of signal failure at the trail going out from the STM-1 interface, AIS is transmitted at the payload of the VC-11/12. In addition, IP-10G can be configured to signal AIS at the VC level, in order to provide indications to SDH multiplexing equipment which may not have the ability to detect AIS at the payload level. The feature is enabled or disabled for the entire IDU, and for all its TDM line interfaces. In case of detection, the following takes place: Signal failure is generated at the corresponding trail. This prevents the far end from receiving a signal (including trail ID indications) and the trail status to show signal failure. An indication is given to the user at the proper interface. Note that this is not a system alarm, since the problem originates elsewhere in the network. In case of signal failure at the trail outgoing from the STM-1 interface, AIS is transmitted at the payload of the VC-11/12. In addition, the system can be configured to signal AIS at the VC level (AIS-V) in the V5 byte of the overhead. This is meant to provide indications to SDH multiplexing equipment which may not have the ability to detect AIS at the payload level. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 197 of 403 6.8 Synchronization This section includes: Synchronization Overview IP-10G Synchronization Solution Available Synchronization Interfaces Synchronization Configuration Synchronization Using TDM Trails SyncE from Co-Located TDM Trails Synchronization Using Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Optimized Transport Native Sync Distribution Mode SyncE PRC Pipe Regenerator Mode SSM Support and Loop Prevention FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 198 of 403 6.8.1 Synchronization Overview Frequency synchronization consists of the transport of a frequency timing reference through the physical layer of a certain interface. The interface used to convey the frequency may be an Ethernet, PDH, SDH or logical interface. Synchronization enables the receiving side of an interface to lock onto the physical layer clock of the received signal, which was derived from some reference clock source, thereby frequency-synchronizing the receiver with that source. Synchronization can be used to synchronize network elements by feeding one node with a reference clock, and having other nodes derive their clocks from that source. The following synchronization applications are relevant: Distribution of synchronization to equipment that supports synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) in a PDH-synchronized network (co-located synchronization): Synchronization sources are entered into the system as PDH trails transported through the system. In 2G networks, for example, all PDH trails are synchronized to a common clock. In the desired nodes, the frequency is taken from the local trails (which derive their frequency from the original input). The transported frequency is used to drive the outgoing Ethernet signal. Distribution of synchronization in a hybrid network, where some of the sites require SyncE and others require PDH synchronization: A synchronization source is entered into the network (through Ethernet or SDH, for example) and distributed through the radio links. In nodes with PDH support, the reference frequency is conveyed to the user through an E1 interface used for synchronization. In nodes with Ethernet support, the reference frequency is conveyed to the user via SyncE interfaces Distribution of synchronization in an Ethernet-only network: A synchronization source is entered into the network through SyncE or SDH and distributed through the radio links The reference frequency is conveyed to the user through the network via SyncE interfaces. Note: In order to use this feature, an IP-10G with supporting hardware is required. A synchronization license is also required. Synchronization is an essential part of any mobile backhaul solution and is sometimes required by other applications as well. Two unique synchronization issues must be addressed for mobile networks: Frequency Lock: Applicable to GSM and UMTS-FDD networks. Limits channel interference between carrier frequency bands. Typical performance target: frequency accuracy of < 50 ppb. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 199 of 403 Sync is the traditional technique used, with traceability to a PRS master clock carried over PDH/SDH networks, or using GPS. Phase Lock with Latency Correction: Applicable to CDMA, CDMA-2000, UMTS-TDD, and WiMAX networks. Limits coding time division overlap. Typical performance target: frequency accuracy of < 20 - 50 ppb, phase difference of < 1-3 ms. GPS is the traditional technique used. 6.8.1.1 Precision Timing-Protocol (PTP) PTP synchronization refers to the distribution of frequency, phase, and absolute time information across an asynchronous packet switched network. PTP can use a variety of protocols to achieve timing distribution, including: IEEE-1588 NTP RTP Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Synchronization
6.8.1.2 Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) SyncE is standardized in ITU-T G.8261 and refers to a method whereby the clock is delivered on the physical layer. The method is based on SDH/TDM timing, with similar performance, and does not change the basic Ethernet standards. The SyncE technique supports synchronized Ethernet outputs as the timing source to an all-IP BTS/NodeB. This method offers the same synchronization quality provided over E1 interfaces to legacy BTS/NodeB. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 200 of 403 Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)
6.8.2 IP-10G Synchronization Solution Ceragon's synchronization solution ensures maximum flexibility by enabling the operator to select any combination of techniques suitable for the operators network and migration strategy. Synchronization using native E1 trails Including SyncE output from co-located trail support PTP optimized transport: Supports a variety of protocols, such as IEEE-1588 and NTP Guaranteed ultra-low PDV (<0.035 ms per hop) Unique support for ACM and narrow channels Native Sync Distribution End-to-End Native Synchronization distribution for nodal configurations GE/E1/STM-1 input GE/FE/E1/STM-1 output Supports any radio link configuration and network topology Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) to prevent loops and enable use of most reliable clock source User-defined clock source priority level Automated determination of relative clock source quality levels SyncE Regenerator mode PRC grade (G.811) performance for pipe (regenerator) applications FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 201 of 403 6.8.3 Available Synchronization Interfaces Frequency signals can be taken by the system from a number of different interfaces (one reference at a time). The reference frequency may also be conveyed to external equipment through different interfaces. The available interfaces for frequency distribution depend on the hardware assembly, as summarized in the following table:
Hardware type Available interfaces as frequency input (reference sync source) Available interfaces as frequency output IP-10G R2 TDM trails E1 interfaces STM-1 signal STM-1 VC-11/12s Radio channels PW clock port Incoming PW signal E1 interfaces STM-1 signal STM-1 VC-11/12s Radio channels GE/FE Ethernet interfaces PW clock port Reference clock for PW signals IP-10G R3 TDM trails E1 interfaces STM-1 signal STM-1 VC-11/12s Radio channels GE Ethernet interfaces PW clock port Incoming PW signal E1 interfaces STM-1 signal STM-1 VC-11/12s Radio channels GE/FE Ethernet interfaces PW clock port Reference clock for PW signals When using a radio channel to distribute a frequency, 2Mbps of bandwidth is used for this purpose. However the following facts mitigate the loss of bandwidth: When using TDM trails as a synchronization source (co-located mode), no additional bandwidth is taken (the 2Mbps is already used by the trail). When distributing through a network, a single channel per radio link is necessary to synchronize all the nodes in the network, regardless of their number. It is possible to configure up to eight synchronization sources in the system. At any given moment, only one of these sources is active; the clock is taken from the active source onto all other appropriately configured interfaces. Note: At this point there is support for loops and for quality indicators (SSM) in the radio interfaces only. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 202 of 403 6.8.4 Synchronization Configuration Frequency is distributed by configuring the following parameters in each node: System synchronization sources (primary/secondary). These are the interfaces from which the frequency is taken and distributed to other interfaces. Up to 8 sources can be configured in each node. A revertive timer can be configured. For each interface, user must configure: Its clock quality level. The quality level may be fixed (according to ITU- T G.781 option I for E1 systems, option II for DS1 systems) or automatic. When the quality level is automatic, it is determined by SSM messages. Its priority (1-8). No two interfaces may have the same priority. For each interface, the source of its outgoing signal clock. This can be: Local clock: Causes the interface to generate its signal from a local oscillator, unrelated to the system reference frequency. Synchronization reference: Causes the interface to generate its signal from the system reference clock, which is taken from the synchronization source. The nodes synchronization mode. This can be: Automatic: In this mode, the active source is selected based on the interface with highest available quality. Among interfaces with identical quality, the interface with the highest priority is used. Force: The user can force the system to use a certain interface as the reference clock source. By configuring synchronization sources and transporting the reference frequency to the related interfaces in a network, a frequency flow can be achieved, as shown in the example below, where the reference frequency from a single node is distributed to a number of base stations. Synchronization Configuration IP-10G Node IP-10G Node IP-10G Converter IP-10G Converter IP-10G Converter IP-10G Converter IP-10G Converter BTS BTS BTS BTS Radio Link Ethernet Interface E1 Interface Sync Source Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Sync Source Sync Source Sync Source Sync Source Sync Source Sync Source Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference Signal Clock = Reference
The following restrictions apply for frequency distribution configuration: FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 203 of 403 Synchronization source interfaces must not be assigned to a TDM trail, unless the tdm trail interface is used. In this case, a pre-existing trail must be configured. An interface can either be used as a synchronization source or can take its signal from the system reference, but not both (no loop timing available, except locally in SDH interfaces). If no interface is configured as a synchronization source, no interfaces may take its outgoing clock from the reference. If at least one interface is currently taking its outgoing clock from the reference, the synchronization source cannot be removed. The clock taken from a line interface (E1, SDH, VC-11/12, Ethernet) cannot be conveyed to another line interface in the same IDU. The clock taken from a radio channel cannot be conveyed to another radio channel in the same radio. In each IDU, only one line interface at the main board and only one at the T-card can take its outgoing clock from the reference clock at any given time. All other interfaces in the same board must make use of the local clock. If the signal driving the Ethernet interfaces fails, an alarm will alert the user. 6.8.5 Synchronization Using TDM Trails Using this technique, each E1 trail carries a native TDM clock, which is compliant with GSM and UMTS synchronization requirements. Synchronization using Native E1 Trails
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 204 of 403 IP-10G implements a PDH-like mechanism for providing high precision synchronization of native TDM trails. This implementation ensures high- quality synchronization while keeping cost and complexity low since it eliminates the need for a sophisticated centralized SDH-grade clock unit at each node. The system is designed to deliver E1 traffic and recover E1 clock, complying with G.823 synchronization port jitter and wander. That means the user can use any or all of the systems E1 interfaces in order to deliver synchronization reference via the radio to a remote site. Each trail is independent of the other, meaning that IP-10G does not imply any restrictions on the source of the TDM trails. This means that each trail can have its own clock, and no synchronization between trails is assumed. Each E1 trail is mapped independently over the radio frame and the integrated cross-connect elements. Timing can be distributed over user traffic carrying E1 trails or dedicated timing trails. This method eliminates (or delays) the need to employ emerging techniques for carrying timing over packet networks (SyncE or PTP). 6.8.6 SyncE from Co-Located TDM Trails The clock for SyncE output interfaces can be derived from any co-located traffic-carrying E1 trail at the BTS site. This is ideal as an intermediate solution for introducing all-packet NodeBs which are co-located with already installed 2G BTSs. The figure below illustrates how SyncE from Co-Located E1 trail operates. Sync from Co-Located E1 Mode
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 205 of 403 6.8.7 Synchronization Using Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) Optimized Transport This feature requires: Enhanced QoS license This feature cannot be used with: Wayside Channel Related topics: Enhanced QoS IP-10G supports the PTP synchronization protocol (IEEE-1588). IP-10Gs PTP Optimized Transport guarantees ultra-low PDV (<0.035 ms), and provides unique support for ACM and narrow channels. Frame delay variation of <0.035 ms per hop for PTP control frames is supported, even when ACM is enabled, and even when operating with narrow radio channels. The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) optimized transport feature is essential for timing synchronization protocols such as IEEE 1588. The PTP optimized transport channel is a Constant Bit Rate Channel that is dedicated to the Precision Time protocol with a constant latency that is unaffected by ACM profile changes and by congestion conditions that may occur on the payload traffic path. Ceragon's unique PTP Optimized Transport mechanism ensures that PTP control frames (IEEE-1588, NTP, etc.) are transported with maximum reliability and minimum delay variation, to provide the best possible timing accuracy (frequency and phase) meeting the stringent requirement of emerging 4G technologies. PTP control frames are identified using the advanced integrated QoS classifier. Upon enabling this feature, a special low PDV channel is created. This channel has 2 Mb bandwidth and carries all the frames mapped to the eighth Enhanced QoS priority queue. Once enabling the feature, the user must make sure to classify all PTP frames to the eighth queue. In this mode, all frames from the eight queue will bypass the shaper and scheduler and will be sent directly to the dedicated low PDV channel. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 206 of 403 PTP Optimized Transport
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 207 of 403 6.8.8 Native Sync Distribution Mode This feature requires: Synchronization Unit license For SyncE input, hardware version R3 Related topics: Licensing In this mode, targeting nodal configurations, synchronization is distributed natively end-to-end over the radio links in the network. No TDM trails or E1 interfaces at the tail sites are required. Synchronization is typically provided by one or more clock sources (SSU/GPS) at fiber hub sites. Native Sync Distribution Mode
In native Sync Distribution mode, the following interfaces can be used as the sync references: E1STM-1GE (SyncE) 11
Additionally, the following interfaces can be used for sync output: E1GE/FE (SyncE) Native Sync Distribution mode can be used in any link configuration and any network topology. Ring topologies present special challenges for network synchronization. Any system that contains more than one clock source for synchronization, or in which topology loops may exist, requires an active mechanism to ensure that: A single source is be used as the clock source throughout the network, preferably the source with the highest accuracy. There are no reference loops. In other words, no element in the network will use an input frequency from an interface that ultimately derived that frequency from one of the outputs of that network element.
11 SyncE input is only supported in the R3 hardware release. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 208 of 403 IP-10Gs Native Sync Distribution mechanism enables users to define a priority level for each possible clock source. Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) are sent regularly through each interface involved in frequency distribution, enabling the network to gather and maintain a synchronization status for each interface according to the systems best knowledge about the frequency quality that can be conveyed by that interface. Based on these parameters, the network assigns each interface a quality level and determines which interface to use as the current clock source. The network does this by evaluating the clock quality of the available source interfaces and selecting, from those interfaces with the highest quality, the interface with the highest user-defined priority. The synchronization is re-evaluated whenever one of the following occurs: Any synchronization source is added, edited, or deleted by a user. The clock quality status changes for any source interface. The synchronization mode is changed for the node. 6.8.8.1 Native Sync Distribution Examples The figure below provides a Native Sync Distribution mode usage example in which synchronization is provided to all-packet Node-Bs using SyncE. Native Sync Distribution Mode Usage Example
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 209 of 403 The following figure illustrates Native Sync Distribution in a tree scenario. Native Sync Distribution Mode Tree Scenario
The following figure illustrates Native Sync Distribution in a ring scenario, during normal operation. Native Sync Distribution Mode Ring Scenario (Normal Operation)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 210 of 403 The following figure illustrates Native Sync Distribution in a ring scenario, where a link has failed and the Native Sync timing distribution has been restored over an alternate path by using SSM messages. Native Sync Distribution Mode Ring Scenario (Link Failure)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 211 of 403 6.8.9 SyncE PRC Pipe Regenerator Mode This feature requires: Hardware version R3 Smart Pipe switching mode Related topics: Licensing In SyncE PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is transported between the GbE interfaces through the radio link. PRC pipe regenerator mode makes use of the fact that the system is acting as a simple link (so no distribution mechanism is necessary) in order to achieve the following: Improved frequency distribution performance: PRC quality No use of bandwidth for frequency distribution Simplified configuration In PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is taken from the incoming GbE Ethernet signal, and used as a reference for the radio frame. On the receiver side, the radio frame frequency is used as the reference signal for the outgoing Ethernet PHY. Frequency distribution behaves in a different way for optical and electrical GbE interfaces, because of the way these interfaces are implemented: For optical interfaces, separate and independent frequencies are transported in each direction. For electrical interfaces, each PHY must act either as clock master or as clock slave in its own link. For this reason, frequency can only be distributed in one direction, determined by the user. PRC regenerator mode does not completely override the regular synchronization distribution, but since it makes use of the Ethernet interfaces, the following limitations apply: In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured as a synchronization source for distribution. In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured to take the system reference clock for their outgoing signal. Frequency distribution through the radio is independent for each mechanism and is carried out at a different layer. For PRC pipe regenerator mode to work, the following is necessary: The system must be configured to Smart Pipe mode. Interface Eth1 (GbE) must be enabled. Ethernet interfaces must not be configured as the system synchronization source. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 212 of 403 The user can configure the following: PRC regenerator mode admin Direction of synchronization distribution (applicable only for electrical GbE interfaces; for optical interfaces, this parameter is ignored) Line to radio Radio to line 6.8.10 SSM Support and Loop Prevention In order to provide topological resiliency for synchronization transfer, IP-10G implements the passing of SSM messages over the radio interfaces. In addition, the SSM mechanism provides reference source resiliency, since a network may have more than one source clock. The following are the principles of operation: At all times, each source interface has a quality status which is determined as follows: If quality is configured as fixed, then the quality status becomes failure upon interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF, etc.). If quality is automatic, then the quality is determined by the received SSMs or becomes failure upon interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF, etc.). Each unit holds a parameter which indicates the quality of its reference clock. This is the quality of the current synchronization source interface. The reference source quality is transmitted through SSM messages to all relevant radio interfaces. Each unit determines the current active clock reference source interface: The interface with the highest available quality is selected. From among interfaces with identical quality, the interface with the highest priority is selected. In order to prevent loops, an SSM with quality Do Not Use is sent towards the active source interface At any given moment, the system enables users to display: The current source interface quality. The current received SSM status for every source interface. The current node reference source quality. As a reference, the following are the possible quality values (from highest to lowest): AUTOMATIC (available only in interfaces for which SSM support is implemented) G.811 SSU-A SSU-B G.813/8262 - default DO NOT USE Failure (cannot be configured by user) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 213 of 403 7. Radio Frequency Units (RFUs) This chapter includes: RFU Overview RFU Selection Guide RFU-C 1500HP/RFU-HP RFH-HS RFU-SP 1500P FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 214 of 403 7.1 RFU Overview FibeAir Radio Frequency Units (RFUs) were designed with sturdiness, power, simplicity, and compatibility in mind. These advanced systems provide high- power transmission for short and long distances and can be assembled and installed quickly and easily. Any of the RFUs described in this chapter can be used in an IP-10G system. FibeAir RFUs deliver the maximum capacity over 3.5-56 MHz channels with configurable modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM. The RFU supports low to high capacities for traditional voice, mission critical, and emerging Ethernet services, with any mix of interfaces, pure Ethernet, pure TDM, or hybrid Ethernet and TDM interfaces (Native 2 ). High spectral efficiency can be ensured with XPIC, using the same bandwidth for double the capacity, via a single carrier, with vertical and horizontal polarizations. IP-10G works with the following RFUs: Standard Power FibeAir RFU-C FibeAir RFU-SP FibeAir 1500P High Power FibeAir 1500HP FibeAir RFU-HP FibeAir RFU-HS The following RFUs can be installed in a split-mount configuration: FibeAir RFU-C (642 GHz) 12
FibeAir 1500HP/RFU-HP (611 GHz) FibeAir RFU-HS (68 GHz) FibeAir RFU-SP (68 GHz) FibeAir 1500P (1138 GHz) The following RFUs can be installed in an all-indoor configuration: FibeAir 1500HP/RFU-HP (611 GHz) The IFU and RFU are connected by a coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male). The antenna connection can be: Direct or remote mount using the same antenna type. Remote mount: standard flexible waveguide (frequency dependent) 13
12 Refer to RFU-C roll-out plan for availability of each frequency. 13 Remote mount configuration is not supported for 42 GHz. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 215 of 403 7.2 RFU Selection Guide The following table can be used to help you select the RFU that is appropriate to your location. For the 13-42 14 GHz frequency range, use FibeAir RFU-C For the low frequencies please refer to the options below: RFU Selection Guide Character RFU-C (6 42GHz) 1500HP (6 11GHz) RFU-HP (6 8GHz) RFU-HS (6 8GHz) RFU-SP (6 8GHz) 1500P (11 38GHz) Installation Type Split Mount
All-Indoor -- -- --
Space Diversity Method SD (BBS/IFC) BBS BBS + IFC 15 BBS BBS BBS BBS Frequency Diversity FD (BBS) Configuration 1+0/2+0/1+1/2+2 N+1 -- -- -- -- N+0 ( N>2) -- -- -- -- Tx Power (dBm) High Power (up to 29 dBm) -- -- -- Ultra High Power (up to 32 dBm) -- -- -- -- RFU Mounting Direct Mount Antenna -- --
14 42GHz RFU-C is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. 15 1500 HP (11 GHz ) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, Space Diversity is only available via BBS. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 216 of 403 7.3 RFU-C FibeAir RFU-C is a fully software configurable, state-of-the-art RFU that supports a broad range of interfaces and capacities from 10 Mbps up to 500 Mbps. RFU-C operates in the frequency range of 6-42 GHz. RFU-C supports low to high capacities for traditional voice and Ethernet services, as well as PDH/SDH/SONET or hybrid Ethernet and TDM interfaces. Traffic capacity throughput and spectral efficiency are optimized with the desired channel bandwidth. For maximum user choice flexibility, channel bandwidths can be selected together with a range of modulations from QPSK to 256 QAM. With RFU-C, traffic capacity throughput and spectral efficiency are optimized with the desired channel bandwidth. For maximum user choice flexibility, channel bandwidths can be selected together with a range of modulations from QPSK to 256 QAM over 3.5-56 MHz channel bandwidth. When RFU-C operates in co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) mode using XPIC, two carrier signals can be transmitted over a single channel, using vertical and horizontal polarization. This enables double capacity in the same spectrum bandwidth. 7.3.1 Main Features of RFU-C Frequency range Operates in the frequency range 6 42 GHz Frequency accuracy 4 ppm 16
More power in a smaller package - Up to 24 dBm for extended distance, enhanced availability, use of smaller antennas Configurable Modulation QPSK 256 QAM Configurable Channel Bandwidth 3.5 MHz 56MHz Compact, lightweight form factor - Reduces installation and warehousing costs Supported configurations 17 : 1+0 direct and remote mount 1+1 direct and remote mount 2+0 direct and remote mount 2+2 remote mount 4+0 remote mount Efficient and easy installation - Direct mount installation with different antenna types
16 Over temperature. 17 Remote mount configuration is not supported for 42 GHz. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 217 of 403 7.3.2 RFU-C Frequency Bands Frequency Band TX Range RX Range Tx/Rx Spacing 6L GHz 6332.5-6393 5972-6093 300A 5972-6093 6332.5-6393 6191.5-6306.5 5925.5-6040.5 266A 5925.5-6040.5 6191.5-6306.5 6303.5-6418.5 6037.5-6152.5 6037.5-6152.5 6303.5-6418.5 6245-6290.5 5939.5-6030.5 260A 5939.5-6030.5 6245-6290.5 6365-6410.5 6059.5-6150.5 6059.5-6150.5 6365-6410.5 6226.89-6286.865 5914.875-6034.825 252B 5914.875-6034.825 6226.89-6286.865 6345.49-6405.465 6033.475-6153.425 6033.475-6153.425 6345.49-6405.465 6181.74-6301.69 5929.7-6049.65 252A 5929.7-6049.65 6181.74-6301.69 6241.04-6360.99 5989-6108.95 5989-6108.95 6241.04-6360.99 6300.34-6420.29 6048.3-6168.25 6048.3-6168.25 6300.34-6420.29 6235-6290.5 5939.5-6050.5 240A 5939.5-6050.5 6235-6290.5 6355-6410.5 6059.5-6170.5 6059.5-6170.5 6355-6410.5 6H GHz 6924.5-7075.5 6424.5-6575.5 500 6424.5-6575.5 6924.5-7075.5 7032.5-7091.5 6692.5-6751.5 340C 6692.5-6751.5 7032.5-7091.5 6764.5-6915.5 6424.5-6575.5 340B 6424.5-6575.5 6764.5-6915.5 6924.5-7075.5 6584.5-6735.5 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 218 of 403 Frequency Band TX Range RX Range Tx/Rx Spacing 6584.5-6735.5 6924.5-7075.5 6781-6939 6441-6599 340A 6441-6599 6781-6939 6941-7099 6601-6759 6601-6759 6941-7099 6707.5-6772.5 6537.5-6612.5 160A 6537.5-6612.5 6707.5-6772.5 6767.5-6832.5 6607.5-6672.5 6607.5-6672.5 6767.5-6832.5 6827.5-6872.5 6667.5-6712.5 6667.5-6712.5 6827.5-6872.5 7 GHz 7783.5-7898.5 7538.5-7653.5 7538.5-7653.5 7783.5-7898.5 7301.5-7388.5 7105.5-7192.5 196A 7105.5-7192.5 7301.5-7388.5 7357.5-7444.5 7161.5-7248.5 7161.5-7248.5 7357.5-7444.5 7440.5-7499.5 7622.5-7681.5
18 42GHz support is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 228 of 403 7.3.3 RFU-C Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU-C Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU-C Height: 200 mm Width: 200 mm Depth: 85 mm Weight: 4kg/9 lbs RFU-Antenna Connection Direct mount or remote using the same antenna type Remote mount: Standard flexible waveguide (frequency dependent) IDU-RFU Connection Coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male) Polarization Vertical or Horizontal Standard Mounting OD Pole 50 mm-120 mm/2-4.5 (subject to vendor and antenna size) Operating Range -40.5 to -72 VDC Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class T1.2, with a temperature range of -25C to+85C. Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3, with a temperature range of -40C to+85C. Power Consumption RFU-C 6-26 GHz 1+0: 22W 1+1: 39W Power Consumption RFU-C 28-42 GHz 1+0: 26W 1+1: 43W Operating Temperature Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Relative Humidity 5% to 100%
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 229 of 403 7.3.4 RFU-C Mediation Device Losses RFU-C Mediation Device Losses Notes: The antenna interface is always the RFU-C interface. If other antennas are to be used, an adaptor with a 0.1 dB loss should be considered. 7.3.5 RFU-C Antenna Connection RFU-C uses Andrew, RFS, Xian Putian, Radio Wave, GD and Shenglu antennas. RFU-C can be mounted directly for all frequencies (6-42 GHz) using the following antenna types (for integrated antennas, specific antennas PNs are required): Andrew: VHLP series GD Radio Wave Xian Putian: WTG series Shenglu For remote mount installations, the following flexible waveguide flanges should be used (millimetric). The same antenna type (integrated) as indicated above can be used (recommended). Other antenna types using the flanges listed in the table below may be used.
19 42GHz RFU-C is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. Configuration Interfaces 6-8 GHz 11 GHz 13-15 GHz 18-26 GHz 28-42 19
GHz Flex WG Remote Mount antenna Added on remote mount configurations 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 1+0 DirectMount Integrated antenna 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.5 1+1 HSB Direct Mount Main Path 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.8 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary Path 6 6 6 6 6 2+0 DP (OMT) Direct Mount Integrated antenna 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 2+2 HSB (OMT) Remote Mount Main Path 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.1 2.1 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary Path 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 2+0/1+1 FD SP Integrated antenna 3.8 3.8 3.9 4 4 4+0 DP (OMT) Remote Mount 4.2 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 230 of 403 7.3.6 RFU-C Waveguide Flanges RFU-C Waveguide Flanges Frequency (GHz) Waveguide Standard Waveguide Flange Antenna Flange 6 WR137 PDR70 UDR70 7/8 WR112 PBR84 UBR84 10/11 WR90 PBR100 UBR100 13 WR75 PBR120 UBR120 15 WR62 PBR140 UBR140 18-26 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 28-38 WR28 PBR320 UBR320 42 20 WR22 UG383/U UG383/U If a different antenna type (CPR flange) is used, a flange adaptor is required. Please contact your Ceragon representative for details. For RFU-C transmit power specifications: RFU-C Transmit Power (dBm) For FRU-C receiver threshold specifications: RFU-C Receiver Threshold (RSL)
(dBm @ BER = 10-6)
20 42GHz RFU-C is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 231 of 403 7.4 1500HP/RFU-HP FibeAir 1500HP and RFU-HP are high transmit power RFUs designed for long haul applications with multiple carrier traffic. Together with their unique branching design, 1500HP/RFU-HP can chain up to five carriers per single antenna port and 10 carriers for dual port, making them ideal for Trunk or Multi Carrier applications. The 1500HP/RFU-HP can be installed in either indoor or outdoor configurations. The field-proven 1500HP/RFU-HP was designed to enable high quality wireless communication in the most cost-effective manner. With tens of thousands of units deployed worldwide, the 1500HP/RFU-HP serves mobile operators enabling them to reach over longer distances while enabling the use of smaller antennas. The RFU-HP also includes a power-saving feature (green mode) that enables the microwave system to automatically detect when link conditions allow it to use less power. 1500HP and RFU-HP 1RX support Space Diversity via Baseband Switching in the IDU (BBS). 1500HP 2RX, supports Space Diversity through IF Combining (IFC). Both types of Space Diversity are valid solutions to deal with the presence of multipath. Notes: 1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, Space Diversity is only available via BBS. 1500HP/RFU-HP is compatible with IP-10G hardware releases R2 and R3. It cannot be used with R1. 7.4.1 Main Features of 1500HP/RFU-HP 21
Frequency range 1500HP 2RX: 6-11GHz 1500HP 1RX: 6-11GHz RFU-HP: 6-8GHz Frequency accuracy 4 ppm 22
Frequency source Synthesizer Installation type Split mount remote mount, all indoor (No direct mount) Diversity Optional innovative IF Combining Space Diversity for improved system gain (for 1500HP) 23 , as well as BBS Space Diversity (all models) High transmit power Up to 33dBm in all indoor and split mount installations
21 For guidance on the differences between 1500HP and RFU-HP, refer to RFU Selection Guide on page 215. 22 Over temperature. 23 1500 HP (11 GHz ) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only available via BBS. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 232 of 403 Configurable Modulation QPSK 256 QAM Configurable Channel Bandwidth 1500HP 2RX (6-11GHz): 10-30MHz 1500HP 1RX (6-11GHz): 10-30MHz 1500HP 1RX (11GHz wide): 24-40MHz RFU-HP 1RX (6-8GHz): 3.5-56MHz System Configurations Non-Protected (1+0), Protected (1+1), Space Diversity, 2+0/2+2 XPIC, N+0, N+1 Variety of interfaces for TDM and IP XPIC and CCDP Built-in XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) and Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) feature for double transmission capacity, and more bandwidth efficiency Power Saving Mode option - Enables the microwave system to automatically detect when link conditions allow it to use less power (for RFU-HP) Tx Range (Manual/ATPC) Up to 20dB dynamic range ATPC (Automatic Tx Power Control) RF Channel Selection Via EMS/NMS NEBS Level 3 NEBS compliance FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 233 of 403 7.4.2 1500HP/RFU-HP Frequency Bands The frequency band of each radio is listed in the following table.
Frequency Band Frequency Range (GHz) Channel Bandwidth L6 GHz 5.925 to 6.425 29.65/56MHz U6 GHz 6.425 to 7.100 20 MHz to 40/56 /60 MHz 7 GHz 7.425 to 7.900 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz 7.425 to 7.725 28/56 MHz 7.110 to 7.750 28/56 MHz 8 GHz 7.725 to 8.275 29.65 MHz 8.275 to 8.500 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz 7.900 to 8.400 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz 11 GHz 10.700 to 11.700 10 MHz to 40/56 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 234 of 403 7.4.3 1500HP/RFU-HP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications 1500HP/RFU-HP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications Transceiver (RFU) Dimensions Height: 490 mm (19) Width: 144 mm (6) Depth: 280 mm (11) Weight: 7 kg (15 lbs) (excluding Branching) OCB Branching (Split Mount and Compact All-Indoor ) Height: 420 mm (19) Width: 110 mm (6) Depth: 380 mm (11) Weight: 7 kg (15 lbs) (excluding Branching) Recommended torque for RFU-OCB connection: 17 Nm IDU-RFU Connection Coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male) RFU Power Consumption Split Mount (29dBm): 80W All indoor (32dBm) : 100W Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class T1.2, with a temperature range of -25C to+85C. Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3, with a temperature range of -40C to+85C. Power Supply -40.5 to -72 VDC Operating Temperature Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Relative Humidity 5% to 100% For additional information: Power Consumption with RFU-HP in Power Saving Mode FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 235 of 403 7.4.4 1500HP/RFU-HP Functional Block Diagram and Concept of Operation The RFU handles RF signal processing. The RFU encompasses the RF transmitter and receiver with all their related functions. The 1500HP/RFU-HP product line was designed to answer the need for a high power RF module together with IF combining functionality and the ability to concatenate several carriers with minimal RF branching loss. This section briefly describes the basic block diagrams for the various types of RFUs included in the 1500HP/RFU-HP product line. Figure 1: 1500HP 2RX in 1+0 SD Configuration Q u a d p l e x e r PSU IDU (Ntype conn.) XPIC source sharing \ RSL ind. (TNC conn.) IF & controller Board Antenna main Controller and peripherals Chassis 350MHz 140MHz Pre- Amp LNA RX Main RX C o n n e c t o r DC / CTRL IF TX chain VCO VCO PA RX chain C o n n e c t o r FSK -48V OCB XPIC SW R F
L P B K RX Diversity LNA RX chain combiner TX diplexer TCXO XLO 10M TX RX Antenna Diversity RX TX Board Extention port
Figure 2: 1500HP 1RX in 1+0 SD Configuration Q u a d p l e x e r PSU IDU (Ntype conn.) XPIC source sharing \ RSL ind. (TNC conn.) IF & controller Board Antenna main Controller and peripherals Chassis 350MHz 140MHz FMM LNA RX Main RX Board C o n n e c t o r DC / CTRL IF TX chain VCO VCO FLM RX chain C o n n e c t o r FSK -48V OCB XPIC SW R F
L P B K TX diplexer TXCO XLO 10M TX RX TX Board Extention port
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 236 of 403 Figure 3: RFU-HP 1RX in 1+0 SD Configuration XPIC source sharing \ RSL ind. (TNC conn.) Antenna main OCB TX RX Extention port Q u a d p l e x e r PSU section I D U
( B M A
c o n n . ) X P I C
s o u r c e
s h a r i n g
\
R S L
i n d . ( B M A
c o n n . ) PSC Controller and peripherals Chassis 350MHz 140MHz Pre- Amp LNA TRX C o n n e c t o r DC / CTRL IF TX chain VCO VCO PA RX chain C o n n e c t o r FSK -48V XPIC SW R F
L P B K RX RFIC TX RFIC diplexer 40M XLO 40M
Each of these RFU types must be connected to an OCB (Outdoor Circulator Block) which serves as both a narrow diplexer and a mediation device to facilitate antenna connection. For additional information: 1500HP/RFU-HP OCBs FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 237 of 403 7.4.5 1500HP/RFU-HP Comparison Table The following table summarizes the differences between the 1500HP 2RX and 1RX and the RFU-HP. 1500HP/RFU-HP Comparison Table Feature 1500HP 2RX 1500HP 1RX RFU-HP 1RX Notes Frequency Bands Support 6L,6H,7,8,11GHz 6L,6H,7,8,11GHz 6L,6H,7,8GHz 3.5MHz 56 MHz -- -- 10 MHz 30 MHz 40MHz -- ** ** 11GHz only supports 24- 40MHz channels only Split-Mount All are compatible with OCBs from both generations All-Indoor All are compatible with ICBs Space Diversity BBS and IFC 24 BBS BBS IFC - IF Combining BBS - Base Band Switching Frequency Diversity 1+0/2+0/1+1/2+2 N+1 N+0 ( N>2) High Power Only the RFU-HP has the same power for split mount and all indoor installation. Refer to 1500HP/RFU- HP Models and Part Numbers on page 261. Direct Mount Antenna -- -- -- Power Saving Mode -- -- Power consumption changes with TX power
Note that the main differences between the 1500HP 1RX and RFU-HP 1RX are: RFU-HP offers higher TX power for split mount The RFU-HP 1RX offers full support for 3.5M-56MHz channels. The RFU-HP 1RX supports the green-mode feature Both systems are fully compatible with all OCB and ICB devices.
24 1500 HP (11 GHz ) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only available via BBS. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 238 of 403 7.4.6 1500HP/RFU-HP System Configurations 7.4.6.1 Split Mount and All indoor The 1500HP/RFU-HP radios can be installed either in split mount or in all indoor configurations. The following configurations are applicable for Split-Mount or all indoor installations: Unprotected N+0 - 1+0 to 10+0 Data is transmitted through N channels, without redundancy (protection) Hot Standby - 1+1 HSB, 2+2 HSB Two RFUs use the same RF channel connected via a coupler. One channel transmits (Active) and the other acts as a backup (Standby). A 2+2 HSB configuration uses two RFUs which are chained using two frequencies and connected via a coupler to the other pair of RFUs. N+1 Frequency Diversity - N+1 (1+1 to 9+1) Data is transmitted through N channels and an additional (+1) frequency channel, which protects the N channels. If failure or signal degradation occurs in one of the N channels, the +1 channel carries the data of the affected N carrier. Additional configurations, such as 14+2, can be achieved using two racks. Notes: Space Diversity can be used in each of the configurations. When using BBS for SD (1500HP 1RX/RFU-HP), ACM is not supported. When the 1500HP/RFU-HP is mounted in a Split-Mount configuration, up to five RFUs can be chained on one pole mount (the total is ten RFUs for a dual pole antenna). When the 1500HP/RFU-HP is installed in an All Indoor configuration, there are several installation options: In ETSI rack up to ten radio carriers per rack In 19 open rack up to five radio carriers per subrack Compact assembly up to two radio carriers in horizontal placement (without a subrack) Two types of branching options are available for all indoor configurations: Using ICBs Vertical assembly, up to 10 carriers per rack (five carriers per subrack) Using OCBs Compact horizontal assembly, up to 2 carriers per subrack 7.4.7 1500HP/RFU-HP Space Diversity Support In long distance wireless links, multipath phenomenon commonly exist, whereby fading occurs over time, space, and frequency. The 1500HP RFU provides two types of Space Diversity optimizations, which are ideal solutions for the multipath phenomenon: IF Combining (IFC) BBS (Base Band Switching) The RFU-HP supports BBS Space Diversity, but not IFC. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 239 of 403 Space Diversity with Multiple RFUs Space Diversity with Single RFU
7.4.7.1 IF Combining (IFC) Mechanism FibeAir 1500HP includes an IF combining mechanism, which uses an innovative digital optimization algorithm to combine the signals received from both antennas in order to improve signal quality. When distortion occurs, it is measured in both receiver paths, and a new combined signal is produced. This can improve the system gain by up to 3 dB. IFC Space Diversity can be used with single and multiple RFUs. A delay calibration for the diversity waveguide is required and is performed automatically via the NMS. Each 1500HP has built-in IFC Space Diversity functionality, with one transmitter and two receivers. The receivers receive two different signals from two antennas, which are installed 10-20 meters apart. There are two options for connecting the RFUs to the diversity antennas: Waveguide to coaxial cable Uses a waveguide adaptor (CPR type) connected to an N-type coaxial cable. This is the default option. Elliptical waveguide Uses a waveguide connector (CPR type) with an elliptical waveguide. 7.4.7.2 Baseband Switching (BBS) Both FibeAir 1500HP and FibeAir RFU-HP support BBS Space Diversity. In this option, there are two RFUs instead of a single RFU with two receivers. The actual BBS Space Diversity switching is performed in the IDU. The modem switches to the other RF signal when interference occurs, and returns to the main signal when the interference is gone. In this way, the system performs optimum signal receiving by using the signal that provides the best performance. Note: When using BBS for SD (1500HP 1RX/RFU-HP), ACM is not supported FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 240 of 403 7.4.8 Split Mount Configuration and Branching Network For multiple carriers, up to five carriers can be cascaded and circulated together to the antenna port. Branching networks are the units which perform this function and route the signals from the RFUs to the antenna. The branching network can contain multiple OCBs or ICBs. When using a Split-Mount or All-Indoor compact (horizontal) configuration, the OCB branching network is used. When using an All-Indoor vertical configuration, the ICB branching network is used. The main differences in branching concept between the OCB and the ICB relate to how the signals are circulated. OCB The Tx and the Rx path circulate together to the main OCB port. When chaining multiple OCBs, each Tx signal is chained to the OCB Rx signal and so on (uses S-bend section). For more details, refer to 1500HP/RFU-HP OCBs on page 241. ICB All the Tx signals are chained together to one Tx port (at the ICC) and all the Rx signals are chained together to one Rx port (at the ICC). The ICC circulates all the Tx and the Rx signals to one antenna port. For more information, refer to Indoor Circulator Block (ICB) on page 248. All-Indoor Vertical Branching Split-Mount Branching and All-Indoor Compact
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 241 of 403 7.4.8.1 1500HP/RFU-HP OCBs The OCB (Outdoor Circulator Block) has the following main purposes: Hosts the circulators and the attached filters. Routes the RF signal in the correct direction, through the filters and circulators. Enables RFU connection to the Main and Diversity antennas. FibeAir 1500HP and RFU-HP supports two types of OCBs: OCB (Older Type) New OCB Old OCB New OCB
7.4.8.2 Old OCB The Older Type OCB has two types, Type 1 and Type 2. The difference between the two types is the circulator direction. Depending on the configuration, OCB Type 1 or Type2 is used together with waveguide shorts, loads, U Bends, or couplers. Each OCB has four waveguide access points: two in the front, and two at the rear. The diversity access point is optional. If the system is not configured for diversity, all the relevant access points on the OCB must be terminated using waveguide shorts. The two OCB types (with and without IFC Space Diversity) have different part numbers. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 242 of 403 The following block diagrams show the difference between the two OCBs and the additional Diversity Circ block which is added in some diversity configurations. Old OCB Type 1
Old OCB Type 1 and Type 2 Description
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 243 of 403 7.4.8.3 New OCB The new OCB is optimized for configurations that do not use IFC Space Diversity. To support IFC Space Diversity, a diversity block is added. The new OCB has only one type, and can be connected to an antenna via a flexible waveguide. The new OCB connection is at the rear of the OCB. It includes proprietary accessories (different than those used for the older OCB). Each OCB has three waveguide access points: The In/Out port is located at the rear of the OCB. The OCB ports include: Tx port Rx Port Diversity port If the system is not configured for diversity, all the relevant access points on the OCB must be terminated using waveguide shorts. Unused Rx ports are terminated with a 50 ohm termination. New OCB and DCB Block Diagram
New OCB components include the following: RF Filters RF Filters are used for specific frequency channels and Tx/Rx separation. The filters are attached to the OCB, and each RFU contains one Rx and one Tx filter. In an IFC Space Diversity configuration, each RFU contains two Rx filters (which combine the IF signals) and one Tx filter. The filters can be replaced without removing the OCB. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 244 of 403 DCB (Diversity Circulator Block) THE DCB is an external block which is added in IFC Space Diversity configurations. The DCB is connected to the diversity port and can chain two OCBs. Coupler Kit The coupler kit is used for 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) configurations. U Bend The U Bend connects the chained DCB (Diversity Circulator Block) in N+1/N+0 configurations. S Bend The S Bend connects the chained OCB (Outdoor Circulator Block) in N+1 /N+ 0 configurations. Pole Mount Kit The Pole Mount Kit can fasten up to five OCBs and the RFUs to the pole. The kit enables fast and easy pole mount installation. 7.4.8.4 New OCB Component Summary New OCB Component Summary Component Name Marketing Model Marketing Description Picture DCB DCBf DCB Diversity Block f GHz kit
Note: f= 6L, 6H, 7, 8, 11 GHz FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 245 of 403 7.4.9 Split-Mount Branching Loss When designing a link budget calculation, the branching loss (dB) should be considered as per specific configuration. This section contains tables that list the branching loss for the following Split-Mount configurations. Interfaces 1+0 1+1 FD/ 2+0 2+1 3+0 3+1 4+0 4+1 5+0 5+1 6+0 6+1 7+0 7+1 8+0 8+1 9+0 9+1 10+0 CCDP with DP Antenna 0 (1c) 0 (1c) 0.5 (2c) 0.5 (2c) 1.0 (3c) 1.0 (3c) 1.5 (4c) 1.5 (4c) 2 (5c) 2 (6c) SP Non-adjacent Channels 0 (1c) 0.5 (2c) 1.0 (3c) 1.5 (4c) 2.0 (5c) NA NA NA NA NA Notes: (c) Radio Carrier CCDP Co-channel dual polarization SP Single pole antenna DP Dual pole antenna In addition, the following losses will be added when using these items:
Item Where to Use Loss (dB) Flex WG All configurations 0.5 15m Coax cable Diversity path 6-8/11 GHz 5/6.5 Symmetrical Coupler Adjacent channel configuration. 3.5 Asymmetrical coupler 1+1 HSB configurations Main: 1.6 Coupled: 6.5 7.4.9.1 Upgrade Procedure The following components need to be added when upgrading from a 1+0 to an N+1 Split-Mount configuration: OCBs RFUs IDU/IDMs Flexible waveguides When adding RF channels or carriers, RFUs and OCBs with specific filters need to be added as well. The OCBs are chained together using couplers (for the same frequency) or U bends/S bends (for different frequencies), in accordance with the specific configuration. Open ports on the OCBs are terminated with 50 ohm terminations. Detailed upgrade procedure documents are available for specific configurations. Please note that legacy OCBs can be upgraded and cascaded with the new OCB. Please contact your Ceragon representative for details. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 246 of 403 7.4.10 1500HP/RFU-HP All Indoor Configurations and Branching Network All-Indoor configurations are when all the equipment is installed indoors (room, shelter) and an elliptical waveguide connects the radio output port from the room to the antenna. A basic block diagram for a trunk system, including the main blocks, is shown in the following figure. The block diagram includes marked interface points which shall serve as reference points for several technical parameters used in this document. Block Diagram of Trunk System
All-Indoor System with Five IP-10 Carriers
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 247 of 403 All-Indoor System with Ten IP-10 Carriers
The branching concept (as described in Split Mount Configuration and Branching Network on page 240) is similar to All-Indoor application. When using All-Indoor configurations, there are two types of branching implementations: Using ICBs Vertical assembly, up to 10 carriers per rack (five carriers per subrack). Using NEW OCBs Compact horizontal assembly, up to two carriers per subrack. All-Indoor Installations
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 248 of 403 7.4.10.1 RFU Subrack Components Subrack for ETSI Rack
Subrack The subrack hosts all the RFU components and connections, as shown in the previous figure. The subrack includes up to five RFUs per subrack (each RFU connects to an ICB). RFU with Branching
Indoor Circulator Block (ICB) Each RFU is connected to one ICB, and several ICBs are chained to each other. The chained ICBs carry different RF channels and are connected to a single ICC, which sums the RF signals. The main ICB functions include: FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 249 of 403 Hosts the circulators and filters. Routes the RF signals in the correct direction, via the filters and circulators. The ICB is a modular standalone unit. When system expansion is necessary, additional ICBs are added and chained with the existing ICBs. The branching chain to neighbor ICB goes through the holes at the side. A long screw connects the ICBs to each other and the last ICB at the chain is terminated with a 50ohm termination, as shown below. Note: The diversity port does not need to be terminated if the diversity filter is not attached to the ICB. ICB Branching Chain
RF Filters The RF Filters are used for specific frequency channels and Tx/Rx separation. The filters are attached to the ICB, and each RFU contains one Rx and one Tx filter. In an IFC Space Diversity configuration, each RFU contains two Rx filters to combine the IF signals, along with one Tx filter. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 250 of 403 Indoor Combiner Circulator (ICC) The ICC does not perform space diversity ICB summing (single output port). ICC
The ICC sums the Rx and Tx signals and combines the N channels to the output ports (one or two, in accordance with the configuration). Indoor Combiner Circulator Diversity (ICCD) The ICCD performs space diversity ICB summing (two output ports). ICCD
Patch Panel The ICBs IF and XPIC cables are connected to the patch panel. The IDUs IF cables are connected to the specific RFU location. An XPIC cable is used between two RFUs which are using the same Tx and Rx filters with different polarizations (V and H). FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 251 of 403 Fan Tray The fan tray contains eight controlled and monitored fans, which cool the RFU heat dissipations. The fan tray is a tray which is part of ETSI rack (as shown above), while when using a 19 frame rack a fan tray is a separate unit which must be assembled separately (shown below). Fan Tray in 19 Frame Rack
Rigid Waveguides - T12, T13 and T14 Rigid waveguide sections are assembled in the rack to connect the ICC/ICCD from the bottom to the top of the rack (C). The specific Rigid WG sections to be used depend on the configuration. T12 Rigid Waveguide T13 Rigid Waveguide
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 252 of 403 7.4.10.2 All-Indoor Configuration Example In this configuration, three ICBs are chained together and connected to a vertical ICC, and two ICBs are chained together and connected to a horizontal ICC polarization. The RF components include: Five RFUs Five ICBs Two ICCs 4+1 XPIC Assembly Configuration
Additional Assembly Configuration Examples
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 253 of 403 7.4.10.3 All-Indoor Rack Types Three types of racks can be used in an all-indoor configuration: 19 lab rack ( open frame ) 19 rack ETSI rack The 19 rack is not commonly used in Ceragon configurations. The 19 lab rack (open frame) contains a subrack that is preassembled at the factory and then shipped. The customer can also use an existing rack and the subrack is installed separately at the site. 7.4.10.4 Rack Type Examples Lab Rack (Open Frame) Examples
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 254 of 403 19 Rack Example
ETSI Rack Example
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 255 of 403 When a configuration includes more than ten carriers, two racks are assembled and connected. Configuration with More than Ten Carriers Two Connected Racks
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 256 of 403 7.4.10.5 All-Indoor Branching Loss ICC has a 0 dB loss, since the RFU is calibrated to Pmax, together with the filter and 1+0 branching loss. The following table presents the branching loss per configuration and the Elliptical wave guide (WG) losses per meter which will be add for each installation (dependant on the WG length). Configuration Interfaces 1+0 1+1 FD 2+0 2+1 3+0 3+1 4+0 4+1 5+0 All-Indoor WG losses per 100m 6L 4 6H 4.5 7/8GHz 6 11GHz 10 Symmetrical Coupler Added to adjacent channel configuration 3 CCDP with DP antenna Tx and Rx 0.3 (1c) 0.3 (1c) 0.7 (2c) 0.7 (2c) 1.1 (3c) Diversity RX 0.2 (1c) 0.2 (1c) 0.6 (2c) 0.6 (2c) 1.0 (3c) SP Non adjacent channels Tx and Rx 0.3 (1c) 0.7 (2c) 1.1 (3c) 1.5 (4c) 1.9 (5c) Diversity RX 0.2 (1c) 0.6 (2c) 1.0 (3c) 1.4 (4c) 1.8 (5c) CCDP with DP antenna Upgrade Ready Tx and Rx 0.3 (1c) 0.7 (1c) 1.1 (2c) 1.1 (2c) 1.5 (3c) Diversity RX 0.2 (1c) 0.6 (1c) 1.0 (2c) 1.0 (2c) 1.4 (3c) Configuration Interfaces 5+1 6+0 6+1 7+0 7+1 8+0 8+1 9+0 9+1 10+0 All-Indoor WG losses per 100m 6L 4 6H 4.5 7/8GHz 6 11GHz 10 Symmetrical Coupler Added to adjacent channel configuration 3 CCDP with DP antenna Tx and Rx 1.5 (3c) 1.9 (4c) 1.9 (4c) 2.3 (5c) 2.3 (6c) Diversity RX 1.4 (3c) 1.8 (4c) 1.8 (4c) 2.2 (5c) 2.2 (6c) SP Non adjacent channels Tx and Rx NA NA NA NA NA Diversity RX CCDP with DP antenna Upgrade Ready Tx and Rx 1.5 (3c) 1.9 (4c) 1.9 (4c) 2.3 (5c) 2.3 (6c) Diversity RX 1.4 (3c) 1.8 (4c) 1.8 (4c) 2.2 (5c) 2.2 (6c)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 257 of 403 7.4.11 1500HP/RFU-HP All Indoor Compact (Horizontal) For minimal rack space usage, an All-Indoor configuration can be installed in horizontal position using the new OCB in a 19 rack or ETSI open rack/ frame rack. The New OCB is compliant with NEBS GR-1089-CORE, GR-63-CORE standards. Note: This installation type and configuration does not require a fan tray. This installation type is compatible with the following RFUs PN: Non Space Diversity All-Indoor 15HPA-1R-RFU-f 15HPA-2R-RFU-f 15HPA-1R-RFU-11w 1500HP RFU All-Indoor 1Rx RF Unit
1500HP RFU All-Indoor Space Diversity
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 258 of 403 1500HP RFU All-Indoor 1Rx RF Unit, 11G 40MHz
Main Configurations 1+0 1+0 East West 1+1 1+1 East West 1+1 HSB Compact Front View
1+1 HSB Compact Rear View
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 259 of 403 7.4.11.1 All-Indoor Compact (Horizontal) Placements Components The following table lists the components for All-Indoor compact placements: All-Indoor Compact Placement Components Component Name Marketing Model Marketing Description Picture DCB DCBf DCB Diversity Block f GHz kit
CPLR OCB-CPLR-f OCB Coupler f GHz
SBend OCB-SBend OCB SBend Connection f GHz
Rack Adapter OCB 19 Rack Adapt OCB-Pole Mount
Rack Adapter OCB ETSI Rack Adapt OCB-Pole Mount
Note: f= 6L, 6H, 7, 8, 11 GHz 7.4.11.2 Power Distribution Unit (PDU) The PDU distributes the power supply (-48V) from the main power input to the relevant IDU. The PDU is preassembled and wired in an ETSI rack and is provided separately, when required, for a 19 lab rack. When ordering a 19 configuration, there are two rack assembly options: 19 lab rack provided separately 19 lab rack provided by the customer For both options, a PDU for 19 can be provided upon request. There are two types of PDU. The default PDU which has been assembled with each ETSI rack contains: Two main switches one for each five IDU carriers Two FAN tray switches
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 260 of 403 1A. The default PDU which is assembled with the ETSI rack has a special addition of a plastic cover. For special cases, when PDU protection is required, a PDU with plastic protection cover can be provided. The PN for this PDU with protection cover is: 32T-PDU_CVR.
A PDU which distributes 10 x DC signals, the PDU type can be preassembled with an ETSI Rack and needs to be specially ordered because it is not the default PDU. PDU with 10 Switches PN: 32T-PDU10
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 261 of 403 7.4.12 1500HP/RFU-HP Models and Part Numbers The following table lists and describes the available 1500HP/RFU-HP models. RFU Models Marketing Model Description 15HP-RFU-7 1500HP 7G 2RX SM / All Indoor 15HP-RFU-8 1500HP 8G 2RX SM / All Indoor 15HP-RFU-6L 1500HP 6LG 2RX SM / All Indoor 15HP-RFU-6H 1500HP 6HG 2RX SM / All Indoor 15HP-RFU-11 1500HP 11G 2RX SM / All Indoor
15HPS-1R-RFU-7 1500HP 7G 1RX SM 15HPS-1R-RFU-8 1500HP 8G 1RX SM 15HPS-1R-RFU-6L 1500HP 6LG 1RX SM 15HPS-1R-RFU-6H 1500HP 6HG 1RX SM 15HPS-1R-RFU-11 1500HP 11G 1RX SM 15HPS-1R-RFU-11w 1500HP 11G 1RX SM 40M (24-40MHz channels)
15HPA-1R-RFU-7 1500HP 7G 1RX All Indoor 15HPA-1R-RFU-8 1500HP 8G 1RX All Indoor 15HPA-1R-RFU-6L 1500HP 6LG 1RX All Indoor 15HPA-1R-RFU-6H 1500HP 6HG 1RX All Indoor 15HPA-1R-RFU-11 1500HP 11G 1RX All Indoor
15HPA-2R-RFU-7 1500HP 7G 2RX All Indoor 15HPA-2R-RFU-8 1500HP 8G 2RX All Indoor 15HPA-2R-RFU-6L 1500HP 6LG 2RX All Indoor 15HPA-2R-RFU-6H 1500HP 6HG 2RX All Indoor 15HPA-2R-RFU-11 1500HP 11G 2RX All Indoor
RFU-HP-1R-6H RFU-HP 6HG 1Rx up to 56M SM / All Indoor RFU-HP-1R-6L RFU-HP 6LG 1Rx up to 56M SM / All Indoor RFU-HP-1R-7 RFU-HP 7G 1Rx up to 56M SM / All Indoor RFU-HP-1R-8 RFU-HP 8G 1Rx up to 56M SM / All Indoor FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 262 of 403 7.4.13 OCB Part Numbers The following table presents the various RFU options and the configurations in which they are used. OCB Part Numbers Diversity/Non-Diversity Split-Mount Space Diversity IFC (2Rx) (6, 7, 8 ,11GHz) 15OCBf-SD-xxxy-ZZZ-H/L Non Space Diversity (1Rx) (6, 7, 8GHz) 15OCBf-xxxy-ZZ-H/L 11GHz Non Space Diversity (1Rx) 25 15OCB11w-xxxy-ZZ-H/L OCB Part Numbers for All Indoor Compact Diversity/Non-Diversity All Indoor Compact Space Diversity IFC (2Rx) (6, 7,8 GHz) 15OCBf-SD-xxxy-ZZ-H/L Space Diversity IFC (2Rx) (11GHz) 15OCB11w-SD-xxxy-ZZ-H/L Non Space Diversity (1Rx) (6, 7,8GHz) 15OCBf-xxxy-ZZ-H/L 11GHz Non Space Diversity (1Rx) 26 15OCB11w-xxxy-ZZ-H/L 7.4.13.1 OCB Part Number Format
Place Holder in Marketing Model Possible Values Description and Remarks f 6L,6H,7,8,11 xxx 000-999 [MHz] TRS in MHz Y AZ Ceragon TRS block designation ZZZ Examples: 1W3 Wide filters covering channels 1-3 03 Only channel 03, 28MHz channel 3-5 56MHz Narrow filters allowing concatenation using OCBs covering channels 3 and 4. Designation of the channels the OCB is covering H/L H or L Designating TX High and TX low
25 11GHz OCB is a wide BW OCB which supports up to 40MHz, while the other OCBs (6L, 6H, 7, 8GHz) support up to 30MHz. 26 11GHz OCB is a wide BW OCB which supports up to 40MHz, while the other OCBs (6L, 6H, 7, 8GHz) support up to 30MHz. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 263 of 403 7.4.14 Generic All-Indoor Configurations Part Numbers The following tables contain a list of typical All-Indoor configurations. All-Indoor Configurations (1+0 /1+1 HSB) 1+0 / 1+1 HSB 32T-f_1+0 3200T-f_1+0 32T-f_1+0_EW 3200T-f_1+0_East West 32T-f_1+0_SD 3200T-f_1+0_Space Diversity 32T-f_1+0_SD_EW 3200T-f_1+0_Space Diversity East West 32T-f_1+1_HSB 3200T-f_1+1_HSB 32T-f_1+1_HSB_EW 3200T-f_1+1_HSB_East West 32T-f_1+1_HSB_SD 3200T-f_1+1_HSB_Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1_HSB_SD_EW 3200T-f_1+1_HSB_Space Diversity East West All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC) N+0 / N+1 XPIC 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X 3200T-f_1+1/2+0 XPIC 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X 3200T-f_2+1/3+0 XPIC 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X 3200T-f_3+1/4+0 XPIC 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X 3200T-f_4+1/5+0 XPIC 32T-f_5+1/6+0_X 3200T-f_5+1/6+0 XPIC 32T-f_6+1/7+0_X 3200T-f_6+1/7+0 XPIC 32T-f_7+1/8+0_X 3200T-f_7+1/8+0 XPIC 32T-f_8+1/9+0_X 3200T-f_8+1/9+0 XPIC 32T-f_9+1/10+0_X 3200T-f_9+1/10+0 XPIC FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 264 of 403 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity) N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X _SD 3200T-f_1+1/2+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X _SD 3200T-f_2+1/3+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_SD 3200T-f_3+1/4+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_SD 3200T-f_4+1/5+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_5+1/6+0_X_SD 3200T-f_5+1/6+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_6+1/7+0_X_SD 3200T-f_6+1/7+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_7+1/8+0_X_SD 3200T-f_7+1/8+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_8+1/9+0_X_SD 3200T-f_8+1/9+0 XPIC Space Diversity All-Indoor Configurations (N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity) N+0 / N+1 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X _SD 3200T-f_1+1/2+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X _SD 3200T-f_2+1/3+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_SD 3200T-f_3+1/4+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_SD 3200T-f_4+1/5+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_5+1/6+0_X_SD 3200T-f_5+1/6+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_6+1/7+0_X_SD 3200T-f_6+1/7+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_7+1/8+0_X_SD 3200T-f_7+1/8+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_8+1/9+0_X_SD 3200T-f_8+1/9+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_9+1/10+0_X_SD 3200T-f_9+1/10+0 XPIC Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X_EW 3200T-f_1+1/2+0 XPIC East West 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X_EW 3200T-f_2+1/3+0 XPIC East West 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_EW 3200T-f_3+1/4+0 XPIC East West 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_EW 3200T-f_4+1/5+0 XPIC East West 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X_SD_EW 3200T-f_1+1/2+0 XPIC East West Space Diversity 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X_SD_EW 3200T-f_2+1/3+0 XPIC East West Space Diversity 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_SD_EW 3200T-f_3+1/4+0 XPIC East West Space Diversity 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_SD_EW 3200T-f_4+1/5+0 XPIC East West Space Diversity FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 265 of 403 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 Single Pol) N+0/N+1 Single Pol 32T-f_1+1/2+0_SP 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_SP 32T-f_2+1/3+0_SP 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_SP 32T-f_3+1/4+0_SP 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_SP 32T-f_4+1/5+0_SP 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_SP All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 Single Pol Space Diversity) N+0/N+1 Single Pol Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1/2+0_SP_SD 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_Single Pole Space Diversity 32T-f_2+1/3+0_SP_SD 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_Single Pole Space Diversity 32T-f_3+1/4+0_SP_SD 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_Single Pole Space Diversity 32T-f_4+1/5+0_SP_SD 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_Single Pole Space Diversity 32T-f_1+1/2+0_SP_EW 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_Single Pole East West 32T-f_2+1/3+0_SP_EW 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_Single Pole East West 32T-f_3+1/4+0_SP_EW 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_Single Pole East West 32T-f_4+1/5+0_SP_EW 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_Single Pole East West 32T-f_1+1/2+0_SP_SD_EW 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_Single Pole Space Diversity East West 32T-f_2+1/3+0_SP_SD_EW 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_Single Pole Space Diversity East West 32T-f_3+1/4+0_SP_SD_EW 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_Single Pole Space Diversity East West 32T-f_4+1/5+0_SP_EW 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_Single Pole East West All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC Upgrade ready) N+0/N+1 XPIC Upgrade Ready 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X_UR 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_XPIC_Upgrade Ready 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X_UR 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_XPIC_Upgrade Ready 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_UR 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_XPIC_Upgrade Ready 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_UR 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_XPIC_Upgrade Ready FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 266 of 403 All-Indoor Configurations (N+0/N+1 XPIC Space Diversity Upgrade-Ready) N+0/N+1 XPIC Space Diversity Upgrade Ready 32T-f_1+1/2+0_X_SD_UR 3200T-f_1+1/2+0_XPIC_Space Diversity Upgrade Ready 32T-f_2+1/3+0_X_SD_UR 3200T-f_2+1/3+0_XPIC_Space Diversity Upgrade Ready 32T-f_3+1/4+0_X_SD_UR 3200T-f_3+1/4+0_XPIC_Space Diversity Upgrade Ready 32T-f_4+1/5+0_X_SD_UR 3200T-f_4+1/5+0_XPIC_Space Diversity Upgrade Ready All-Indoor Configurations (19" Without Rack) 19" Without Rack 32T19-f_1+0_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+0_Without_rack 32T19-f_1+0_EW_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+0_East West Without rack 32T19-f_1+0_SD_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+0_Space Diversity Without rack 32T19-f_1+0_SD_EW_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+0_Space Diversity East West Without rack 32T19-f_1+1_HSB_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+1_HSB_Without_rack 32T19-f_1+1_HSB_SD_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+1_HSB_Space Diversity Without rack 32T19-f_1+1_HSB_EW_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+1_HSB_East West Without rack 32T19-f_1+1_HSB_SD_EW_WO_rack 3200T19_inch-f_1+1_HSB_Space Diversity East West Without rack For additional configurations and details, please contact your Ceragon representative. For 1500HP/RFU-HP transmit power specifications 1500HP/RFU-HP Transmit Power (dBm) For 1500HP/RFU-HP receiver threshold specifications: 1500HP/RFU-HP Receiver Threshold (RSL)
(dBm @BER = 10-6) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 267 of 403 7.5 RFH-HS FibeAir RFU-HS is a high transmit power RFU for long-haul applications. Based on Ceragons field-proven 1500HP technology, RFU-HS supports capacities of up to 500 Mbps for TDM and IP interfaces. With its high transmit power, FibeAir RFU-HS is designed to enable high quality wireless communication in the most cost-effective manner, reaching over longer distances while enabling the use of smaller antennas. 7.5.1 Main Features of RFU-HS Frequency range Operates in the frequency range of 6-8 GHz Ultra high transmit power - Up to 30 dBm for longer distances, enhanced availability Configurable Modulation QPSK 256 QAM Configurable Channel Bandwidth 3.5 MHz 56MHz Direct or remote mount - Flexible installation saves costs and reduces transmission loss Supported configurations: 1+0 - direct and remote mount 1+1 - direct and remote mount 2+0 - direct and remote mount 2+2 - remote mount XPIC and CCDP Built-in XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) and Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) ATPC (Automatic Tx Power Control) Simple and Easy Installation FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 268 of 403 7.5.2 RFU-HS Frequency Bands Frequency Band Frequency Range (GHz) Channel Bandwidth Standard L6 GHz 5.925 to 6.425 29.65/56MHz ITU-R F.383 U6 GHz 6.425 to 7.100 20 MHz to 40/56 /60 MHz ITU-R F.384 7 GHz 7.425 to 7.900 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz ITU-R F.385 Annex 4 7.425 to 7.725 28/56 MHz ITU-R F.385 Annex 1 7.110 to 7.750 28/56 MHz ITU-R F.385 Annex 3 8 GHz 7.725 to 8.275 29.65 MHz ITU-R F.386 Annex 1 8.275 to 8.500 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz ITU-R F.386 Annex 3 7.900 to 8.400 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz ITU-R F.386 Annex 4 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 269 of 403 7.5.3 RFU-HS Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU-HS Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU Dimensions Height: 409mm Width: 286 mm Depth: 86 mm Weight: 8 kg RFU Antenna Connection Standard flexible waveguide (frequency dependent) IDU-RFU Connection Coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male) Maximum System Power Consumption (IDU and RFU) 1+0: 88W 1+1: 134W Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class T1.2, with a temperature range of -25C to+85C. Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3, with a temperature range of -40C to+85C. Operating Temperature Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Relative Humidity 5% to 100% Power Supply -40.5 to -72 VDC (up to -57 VDC for USA market)
7.5.4 RFU-HS Antenna Types The following antennas support direct and remote mount installations for RFU-HS.
Vendor Frequency Band Diameter Manufacturer PN Marketing Model Andrew 7/8 GHz 4ft VHLP4-7W-CR3 A-4-7_8-A Andrew 7/8 GHz 6ft VHLP6-7W-CR3 A-6-7_8-A RFS 6L 4ft SU4-59CVA A-4-6L-R RFS 6L 6ft SU6-59CVA A-6-6L-R RFS 6U 4ft SU4-65CVA A-4-6H-R FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 270 of 403 Vendor Frequency Band Diameter Manufacturer PN Marketing Model RFS 6U 6ft SU6-65CVA A-6-6H-R RFS 7/8 GHz 4ft SB4-W71CVA A-4-7_8-R RFS 7/8 GHz 6ft SU6B-W71CVA A-6-7_8-R Xian Putian 6L 4ft WTG12-58DAR A-4-6L-X Xian Putian 6L 6ft WTG18-58DAR A-6-6L-X Xian Putian 6U 4ft WTG12-64DAR A-4-6H-X Xian Putian 6U 6ft WTG18-64DAR A-6-6H-X Xian Putian 7/8 GHz 4ft WTG12-W71DAR A-4-7_8-X Xian Putian 7/8 GHz 6ft WTG18-W71DAR A-6-7_8-X 7.5.5 RFU-HS Antenna Connection The RFU is connected to the antenna via a flexible waveguide (which is frequency-dependent), in accordance with the following table. (The antenna type and the waveguide flanges are imperial.)
Frequency (GHz) Waveguide Standard Waveguide Flange 6L WR137 CPR137F 6H WR137 CPR137F 7 WR112 CPR112F 8 WR112 CPR112F 7.5.6 RFU-HS Mediation Device Losses The following table lists branching losses for RFU-HS antennas.
Configuration Interfaces 6-8 GHz Flex WG Remote Mount antenna Added on remote mount configurations 0.5 1+0 Integrated antenna Integrated antenna 0 1+1 HSB Integrated antenna Main TR 1.6 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 6.5 1+1/2+2 HSB Remote antenna Main TR 1.6 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 6.5 2+0 SP (with CPLR) Integrated antenna 4 4+0 DP Remote mount antenna 4 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 271 of 403 For RFU-HS transmit power specifications: RFU-HS Transmit Power (dBm) For RFU-HS receiver threshold specifications: RFU-HS Receiver Threshold (RSL)
(dBm @ BER = 10-6) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 272 of 403 7.6 RFU-SP FibeAir RFU-SP supports multiple capacities, frequencies, modulation schemes, and configurations for various network requirements. RFU-SP operates in the frequency range of 6-8 GHz, and supports capacities of 40 Mbps to 400 Mbps for TDM and IP interfaces. The capacity can easily be doubled using XPIC. 7.6.1 Main Features of RFU-SP Frequency Range Operates in the frequency range of 6-8 GHz. Configurable Capacity from 40 Mbps to 500 Mbps. Configurable Modulation QPSK 256 QAM Configurable Channel Bandwidth 3.5 MHz 56MHz Antenna Mount Direct or remote. Main Configurations 1+1, 1+0, 2+0 XPIC and CCDP Built-in XPIC and Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) ATPC (Automatic Tx Power Control) Simple and Easy Installation FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 273 of 403 7.6.2 RFU-SP Frequency Bands The frequency band of each radio is listed in the following table. RFU-SP Frequency Bands Frequency Band Frequency Range (GHz) Channel Bandwidth L6 GHz 5.925 to 6.425 29.65/56MHz U6 GHz 6.425 to 7.100 20 MHz to 40/56 /60 MHz 7 GHz 7.425 to 7.900 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz 7.425 to 7.725 28/56 MHz 7.110 to 7.750 28/56 MHz 8 GHz 7.725 to 8.275 29.65 MHz 8.275 to 8.500 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz 7.900 to 8.400 14 MHz to 28/56 MHz FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 274 of 403 7.6.3 RFU-SP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU-SP Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU Dimensions Height: 409mm Width: 286 mm Depth: 86 mm Weight: 8 kg RFU Antenna Connection Standard flexible waveguide (frequency dependent) IDU-RFU Connection Coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male) Maximum System Power Consumption (IDU and RFU) 1+0: 88W 1+1: 130W Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class T1.2, with a temperature range of -25C to+85C. Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3, with a temperature range of -40C to+85C. Operating Temperature Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Relative Humidity 5% to 100% Power Supply -40.5 to -72 VDC (up to -57 VDC for USA market)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 275 of 403 7.6.4 RFU-SP Direct Mount Installation The following antennas support direct and remote mount installations: RFU-HS-SP Antennas Vendor Frequency Band Diameter Manufacturer PN Marketing Model Andrew 7/8 GHz 4ft VHLP4-7W-CR3 A-4-7_8-A Andrew 7/8 GHz 6ft VHLP6-7W-CR3 A-6-7_8-A RFS 6L 4ft SU4-59CVA A-4-6L-R RFS 6L 6ft SU6-59CVA A-6-6L-R RFS 6U 4ft SU4-65CVA A-4-6H-R RFS 6U 6ft SU6-65CVA A-6-6H-R RFS 7/8 GHz 4ft SB4-W71CVA A-4-7_8-R RFS 7/8 GHz 6ft SU6B-W71CVA A-6-7_8-R Xian Putian 6L 4ft WTG12-58DAR A-4-6L-X Xian Putian 6L 6ft WTG18-58DAR A-6-6L-X Xian Putian 6U 4ft WTG12-64DAR A-4-6H-X Xian Putian 6U 6ft WTG18-64DAR A-6-6H-X Xian Putian 7/8 GHz 4ft WTG12-W71DAR A-4-7_8-X Xian Putian 7/8 GHz 6ft WTG18-W71DAR A-6-7_8-X 7.6.5 RFU-SP Antenna Connection RFU-SP is connected to the antenna via a flexible waveguide, which is frequency-dependent, in accordance with the following table.
Frequency (GHz) Waveguide Standard Waveguide Flange 6L WR137 CPR137F 6H WR137 CPR137F 7 WR112 CPR112F 8 WR112 CPR112F FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 276 of 403 7.6.6 RFU-SP Mediation Device Losses The following table lists branching losses for RFU-SP antennas.
Configuration Interfaces 6-8 GHz Flex WG Remote Mount antenna Added on remote mount configurations 0.5 1+0 Integrated antenna Integrated antenna 0 1+1 HSB Integrated antenna Main TR 1.6 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 6.5 1+1/2+2 HSB Remote antenna Main TR 1.6 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 6.5 2+0 SP (with CPLR) Integrated antenna 4 4+0 DP Remote mount antenna 4
For RFU-SP transmit power specifications: RFU-SP Transmit Power (dBm) For RFU-SP receiver threshold specifications: RFU-SP Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 277 of 403 7.7 1500P 7.7.1 1500P Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications 1500P Mechanical, Electrical, and Environmental Specifications RFU Dimensions Diameter: 270 mm (10.8) Depth: 140 mm (4.5) Weight: 8 kg (18 lbs) IDU-RFU Connection Coaxial cable RG-223 (100 m/300 ft), Belden 9914/RG-8 (300 m/1000 ft) or equivalent, N-type connectors (male) Maximum System Power Consumption (IDU and RFU) 1+0: 65W 1+1: 105W Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class T1.2, with a temperature range of -25C to+85C. Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3, with a temperature range of -40C to+85C. Operating Temperature Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Relative Humidity 5% to 100% Power Supply -40.5 to -72 VDC (up to -57 VDC for USA market)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 278 of 403 7.7.2 1500P Mediation Device Losses The following table lists branching losses for 1500P antennas. 1500P Mediation Device Losses Configuration Interfaces 11 GHz 13-15 GHz 18-26 GHz 28-39 GHz Flex WG Remote Mount antenna Added on remote mount configurations 0.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 1+0 Integrated antenna Integrated antenna 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.5 1+1 HSB Integrated antenna Main TR 1.8 1.8 1.8 2 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 7.2 7.2 7.5 7.5 1+1/2+2 HSB Remote antenna Main TR 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 with asymmetrical coupler Secondary TR 7.1 7.1 7.5 7.5 For 1500P transmit power specifications: 1500P Transmit Power (dBm) For 1500P receiver threshold specifications: 1500P Receiver Threshold (RSL) (dBm @ BER = 10-6) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 279 of 403 8. Typical Configurations This chapter includes: IP-10G Configuration Options Point-to-Point Configurations Nodal Configurations Note: The component tables in this section show the number of components and accessories required for each configuration, but do not include regular traffic cables, and optional cables such as alarm and user channel cables. They do include splitters and Y cables required for protected configurations. For optical (SFP) interfaces, two cables are required for each interface, one for TX and one for RX. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 280 of 403 8.1 IP-10G Configuration Options The following are some of the typical configurations supported by the FibeAir IP-10G. 1+0 1+1 HSB 1+1 Space Diversity (BBS) 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS) 2+0/4+0 XPIC optional Multi-Radio - optional Line/IDU/switch/XC protection - optional 2+2/4+4 HSB XPIC optional Multi-Radio - optional FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 281 of 403 8.2 Point-to-Point Configurations This section includes: Basic 1+0 1+1 HSB 1+0 with 32 E1s 1+0 with 64 E1s 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s No Multi-Radio 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s Multi-Radio 2+0/XPIC Link with 32 E1s + STM-1 Mux Interface, no Multi-Radio, up to 168 E1s over the radio 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s 1+1 HSB with 84 E1s 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Mux Interface (Up to 84 E1s over the radio) Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Mux (up to 150 E1s over the radio) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 282 of 403 8.2.1 Basic 1+0 Configuration Integrated Ethernet switching can be enabled for multiple local Ethernet interfaces support Basic 1+0 Configuration
1+1 Components Component Number Comments IDU 1 RFU 1 T-Card E1 or STM-1 1 (optional) Optional, for 16 additional E1, or STM-1 IF Cable 1
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 283 of 403 8.2.2 1+1 HSB Integrated Ethernet switching can be enabled for multiple local Ethernet interface support. Redundancy covers failure of all control and data path components. Local Ethernet and TDM interface protection support via Y cables or protection-panel. <50 ms switchover time. 1+1 HSB Configuration
1+1 HSB Components Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card E1 or STM-1 2 (optional) Optional, for 16 additional E1, or STM-1 Ethernet Y Cable N Per number of Ethernet (electrical) ports used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-4 Per number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 1 or 2 2 if E1 T-Card used. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Cross Ethernet Cable 1 Used to connect the IDUs for protection. IF Cable 2 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 284 of 403 8.2.3 1+0 with 32 E1s 1+0 with 32 E1s
1+0 with 32 E1s Components (Each Side of Link) Component Number Comments IDU 1 RFU 1 T-Card E1 1 IF Cable 1
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 285 of 403 8.2.4 1+0 with 64 E1s 1+0 with 64 E1s
1+0 with 64 E1s Components (Each Side of Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 1 T-Card E1 2 IF Cable 1
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 286 of 403 8.2.5 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s No Multi-Radio Ethernet traffic - Each of the two units: Feeds Ethernet traffic independently to its radio interface. Can be configured independently for switch or pipe operation No Ethernet traffic is shared internally between the two radio carriers TDM traffic Each of the two radio interfaces supports separate E1 services E1 Services can optionally be protected using SNCP 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s No Multi-Radio
2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s (no Multi-Radio) Components (Each Side of Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card E1 2 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 287 of 403 8.2.6 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s Multi-Radio Ethernet traffic One of the units acts as the Master unit and feeds Ethernet traffic to both radio carriers Traffic is distributed between the two carriers at the radio frame level The Master IDU can be configured for switch or pipe operation. The Slave IDU has all its Ethernet interfaces and functionality effectively disabled. TDM traffic Each of the two radio interfaces supports separate E1 services E1 services can optionally be protected using SNCP 2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s Multi-Radio
2+0/XPIC Link with 64 E1s (Multi-Radio) Components (Each Side of Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card E1 2 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 288 of 403 8.2.7 2+0/XPIC Link with 32 E1s + STM-1 Mux Interface, no Multi-Radio, up to 168 E1s over the radio 2+0/XPIC Link, with 32 E1s + STM-1 Mux Interface, no Multi-Radio, up to 168 E1s Over the Radio
Required Components (Each Side of Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card STM-1 2 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 289 of 403 8.2.8 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s 1+1 HSB with 32 E1s
1+1 HSB with 32 E1s Components (Each Side of the Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card E1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-4 Per number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Cross Ethernet Cable 1 Used to connect the IDUs for protection. IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 290 of 403 8.2.9 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s 1+1 HSB with 64 E1s
1+1 HSB with 64 E1s Components (Each Side of the Link) Component Number Comments IDU 4 RFU 2 T-Card E1 4 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 Ethernet Y Cable N Per number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-4 Per number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 291 of 403 8.2.10 1+1 HSB with 84 E1s 1+1 HSB with 84 E1s
1+1 HSB with 84 E1 Components (Each Side of the Link) Component Number Comments IDU 6 RFU 2 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 2 T-Card E1 6 Ethernet Y Cable N Per number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-4 Per number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 292 of 403 8.2.11 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Mux Interface (Up to 84 E1s over the radio) 1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Mux Interface
1+1 HSB Link with 16 E1s+ STM-1 Components (Each Side of the Link) Component Number Comments IDU 2 RFU 2 T-Card STM-1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-4 Per number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 1 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 1 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Cross Ethernet Cable 1 Used to connect the IDUs for protection. IF Cable 2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 293 of 403 8.2.12 Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Mux (up to 150 E1s over the radio) Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Mux (up to 150 E1s over the radio)
Native 2 2+2/XPIC/Multi-Radio MW Link, with 2xSTM-1 Components (Each Side of the Link) Component Number Comments IDU 4 RFU 4 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 T-Card STM-1 4 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of electrical Ethernet ports used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-8 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 4
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 294 of 403 8.3 Nodal Configurations This section includes: Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (5 hops total), with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (3 hops total), with 2 x STM-1 Mux FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 295 of 403 8.3.1 Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux
Chain with 1+0 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Chain) Component Number Comments IDU 6 RFU 6 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 T-Card STM-1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of Ethernet ports used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-8 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 2 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 6 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 296 of 403 8.3.2 Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink
Node with 2 x 1+0 Downlinks and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink Components (Entire Node) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 T-Card E1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-8 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 3 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 8
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 297 of 403 8.3.3 Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux
Chain with 1+1 Downlink and 1+1 HSB Uplink, with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Chain) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 T-Card STM-1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of Ethernet ports used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-16 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 3 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 1 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 8 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 298 of 403 8.3.4 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site
Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 6 RFU 6 Main Nodal Enclosure 3 Extension Nodal Enclosure 3 T-Card STM-1 2 IF Cable 6 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 299 of 403 8.3.5 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site
Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+1 HSB Links + STM-1 Mux Interface at Main Site Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 12 RFU 12 Main Nodal Enclosure 3 Extension Nodal Enclosure 3 T-Card STM-1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-24 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 6 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 1 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 12 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 300 of 403 8.3.6 Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux
Node with 1 x 1+1 HSB Downlink and 1 x 1+1 HSB Uplink with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Node) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 1 Extension Nodal Enclosure 1 T-Card STM-1 2 Ethernet Y Cable N Per the number of Ethernet ports (electrical) used for traffic. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. Optical Y Splitter 0-16 Per the number of Ethernet ports (optical) used for traffic. Two cables are required for each optical port used; one for RX and one for TX. Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. E1 Y Cable 4 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. STM-1 Y Cable 1 Used to provide single input/output to/from the IDUs. IF Cable 8 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 301 of 403 8.3.7 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Mux
Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 Links, with STM-1 Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 4 Extension Nodal Enclosure 4 T-Card STM-1 1 IF Cable 8
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 302 of 403 8.3.8 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0
Native 2 Ring with 3 x 1+0 Links + Spur Link 1+0 Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 3 Extension Nodal Enclosure 3 IF Cable 8
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 303 of 403 8.3.9 Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (5 hops total), with STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (5 hops total), with STM-1 Mux
Native 2 Ring with 4 x 1+0 MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link with STM-1 Mux Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 3 Extension Nodal Enclosure 3 T-Card STM-1 4 IF Cable 8
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 304 of 403 8.3.10 Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (3 hops total), with 2 x STM-1 Mux Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link (3 hops total), with 2 x STM-1 Mux
Native 2 Ring with 2 x 2+0/XPIC MW Links and 1 x Fiber Link with 2 x STM-1 Components (Entire Ring) Component Number Comments IDU 8 RFU 8 Main Nodal Enclosure 2 Extension Nodal Enclosure 4 T-Card STM-1 6 IF Cable 8
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 305 of 403 9. FibeAir IP-10G Management This chapter includes: Management Overview Management Communication Channels and Protocols Web-Based Element Management System (Web EMS) Command Line Interface (CLI) Floating IP Address In-Band Management Out-of-Band Management System Security Features Ethernet Statistics Software Update Timer CeraBuild FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 306 of 403 9.1 Management Overview The Ceragon management solution is built on several layers of management: NEL Network Element-level CLI EMS HTTP web-based EMS NMS and SML NetMaster or PolyView platform Each IP-10 Network Element includes an HTTP web-based element manager (CeraWeb) that enables the operator to perform element configuration, RF, Ethernet, and PDH performance monitoring, remote diagnostics, alarm reports, and more. In addition, Ceragon provides an SNMP V1/V2c/V3 northbound interface on the IP-10G. Ceragons management suite also includes a number of CeraBuild tools, which ease the operators task of installing, maintaining, and provisioning Ceragon equipment. Ceragon offers NetMaster and PolyView network management systems (NMS). Both NetMaster and PolyView provide centralized operation and maintenance capability for the complete range of network elements in an IP-10G system. In addition, management, configuration, and maintenance tasks can be performed directly via the IP-10G Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI can be used to perform configuration operations for standalone IP-10G units or units connected in a nodal configuration, as well as to configure several IP-10G units in a single batch command. In a nodal configuration, all commands are available both in the main and extension units unless otherwise stated. Integrated IP-10G Management Tools
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 307 of 403 9.2 Management Communication Channels and Protocols Related Topics: Secure Communication Channels Network Elements can be accessed locally via serial or Ethernet management interfaces, or remotely through the standard Ethernet LAN. The application layer is indifferent to the access channel used. PolyView can be accessed through its GUI interface application, which may run locally or in a separate platform; it also has an SNMP-based northbound interface to communicate with other management systems. Dedicated Management Ports Port number Protocol Packet structure Details 161 SNMP UDP Sends SNMP Requests to the network elements 162 Configurable SNMP (traps) UDP Sends SNMP traps forwarding (optional) 25 SMTP (mail) TCP Sends PolyView reports and triggers by email (optional) 69 TFTP UDP Uploads/ downloads configuration files (optional) 80 HTTP TCP Manages devices 443 HTTPS TCP Manages devices (optional) From 21 port to any remote port (>1023) FTP Control Port TCP Downloads software and configuration files. (FTP Server responds to client's control port) (optional) From Any port (>1023) to any remote port (>1023) FTP Data Port TCP Downloads software and configuration files. The FTP server sends ACKs (and data) to client's data port. Optional FTP server random port range can be limited according to need (i.e., according to the number of parallel configuration uploads). All remote system management is carried out through standard IP communications. Each NE behaves as a host with a single IP address. The communications protocol used depends on the management channel being accessed. As a baseline, these are the protocols in use: Standard HTTP for web-based management Standard telnet for CLI-based management PolyView uses a number of ports and protocols for different functions: FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 308 of 403 PolyView Server Receiving Data Ports Port number Protocol Packet structure Details 162 Configurable SNMP (traps) UDP Receive SNMP traps from network elements 4001 Configurable Propriety TCP CeraMap Server 69 TFTP UDP Downloads software and files (optional) 21 FTP Control Port TCP Downloads software and configuration files. (FTP client initiates a connection) (optional) To any port (>1023) from any Port (>1023) FTP Data Port TCP Downloads software and configuration files.(FTP Client initiates data connection to random port specified by server) (optional) FTP Server random port range can be limited according to needed configuration (number of parallel configuration uploads). 9205 Configurable Propriety TCP User Actions Logger server (optional) 9207 Configurable Propriety TCP CeraView Proxy (optional) Web Sending Data Ports Port number Protocol Packet structure Details 80 HTTP TCP Manages device 443 HTTPS TCP Manages device (optional) Web Receiving Data Ports Port number Protocol Packet structure Details 21 FTP TCP Downloads software files (optional) Data port FTP TCP Downloads software files (optional) Additional Management Ports for IP-10G Port number Protocol Packet structure Details 23 telnet TCP Remote CLI access (optional) 22 SSH TCP Secure remote CLI access (optional)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 309 of 403 9.3 Web-Based Element Management System (Web EMS) The CeraWeb Element Management System (Web EMS) is an HTTP web-based element manager that enables the operator to perform configuration operations and obtain statistical and performance information related to the system, including: Configuration Management Enables you to view and define configuration data for the IP-10G system. Fault Monitoring Enables you to view active alarms. Performance Monitoring Enables you to view and clear performance monitoring values and counters. Maintenance Association Identifiers Enables you to define Maintenance Association Identifiers (MAID) for CFR protection. Diagnostics and Maintenance Enables you to define and perform loopback tests, software updates, and IDU-RFU interface monitoring. Security Configuration Enables you to configure IP-10G security features. User Management Enables you to define users and user groups. A Web-Based EMS connection to the IP-10G can be opened using an HTTP Browser (Explorer or Mozilla Firefox). The Web EMS uses a graphical interface. All system configurations and statuses are available via the Web EMS, including all L2-Switch configurations such as port type, VLANs, QoS. The Web EMS shows the actual node configuration and provides easy access to any IDU in the node. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 310 of 403 9.4 Command Line Interface (CLI) A CLI connection to the IP-10G can be opened via terminal (serial COM, speed: 115200, Data: 8 bits, Stop: 1 bit, Flow-Control: None), or via telnet (SSH is supported as well). The Terminal format should be VT-100 with a screen definition of 80 columns X 24 rows. All parameter configurations can be performed via CLI. All IDUs in a nodal enclosure can be accessed via the CLI interface, by using a command which enables the user to logon to any slot in the node. 9.4.1 Text CLI Configuration Scripts CLI configuration text scripts, written in Ceragon CLI format, can be downloaded into the IDU. It is not possible to upload the IDUs configuration into a text file. CLI scripts can only be downloaded and handled via CLI. CLI scripts cannot be downloaded via the Web EMS. The user can perform the following operations on CLI scripts: Set the file name of the script: Download CLI script file to the IDU Download the CLI script file: Get the status of the downloaded script. Show the last downloaded CLI script content. Execute (activate) a CLI script. Delete the current script which resides inside the IDU. Protection copy-to-mate command FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 311 of 403 9.5 Floating IP Address The floating IP address feature provides a single IP address that will always provide direct access to the currently active main unit in a 1+1 or 2+2 HSB configuration. This is used primarily for web-based management and telnet access. The user can configure a floating IP address in the active unit, and this IP address will be automatically copied to the standby unit. The following limitations apply: The floating IP address must be different from the system IP address. The floating IP address must be in the same subnet as the system IP address. The remote floating IP address can be viewed and configured using the local- remote channel. The individual units IP addresses are maintained in order to provide a mechanism to connect directly to the standby unit should this be necessary for any reason. For SNMP access, a mechanism exists to similarly enable automatic access to active protected extension units. Note that when using the SNMP protocol, the actual IDU being accessed depends on the community/context string. The floating IP address feature can still be used to ensure access if one of the main units fails. The floating IP mechanism can be enabled or disabled. When it is enabled, then upon a protection switch, the existing floating IP address is assigned to the unit that was previously in standby mode and has switched to active mode. This unit will have a different MAC address than the previously active IDU. For this reason, a gratuitous ARP (GARP) message is automatically sent after the switch. However, when connected directly to some older network equipment, re- establishment of the management Ethernet ports link may take a few seconds after a protection switch. In this case, the GARP message may be lost. For this reason, users can configure a number of GARP transmission retries (default is 5 retries, maximum is 10). Retries will be sent one time per second. In the unlikely case of repeated protection switches (which may take place as a result of permanent radio channel problems), communication may be lost due to the fact that the ARP changes are taking place once every few seconds. In this case, the floating IP address will be automatically locked to one of the IDUs so that users can maintain remote management access to the system. Note that the IDU may be a standby unit. The IP address will automatically return to the active unit when the situation stabilizes. Alternatively, users can access any of the IDUs in the node using their local IP addresses. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 312 of 403 9.6 In-Band Management FibeAir IP-10G can optionally be managed In-Band, via its radio and Ethernet interfaces. This method of management eliminates the need for a dedicated interface and network. In-band management uses a dedicated management VLAN, which is user-configurable. With In-Band management, the remote IDU is managed by specific frames that are sent as part of the traffic. These frames are identified as management frames by a special VLAN ID configured by the user. This VLAN ID must be used only for management. It is not possible to configure more than a single VLAN ID for management. Note: It is strongly recommended to classify the management VLAN ID to the highest queue, in order to ensure the ability to manage remote units even under congestion scenarios. The local unit is the gateway for In-Band management. The remote unit is managed via its traffic ports (the radio port, for example), so that no management ports are needed. 9.6.1 In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode This feature is designed for operators that provide Ethernet leased lines to third party users. The third party user connects its equipment to the Ethernet interface of the IP-10G, while all the other network interfaces, particularly the radios, are managed by the carrier of carriers user. In that case, management frames that are sent throughout the network to manage the carrier of carrier equipment must not egress the line interfaces that are used by the third party customer, since these frames will, in effect, spam the third party user network. The following figure describes the management blocking scenario. In-Band Management Isolation IP-10 IP-10 Provider Network Management Center Mng Frames Carrier of carriers network (Provider Network) Mng Frames Block providers management Frames Block providers management Frames 3 rd Party User Network 3 rd Party User Network
In switch modes, it is very easy to achieve the required functionality by a simple VLAN exclude configuration on the relevant ports. However, in Single Pipe mode, VLANs cannot be used to block traffic, since the line and radio interfaces are transparent by definition to all VLANs. Thus, this management FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 313 of 403 blocking capacity is a special feature for Single Pipe applications that blocks management frames from egressing the line interface. This feature is also relevant only to standalone units or the main unit in a nodal configuration. There is no purpose in blocking the In-Band management VLAN in extension units, since the management VLAN can be blocked in the Ethernet switch port. 9.7 Out-of-Band Management With Out-of-Band management, the remote system is managed using the Wayside channel. On both local and remote units, the Wayside channel must be connected to a management port using an Ethernet cross-cable. The Wayside channel can be configured to narrow capacity (~64kbps) or wide capacity (~2Mbps). It is recommended to use wide WSC in order to get better management performance, since narrow WSC might be too slow. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 314 of 403 9.8 System Security Features To guarantee proper performance and availability of a network as well as the data integrity of the traffic, it is imperative to protect it from all potential threats, both internal (misuse by operators and administrators) and external (attacks originating outside the network). System security is based on making attacks difficult (in the sense that the effort required to carry them out is not worth the possible gain) by putting technical and operational barriers in every layer along the way, from the access outside the network, through the authentication process, up to every data link in the network. 9.8.1 Ceragons Layered Security Concept Each layer protects against one or more threats. However, it is the combination of them that provides adequate protection to the network. In most cases, no single layer protection provides a complete solution to threats. The layered security concept is presented in the following figure. Each layer presents the security features and the threats addressed by it. Unless stated otherwise, requirements refer to both network elements and the NMS. Security Solution Architecture Concept
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 315 of 403 9.8.2 Defenses in Management Communication Channels Since network equipment can be managed from any location, it is necessary to protect the communication channels contents end to end. These defenses are based on existing and proven cryptographic techniques and libraries, thus providing standard secure means to manage the network, with minimal impact on usability. They provide defense at any point (including public networks and radio aggregation networks) of communications. While these features are implemented in Ceragon equipment, it is the responsibility of the operator to have the proper capabilities in any external devices used to manage the network. In addition, inside Ceragon networking equipment it is possible to control physical channels used for management. This can greatly help deal with all sorts of DoS attacks. Operators can use secure channels instead or in addition to the existing management channels: SNMPv3 for all SNMP-based protocols for both NEs and NMS HTTPS for access to the NEs web server SSH-2 for all CLI access SFTP for all software and configuration download between NMS and NEs All protocols run with secure settings using strong encryption techniques. Unencrypted modes are not allowed, and algorithms used must meet modern and client standards. Users are allowed to disable all insecure channels. In the network elements, the bandwidth of physical channels transporting management communications is limited to the appropriate magnitude, in particular, channels carrying management frames to the CPU. Attack types addressed Tempering with management flows Management traffic analysis Unauthorized software installation Attacks on protocols (by providing secrecy and integrity to messages) Traffic interfaces eavesdropping (by making it harder to change configuration) DoS through flooding FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 316 of 403 9.8.3 Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures 9.8.3.1 User Identification IP-10G supports the following user identification features: Configurable inactivity time-out for closing management channels Password strength is enforced; passwords must comply with the following rules: Be at least 8 characters long Include both numbers and letters (or spaces, symbols, etc.) Include both uppercase and lowercase letters When calculating the number of character classes, upper-case letters used as the first character and digits used as the last character of a password are not counted A password cannot be repeated within the past 5 password changes Password aging: users can be prompted do change passwords after a configurable amount of time Users may be suspended after a configurable number of unsuccessful login attempts Users can be configured to expire at a certain date Mandatory change of password at first time login can be enabled and disabled upon user configuration. It is enabled by default. 9.8.3.2 Remote Authentication Certificate-based strong standard encryption techniques are used for remote authentication. Users may choose to use this feature or not for all secure communication channels. Since different operators may have different certificate-based authentication policies (for example, issuing its own certificates vs. using an external CA or allowing the NMS system to be a CA), NEs and NMS software provide the tools required for operators to enforce their policy and create certificates according to their established processes. Server authentication capabilities are provided. 9.8.3.3 Authorization Users are assigned to user groups. Each group has separate and well-defined authorization to access resources. Security configuration can only be performed by the group with the highest permission level. In the NMS, it is possible to customize groups and group permissions. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 317 of 403 9.8.3.4 RADIUS Support The RADIUS protocol provides centralized user management services. IP-10G supports RADIUS server and provides a RADIUS client for authentication and authorization. When RADIUS is enabled, a user attempting to log into the system from any of the management channels (CLI, WEB, SNMP) is not authenticated locally but rather, his or her credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS server which indicates to the IP-10G whether the user is known, and which privilege is to be given to the user. RADIUS login works as follows: If the RADIUS server is reachable, the system expects authorization to be received from the server: The server sends the appropriate user privilege to the IP-10G, or notifies the IP-10G that the user was rejected. If rejected, the user will be unable to log in. Otherwise, the user will log in with the appropriate privilege and will continue to operate normally. If the RADIUS server is unavailable, the IP-10G will attempt to authenticate the user locally, according to the existing list of defined users. Note: Local login authentication is provided in order to enable users to manage the system in the event that RADIUS server is unavailable. This requires previous definition of users in the system. If the user is only defined in the RADIUS server, the user will be unable to login locally in case the RADIUS server is unavailable. In order to support IP-10G - specific privilege levels, the vendor-specific field is used. Ceragons IANA number for this field is 2281. The following RADIUS servers are supported: FreeRADIUS RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS) Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 Cisco ACS 9.8.3.5 Attack Types Addressed Impersonation Unauthorized software installation Traffic interfaces eavesdropping FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 318 of 403 9.8.4 Secure Communication Channels IP-10G supports a variety of standard encryption protocols and algorithms, as described in the following sections. 9.8.4.1 SSH (Secured Shell) SHHv1 and SSHv2 are supported. SSH protocol can be used as a secured alternative to Telnet. SSH protocol will always be operational. Admin users can choose whether to disable Telnet protocol, which is enabled by default. Server authentication is based on IP-10Gs public key. Key exchange algorithm is RSA. Supported Encryptions: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-cbc, cast128-cbc, arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr. MAC (Message Authentication Code): SHA-1-96 (MAC length = 96 bits, key length = 160 bit). Supported MAC: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac- ripemd160, hmac-sha1-96, hmac-md5-96' The server authenticates the user based on user name and password. The number of failed authentication attempts is not limited. The server timeout for authentication is 10 minutes. This value cannot be changed. 9.8.4.2 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) Administrators can configure secure access via HTTPS protocol. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 319 of 403 9.8.4.3 SFTP (Secure FTP) SFTP can be used for the following operations: Configuration upload and download, Uploading unit information Uploading a public key Downloading certificate files Downloading software Users with admin privileges can enforce secure FTP by disabling standard FTP. 9.8.4.4 Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File In order to create a digital certificate for the NE, a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file should be created by the NE. The CSR contains information that will be included in the NE's certificate such as the organization name, common name (domain name), locality, and country. It also contains the public key that will be included in the certificate. Certificate authority (CA) will use the CSR to create the desired certificate for the NE. While creating the CSR file, the user will be asked to input the following parameters that should be known to the operator who applies the command: Common name The identify name of the element in the network (e.g., the IP address). The common name can be a network IP or the FQDN of the element. Organization The legal name of the organization. Organizational Unit - The division of the organization handling the certificate. City/Locality - The city where the organization is located. State/County/Region - The state/region where the organization is located. Country - The two-letter ISO code for the country where the organization is location. Email address - An email address used to contact the organization. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 320 of 403 9.8.4.5 SNMP IP-10G supports SNMP v1, V2c or v3. The default community string in NMS and the SNMP agent in the embedded SW are disabled. Users are allowed to set community strings for access to IDUs. SNMPv3 connections are authenticated with a single user ID and password. Admin users can configure this user ID and password. IP-10G supports the following MIBs: RFC-1213 (MIB II) RMON MIB Ceragon (proprietary) MIB. Access to all IDUs in a node is provided by making use of the community and context fields in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively. For additional information: FibeAir IP-10G I6.9 MIB Reference, DOC- 00015446 9.8.4.6 Server authentication (SSL / SLLv3) All protocols making use of SSL (such as HTTPS) use SLLv3 and support X.509 certificates-based server authentication. Users with type of administrator or above can perform the following server (IDU) authentication operations for certificates handling: Generate server key pairs (private + public) Export public key (as a file to a user-specified address) Install third-party certificates The Admin user is responsible for obtaining a valid certificate. Load a server RSA key pair that was generated externally for use by protocols making use of SSL. Non-SSL protocols using asymmetric encryption, such as SSH and SFTP, can make use of public-key based authentication. Users can load trusted public keys for this purpose. 9.8.4.7 Encryption Encryption algorithms for secure management protocols include: Symmetric key algorithms: 128-bit AES Asymmetric key algorithms: 1024-bit RSA 9.8.4.8 SSH The CLI interface supports SSH-2 Users of type of administrator or above can enable or disable SSH. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 321 of 403 9.8.5 Security Log The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed to any security feature, as well as all security related events. Note: The Security log can only be accessed via the CLI. The security log file has the following attributes: The file is of a cyclic nature (fixed size, newest events overwrite oldest). The log can only be read by users with "admin" or above privilege. The log can be viewed using the following command: /management/mng-services/log-srv/security log/view-security log The contents of the log file are cryptographically protected and digitally signed. In the event of an attempt to modify the file, an alarm will be raised. Users may not overwrite, delete, or modify the log file. The security log records: Changes in security configuration Carrying out security configuration copy to mate Management channels time-out Password aging time Number of unsuccessful login attempts for user suspension Warning banner change Adding/deleting of users Password changed SNMP enable/disable SNMP version used (v1/v3) change SNMPv3 parameters change Security mode Authentication algorithm User Password SNMPv1 parameters change Read community Write community Trap community for any manager HTTP/HTTPS change FTP/SFTP change Telnet and web interface enable/disable FTP enable/disable Loading certificates RADIUS server Radius enable/disable Remote logging enable/disable (for security and configuration logs) Syslog server address change (for security and configuration logs) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 322 of 403 System clock change NTP enable/disable Security events Successful and unsuccessful login attempts N consecutive unsuccessful login attempts (blocking) Configuration change failure due to insufficient permissions SNMPv3/PV authentication failures User logout User account expired For each recorded event the following information is available: User ID Communication channel (WEB, terminal, telnet/SSH, SNMP, NMS, etc.) IP address, if applicable Date and time FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 323 of 403 9.9 Ethernet Statistics The FibeAir IP-10G platform stores and displays statistics in accordance with RMON and RMON2 standards. The following groups of statistics can be displayed: Ingress line receive statistics Ingress radio transmit statistics Egress radio receive statistics Egress line transmit statistics Notes: Statistic parameters are polled each second, from system startup. All counters can be cleared simultaneously. The following statistics are displayed every 15 minutes (in the Radio and E1 performance monitoring windows): Utilization - four utilizations: ingress line receive, ingress radio transmit, egress radio receive, and egress line transmit Packet error rate - ingress line receive, egress radio receive Seconds with errors - ingress line receive 9.9.1 Ingress Line Receive Statistics Sum of frames received without error Sum of octets of all valid received frames Number of frames received with a CRC error Number of frames received with alignment errors Number of valid received unicast frames Number of valid received multicast frames Number of valid received broadcast frames Number of packets received with less than 64 octets Number of packets received with more than 12000 octets (programmable) Frames (good and bad) of 64 octets Frames (good and bad) of 65 to 127 octets Frames (good and bad) of 128 to 256 octets Frames (good and bad) of 256 to 511 octets Frames (good and bad) of 512 to 1023 octets Frames (good and bad) of 1024 to 1518 octets Frames (good and bad) of 1519 to 12000 octets 9.9.2 Ingress Radio Transmit Statistics Sum of frames transmitted to radio Sum of octets transmitted to radio Number of frames dropped FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 324 of 403 9.9.3 Egress Radio Receive Statistics Sum of valid frames received by radio Sum of octets of all valid received frames Sum of all frames received with errors 9.9.4 Egress Line Transmit Statistics Sum of valid frames transmitted to line Sum of octets transmitted 9.9.5 Radio Ethernet Capacity Peak Capacity Average Capacity Exceed Capacity threshold seconds 9.9.6 Radio Ethernet Utilization These statistics represent actual Ethernet throughput, relative to the potential Ethernet throughput of the radio. Peak Utilization Average Utilization Exceed Utilization threshold seconds FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 325 of 403 9.10 Software Update Timer Software in the main unit of a nodal configuration or in a standalone system enables the user to set a timer for installation of a software update. This timer can be set in each unit in the node, including the main unit itself as well as the mate unit in a protection configuration. 9.11 CeraBuild CeraBuild is an application that enables installation and maintenance personnel to initiate and produce commissioning reports to ensure that an IP- 10G system was set up properly and that all components are in order for operation. CeraBuild includes the following tools: Site Commission Tool Link Commission Tool PM Commission Tool Diagnostics Tool For additional information: FibeAir CeraBuild Commission Reports Guide, DOC-00028133 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 326 of 403 10. Network Management This chapter includes: OAM Automatic Network Topology Discovery with LLDP Protocol NMS Options FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 327 of 403 10.1 OAM FibeAir IP-10G provides complete Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) functionality at multiple layers, including: Alarms and events Maintenance signals, such as LOS, AIS, and RDI. Performance monitoring Maintenance commands, such as loopbacks and APS commands. OAM Functionality
10.1.1 Configurable RSL Threshold Alarms and Traps Users can configure alarm and trap generation in the event of RSL degradation beneath a user-defined threshold. An alarm and trap are generated if the RSL remains below the defined threshold for at least five seconds. The alarm is automatically cleared if the RSL subsequently remains above the threshold for at least five seconds. The RSL threshold is based on the nominal RSL value minus the RSL degradation margin. The user defines both the nominal RSL value and the RSL degradation margin. 10.1.2 Alarms Editing Users can change the description text (by appending extra text to the existing description) or the severity of any alarm in the system. This feature is available through CLI only. This is performed as follows: Each alarm in the system is identified by a unique name (see separate list of system alarms and events). The user can perform the following operations on any alarm: View current description and severity Define the text to be appended to the description and/or severity Return the alarm to its default values The user can also return all alarms and events to their default values. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 328 of 403 10.1.3 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) The IEEE 802.1ag standard defines Service Layer OAM (Connectivity Fault Management). The standard facilitates the discovery and verification of a path through 802.1 bridges and local area networks (LANs). IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) protocols consist of three protocols that operate together to aid in debugging Ethernet networks: continuity check, link trace, and loopback. FibeAir IP-10G utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and non-stop data flow. The following are the basic building blocks of CFM: Defines maintenance domains, their constituent maintenance points, and the managed objects required to create and administer them. Defines the relationship between maintenance domains and the services offered by VLAN-aware bridges and provider bridges. Describes the protocols and procedures used by maintenance points to maintain and diagnose connectivity faults within a maintenance domain. Provides means for future expansion of the capabilities of maintenance points and their protocols. User should be aware of the following set of limitations and recommendations with respect to CFM: The Domain Name is unique for different levels. The maximum supported number of local MEPs per single IDU is 256. The maximum supported number of remote MEPs per single IDU is 256. The IDU supports single Local MEP for each MAID. The number of allowed MAIDs is limited to 512 MAIDs. Only MEPs, but not MIPs, can be defined on a Single Pipe port. Before activating the IDU loopback option (e.g., IF loopback), CFM proactive monitoring should be disabled, or Error messages of CFM should be ignored by the user for a period of up to the CFM remote MEP learning time (default value is 60 seconds) after disabling the IDU loopback. The CFM proactive monitor does not run on level 0 (only levels 1 to 7 are supported). Each Domain Level can be assigned a single Domain. A CFM monitoring failure caused by receiving an unexpected remote MEP ID may remain in failure state even after the failure has ceased to exist for a period of up to the CFM remote MEP learning time (default value is 60 seconds). A loopback command from a MEP to a MIP on the same device cannot be sent. Higher domain levels (e.g., customer level) must envelope lower domain levels (e.g., operator level) according to the 802.1ag model. A domain that is added in between domains, and that does not obey this limitation, might not be operational, which may affect other domains. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 329 of 403 Domain Level - + Customer Level Provider Level Customer Bridge A Customer Bridge B Provider Bridge A Provider Bridge B Customer Level MEP Customer Level MIP Provider Level MEP Provider Level MIP 0 7
MEP ID & Remote MEP IDs must be unique. A MEP ID should NOT be reused for Remote MEP IDs on the same (specific) MAID. CFM works according to the outer VLAN. In Managed Switch mode, the service is identified by the 802.1Q VLAN, while in Metro Switch (Provider Bridge) mode, the service is recognized only by the outer S-tag, which might encapsulate an inner C-tag (CQ19849). This is illustrated in the following example Trunk Trunk CN CN PN PN Access Access Radio C-tagged LTM Stripping C-tag Untagged LTR 1 2 3 4 Metro Switch Managed Switch Discard untagged LTR Metro Switch Managed Switch
The example above assumes that a Managed Switch (802.1Q bridge) trunk port is connected to a Metro Switch CN port. MEP is defined on the leftmost access port, and MIP, with the same level, is defined on the leftmost CN port. When an LTM (Link-trace message) egresses the leftmost trunk port, it is tagged (step 1). This LTM ingresses the leftmost CN port, and reaches the CPU. The CPU strips its VLAN (step 2), and generates an LTR (Link-trace Response) message back to the CN port. This LTR message does not carry any VLAN (step 3). Now when it ingresses the leftmost trunk port, it is discarded (step 4). This example demonstrates that a MIP issued on the CN port does not reply to LTM. In such scenarios, MIP should be avoided on a CN port. CN ports are part of a provider domain. Thus, MIP or MEP on these ports are part of the provider OAM domain, and should be defined as such. Automatic link-trace timer is a trigger for an automatic link-trace process that might take longer than the value to which the timer is configured, due to the number of remote MEPs (each link-trace process takes around 12 seconds). When automatic link-trace timer is set to a new value, the new cycle period will take place only after the current cycle period is terminated The maximum number of MEPs guaranteed to provide reliable indications is 50 per IDU. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 330 of 403 10.2 Automatic Network Topology Discovery with LLDP Protocol FibeAir IP-10G supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a vendor- neutral layer 2 protocol that can be used by a station attached to a specific LAN segment to advertise its identity and capabilities and to receive identity and capacity information from physically adjacent layer 2 peers. LLDP is a part of the IEEE 802.1AB 2005 standard that enables automatic network connectivity discovery by means of a port identity information exchange between each port and its peer. Each port periodically sends and also expects to receive frames called Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDU). LLDPDUs contain information in TLV format about port identity, such as MAC address and IP address. The following TLV fields are included in the LLDPDU: Chassis ID TLV Contains the IP address of the shelf. Port ID TLV Contains the MAC address of the port. Port Description TLV Contains a string of 2 digits representing the slot ID and port number, respectively. Standalone units are represented by slot-Id 0. System Description TLV System description string. System capabilities TLV Bridge only. Management address Shelf management address. LLDP can be set in four operation modes: Disabled, Transmit only, Receive only, or Transmit and Receive. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 331 of 403 10.3 NMS Options For network management, Ceragon offers NetMaster, a comprehensive NMS that provides centralized operation and maintenance capability for the complete range of network elements in an IP-10G system. NetMaster is built using state-of-the-art technology as a scalable, cross-platform NMS that supports distributed network architecture. Ceragon also offers PolyView, with best-in-class end-to-end Ethernet service management, network monitoring, and NMS survivability using advanced OAM. PolyView provides simplified network provisioning, configuration error prevention, monitoring, and troubleshooting tools that ensure better user experience, minimal network downtime, and reduced expenditures on network-level maintenance. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 332 of 403 11. Standards and Certifications This chapter includes: Carrier Ethernet Functionality Supported Ethernet Standards MEF Certifications for Ethernet Services Supported Pseudowire Encapsulations Standards Compliance Network Management, Diagnostics, Status, and Alarms FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 333 of 403 11.1 Carrier Ethernet Functionality Latency over the radio link < 0.15 ms @ 400 Mbps "Baby jumbo" Frame Support Up to 1632Bytes General Enhanced link state propagation Enhanced MAC header compression Integrated Carrier Ethernet Switch Integrated non-blocking switch with 4K active VLANs MAC address learning with 8K MAC addresses 802.1ad provider bridges (QinQ) 802.3ad link aggregation Enhanced link state propagation Enhanced MAC header compression Full switch redundancy (hot stand-by) QoS Advanced CoS classification and remarking Advanced traffic policing/rate-limiting Per interface CoS based packet queuing/buffering (8 queues) Per queue statistics Tail-drop and WRED with CIR/EIR support Flexible scheduling schemes (SP/WFQ/Hierarchical) Per interface and per queue traffic shaping Ethernet Service OA&M 802.1ag CFM Automatic "Link trace" processing for storing of last known working path Performance Monitoring Per port Ethernet counters (RMON/RMON2) Radio ACM statistics Enhanced radio Ethernet statistics (Frame Error Rate, Throughput, Capacity, Utilization) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 334 of 403 11.2 Supported Ethernet Standards Supported Ethernet Standards Standard Description 802.3 10base-T 802.3u 100base-T 802.3ab 1000base-T 802.3z 1000base-X 802.3ac Ethernet VLANs 802.1Q Virtual LAN (VLAN) 802.1p Class of service 802.1ad Provider bridges (QinQ) 802.3x Flow control 802.3ad Link aggregation 802.1ag Ethernet service OA&M (CFM) 802.1w RSTP 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Auto MDI/MDIX for 1000baseT RFC 1349 IPv4 TOS RFC 2474 IPv4 DSCP RFC 2460 IPv6 Traffic Classes 11.3 MEF Certifications for Ethernet Services Certification Description MEF-9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI. Certified for all service types (EPL, EVPL & E-LAN). MEF 10.2 MEF 10.2 Ethernet Services Attributes Phase 2 MEF-14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1. Certified for all service types (EPL, EVPL & E-LAN).
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 335 of 403 11.4 Supported Pseudowire Encapsulations Certification Description VLAN (MEF8) Circuit Emulation Services over Ethernet IP/UDP (IETF) User Datagram Protocol MPLS (MFA) Multiprotocol Label Switching
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 336 of 403 11.5 Standards Compliance Specification IDU RFU EMC EN 301 489-4 EN 301 489-4 Safety IEC 60950 IEC 60950 Ingress Protection IEC 60529 IP20 IEC 60529 IP56 Operation ETSI 300 019-1-3 ETSI 300 019-1-4 Storage ETSI 300 019-1-1 Transportation ETSI 300 019-1-2
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 337 of 403 11.6 Network Management, Diagnostics, Status, and Alarms Network Management System Ceragon PolyView NMS NMS Interface protocol SNMPv1/v2c/v3 XML over HTTP/HTTPS toward NMS Element Management Web based EMS, CLI Management Channels & Protocols HTTP/HTTPS Telnet/SSH-2 FTP/SFTP Authentication, Authorization & Accounting User access control X-509 Certificate Management Interface Dedicated Ethernet interfaces (up to 3) or In-Band Local Configuration and Monitoring Standard ASCII terminal, serial RS-232 In-Band Management Support dedicated VLAN for management (in "smart pipe" and switch modes) TMN Ceragon NMS functions are in accordance with ITU-T recommendations for TMN External Alarms 5 Inputs: TTL-level or contact closure to ground. 1 output: Form C contact, software configurable. RSL Indication Accurate power reading (dBm) available at IDU, RFU 27 , and NMS Performance Monitoring Integral with onboard memory per ITU-T G.826/G.828
27 Note that the voltage at the BNC port on the RFUs is not accurate and should be used only as an aid FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 338 of 403 12. Specifications This chapter includes: General Specifications Transmit Power Specifications Receiver Threshold Specifications Radio Capacity Specifications Ethernet Latency Specifications E1 Latency Specifications Interface Specifications Mechanical Specifications Power Input Specifications Power Consumption Specifications Environmental Specifications Related Topics: Standards and Certifications Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notification. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 339 of 403 12.1 General Specifications 12.1.1 6-15 GHz Specification 6L,6H GHz 7,8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz Standards ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI Operating Frequency Range (GHz) 5.85-6.45, 6.4-7.1 7.1-7.9, 7.7-8.5 10.0-10.7 10.7-11.7 12.75-13.3 14.4-15.35 Tx/Rx Spacing (MHz) 252.04, 240, 266, 300, 340, 160, 170, 500 154, 119, 161, 168, 182, 196, 208, 245, 250, 266, 300,310, 311.312, 500, 530 91, 168,350, 550 490, 520, 530 266 315, 420, 475, 644, 490, 728 Frequency Stability +0.001% Frequency Source Synthesizer RF Channel Selection Via EMS/NMS System Configurations Non-Protected (1+0), Protected (1+1), Frequency Diversity, Space Diversity 2+0/2+2 XPIC Tx Range (Manual/ATPC) Up to 20dB dynamic range 12.1.2 18-42 GHz
Specification 18 GHz 23 GHz 24UL GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 36 GHz 38 GHz 42 28 GHz Standards ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI Operating Frequency Range (GHz) 17.7-19.7 21.2-23.65 24.0-24.25 24.2-26.5 27.35-29.5 31.8-33.4 36.0-37.0 37-40 40.55- 43.45 Tx/Rx Spacing (MHz) 1010, 1120, 1008, 1560 1008, 1200, 1232 Customer- defined 800, 1008 350, 450, 490, 1008 812 700 1000, 1260, 700 1500 Frequency Stability +0.001% Frequency Source Synthesizer RF Channel Selection Via EMS/NMS System Configurations Non-Protected (1+0), Protected (1+1), Space Diversity, 2+0/2+2 XPIC Tx Range (Manual/ATPC) Up to 20dB dynamic range
33 Refer to RFU-C roll-out plan for availability of each frequency. 34 42GHz RFU-C is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 345 of 403 Receiver Threshold (RSL) with RFU-C 35 (dBm @ BER = 10-6) (Continued) Profile Modulation Channel Spacing Occupied Bandwidth 99% Frequency (GHz) 6-15 18 23 24 26 28 31 32, 38 42 36
35 Refer to RFU-C roll-out plan for availability of each frequency. 36 42GHz RFU-C is a roadmap item; parameters and availability are subject to change. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 346 of 403 12.3.2 1500HP/RFU-HP Receiver Threshold (RSL) 37 (dBm @BER = 10-6) Note: RSL values are typical. 1500HP/RFU-HP Profile Modulation Channel Spacing Occupied Bandwidth 99% 6 GHz 7-11GHz 38
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 16 QAM 1306 1069 64 QAM 1328 1091 12.6.2 E1 Latency 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth ACM working point Modulation Fixed Modulation Mode (usec) ACM Mode (usec)
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 1 QPSK 1513 1276 1645 1408 2 8 PSK 1178 941 3 16 QAM 983 746 4 32 QAM 880 643 5 64 QAM 959 722 6 128 QAM 976 739 7 256 QAM (Strong FEC) 957 720 8 256 QAM (Light FEC) 899 662
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 370 of 403 12.6.3 E1 Latency 14 MHz Channel Bandwidth ACM working point Modulation Fixed Modulation Mode (usec) ACM Mode (usec)
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 1 QPSK 977 740 1156 919 2 8 PSK 793 556 3 16 QAM 674 437 4 32 QAM 629 392 5 64 QAM 685 448 6 128 QAM 671 434 7 256 QAM (Strong FEC) 656 419 8 256 QAM (Light FEC) 618 381 12.6.4 E1 Latency 28 MHz Channel Bandwidth ACM working point Modulation Fixed Modulation Mode (usec) ACM Mode (usec)
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 1 QPSK 663 426 871 634 2 8 PSK 598 361 3 16 QAM 533 296 4 32 QAM 493 256 5 64 QAM 502 265 6 128 QAM 491 254 7 256 QAM (Strong FEC) 496 259 8 256 QAM (Light FEC) 485 248
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 371 of 403 12.6.5 E1 Latency 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth ACM working point Modulation Fixed Modulation Mode (usec) ACM Mode (usec)
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 1 QPSK 587 350 944 707 2 8 PSK 520 283 3 16 QAM 476 239 4 32 QAM 457 220 5 64 QAM 462 225 6 128 QAM 465 228 7 256 QAM (Strong FEC) 467 230 8 256 QAM (Light FEC) 456 219 12.6.6 E1 Latency 56 MHz Channel Bandwidth ACM working point Modulation Fixed Modulation Mode (usec) ACM Mode (usec)
First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail First hop in TDM trail Any additional hop in TDM trail 1 QPSK 621 384 951 714 2 8 PSK 541 304 3 16 QAM 502 265 4 32 QAM 470 233 5 64 QAM 488 251 6 128 QAM 484 247 7 256 QAM (Strong FEC) 489 252 8 256 QAM (Light FEC) 467 230
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 372 of 403 12.7 Interface Specifications 12.7.1 Ethernet Interface Specifications Supported Ethernet Interfaces 5 x 10/100base-T (RJ-45) 2 x 10/100/1000Base-T (RJ-45) or 1000base-X (SFP) Supported SFP Types Optical 1000Base-LX (1310 nm) or SX (850 nm) 12.7.2 E1 Interface Specifications
Interface Type E1 Number of Ports 16 x E1 Additional 16 x E1 on T-Card Connector Type MDR 69-pin Framing Unframed (full transparency) Coding HDB3 Line Impedance 120 ohm/100 ohm balanced. Optional 75 ohm unbalanced supported using BNC panel with integrated impedance adaption. Compatible Standards ITU-T G.703, G.736, G.775, G.823, G.824, G.828, ITU-T I.432, ETSI ETS 300 147, ETS 300 417, Bellcore GR-253-core, TR-NWT-000499 12.7.3 Smart TDM Pseudowire Interface Specifications Processing capability 16 E1 s per TDM PW processing T-Card Circuit-Emulation Modes RFC 4553 SAToP RFC 5086 - CESoPSN Packet payload size Configurable 1 byte to max MTU De-Jitter buffer size Configurable 1 ms to 32 ms FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 373 of 403 12.7.4 Optical STM-1 SFP Interface Specifications
Transceiver Name SH1310 LH1310 LH1550 Application Code S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Operating Wavelength (nm) 1261-1360 1263-1360 1480-580 Transmitter Source Type MLM SLM SLM Max RMS Width (nm) 7.7 - - Min Side Mode Suppression Ratio (dB) - 30 30 Min Mean Launched Power (dBm) -15 -5 -5 Max Mean Launched Power (dBm) -8 0 0 Min Extinction Ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10 Receiver Min Sensitivity (BER of 1x10- 42 EOL (dBm) -28 -34 -34 Min Overload (dBm) -8 -10 -10 Max Receiver Reflectance (dB) - - -25 Optical Path between S and R Max Dispersion (ps/nm) 96 - - Min Optical Return Loss of Cable (dB) - - -20 Max Discreet Reflectance (dB) - - 25 Max Optical Path Penalty (dB) 1 1 1 12.7.5 Auxiliary Channel Specifications Wayside Channel 2 Mbps or 64 Kbps, Ethernet 10/100BaseT Engineering Order Wire Audio channel (64 Kbps) G.711 User Channel Asynchronous V.11/RS-232 up 19.2 kbps FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 374 of 403 12.8 Mechanical Specifications IDU Dimensions Height: 42.6 mm (1RU) Width: 439 mm 42
Depth: 188 (fits in ETSI rack) mm I+ Nodal Enclosure Dimensions Height: 2RU Width: 482.6 mm Depth: 210 mm IDU Weight 2.8 kg (with T-Card installed) I+ Nodal Enclosure Weight 1.5 kg
12.9 Power Input Specifications Standard Input -48 VDC DC Input range -40.5 to -57.5 VDC Optional Inputs 110-220 VAC 24 VDC
42 When installed with 19 inch brackets, the unit width is 486 mm. FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 375 of 403 12.10 Power Consumption Specifications Max power consumption IP-10G IDU (basic configuration) 25W Additional Power Consumption with XPIC ~3.5W per IDU Max system power consumption RFU-C + IP-10G IDU 1+0 with RFU-C 6-26 GHz: 47W 1+0 with RFU-C 28-42 GHz: 51W 1+1 with RFU-C 6-26 GHz: 84W 1+1 with RFU-C 28-42 GHz: 88W Max system power consumption 1500P + IP-10G IDU 1+0: 65W 1+1: 105W Max system power consumption RFU-SP + IP-10G IDU 1+0: 80W 1+1: 130W Max system power consumption RFU-HS + IP-10G IDU 1+0: 88W 1+1: 134W Max system power consumption RFU-HP + IP-10G IDU 1+0: 105W 1+1: 150W Additional power consumption for 16 E1 T-Card 2.5W Additional power consumption for 16 E1 Pseudowire processing T-Card 5W Additional power consumption for STM-1 Mux T-Card 5W (including SFP) 12.10.1 Power Consumption with RFU-HP in Power Saving Mode Note: These values reflect power consumption for the RFU only, and do not include IDU power consumption.
Bias TX Power Range [dBm] 6L&H [Watt] 7 and 8 [Watt] High 33-26 77 77 Medium 25-20 48 53 Low 19-11 34 34 Mute NA 20 20 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 376 of 403 12.11 Environmental Specifications Specification IDU RFU Operating Temperature -5C to +55C (23F to 131F) Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability: -33C to +55C (-27F to 131F) Temperature range for exceptional temperatures; tested successfully, with limited margins: -45C to +60C (-49F to 140F) Storage Temperature -40C to +70C (-40F to +158F) -25C to+85C (-13F to+185F) Transportation Temperature -40C to +70C (-40F to +158F -40C to+85C (-40F to+185F) Relative Humidity 0 to 95%, Non-condensing 5% to 100% Altitude 3,000m (10,000ft)
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 377 of 403 13. Components and Accessories This chapter includes: Cable and Accessory Overview IDU Unit Nodal Enclosure Units T-Card Options SFP Options Additional IDU Accessories Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Electrical) Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Optical) E1 Cables E1 Expansion Panels Alarms Cables User Channel Cables IF Cable Software License Marketing Models FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 378 of 403 13.1 Cable and Accessory Overview Accessories and cables for a 1+0 unit include the following: Termination cables Adaptors/Panels IDU 1+0 Termination Cable Adaptors
Accessories and cables for a 1+1 system include the following: Protection cables Termination cables Adaptors/Panels IDU 1+1 Protection (Y) Cable Termination Cable Adaptors
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 379 of 403 The following figure and the table underneath illustrate the cables and accessories, both mandatory and optional, in a 1+0 system. Ethernet + 32 E1s, 1+0
Number in Diagram Model Description 1 IP10-TCard-16 E1 IP10 TDM T-Card for 16 E1 2 IDU-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5m IDU external alarms open cable 2.5m 3 SFP-GE-SX Or SFP-GE-LX SFP optical interface 1000Base-SX OR SFP optical interface 1000Base-LX*ROHS 4 EOW-1500P Engineering Order Wire set for FibeAir products 5 15R-USER-CHAN-ASYNC-CBL-2.5M or 15R-USER-CHAN-SYNC-CBL-2.5M 1500R Async User Channels open cable 2.5
1500R Sync User Channels open cable 2.5 6 IP10-CBL-16IO-5/10/25M IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 5/10/25M 7 OP-SM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX-5/10M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC SM 3/10M (two for each optical port in use, one for TX and one for RX) 8 IP10-CBL-FE-0.5M IP-10 FE Prot cable straight 0.5m (one for each electrical Ethernet port in use) 9 IDU_ODU_CBL IDU-ODU Cable FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 380 of 403 The following figure and the table underneath illustrate the cables and accessories, both mandatory and optional, in a 1+1 system. Note: This table only includes components that are unique for protected configurations. Ethernet + 32 E1s, 1+1 HSB
Number in Diagram Model Description 1 IP10-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5m-PROT Ext. Alarms cable 2.5m with protection 2 15P-PROT-CBL + 15R-USER-CHAN-ASYNC-CBL-2.5M OR 2 x 15P-PROT-CBL + 15R-USER-CHAN-SYNC-CBL-2.5M 1500R Async User Channels open cable 2.5 OR 1500R Sync User Channels open cable 2.5 3 X-WSC-E1/T1 E1/T1 WSC x-ed cable (used for Out-of-Band management) 4 IP10-CBL-16E1-PROT-Y IP-10 16E1 protection Y cable, MDR68 5 IP10-CBL-16IO-5/10/25M IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 5/10/25M 6 GBE-SPL-MM/SM MM/SM LC Optical splitter (two for each optical port in use, one for TX and one for RX) 7 15P-PROT-CBL E1/T1/Ethernet Y cable (one for each electrical Ethernet port in use) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 381 of 403 13.2 IDU Unit Basic IP-10G Unit
IP-10G Unit with Dual-Feed Power
Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10G(R3)-16E1-TSlt-SU IP10-G(R3) Eth,16E1,Tslt,SyncU IP10G(R3)-16E1-TSlt-SU-2DC IP10-G(R3) Eth,16E1,Tslt,SyncU,2xDC IP10G(R3)-16T1-TSlt-SU-XPC-2DC IP10-G(R3) Eth,16T1,Tslt,SyncU,XPIC,2xDC 13.3 Nodal Enclosure Units Main Nodal Enclosure Unit
Extension Nodal Enclosure Unit
Marketing Model Marketing Description I+Main-Enclosure I+ stackable enclosure, for main units 2U I+Expansion-Enclosure I+ stackable enclosure, for exp units 2U I+Blank I+ blank panel, for main & exp units 1U FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 382 of 403 13.4 T-Card Options E1 T-Card STM-1 T-Card Pseudowire T-Card
Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-TCard-16E1 IP10 TDM Tcard for 16E1 IP10-TCard-1x STM-1 Mux IP10 TDM Tcard 1x STM-1 Mux, SFP IP10-TCard-Smart-16E1/T1-ACR IP10 T-Card 16E1/T1 Smart-TDM proc,w/ACR FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 383 of 403 13.5 SFP Options An SFP optical interface plug-in is available for the GbE optical ports on the IP- 10G. This plug-in is used when an optical connection up to 10KM is required. The SFP optical interface can be ordered for single mode or multi-mode. SFP Optical Interface Plug-In
Marketing Model Marketing Description SFP-GE-SX SFP optical interface 1000Base-SX Multimode 850 nm 1.0625 Gbit/s Fiber Channel 1.25 Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver, with packing RoHS compliance SFP-GE-LX SFP optical interface 1000Base-LX*ROHS Small Form Factor Pluggable LC Optical Transceiver, LP - bail wire de-latch, 3.3V, 1310 nm, with packing ROHS 13.6 Additional IDU Accessories Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-Fans-Drawer IP10 Fans Drawer IP10-TCard-Blank IP10 blank panel for Tcard slot FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 384 of 403 13.7 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Electrical) 13.7.1 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Copper) Ethernet Cable and Splitter (Copper) Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description IP10-CBL-FE-0.5M IP-10 FE Prot cable straight 0.5m CABLE,RJ45 TO RJ45,0.5M,CAT-5E X-WSC-E1/T1 E1/T1 WSC x-ed cable CABLE,RJ45 TO RJ45 CROSS,0.5M,CAT-5E RJ-45ETHCross cable RJ-45ETHCross cable CABLE,RJ45 TO RJ45 CROSS,2M,CAT5 X-2FE-CON Dual channel Ethernet x-ed cable CABLE,RJ45 TO RJ45 DUAL CROSS,2M,CAT- 5E,100 OHM 15P-PROT-CBL E1/T1/Ethernet protection cable CABLE,RJ45 TO 2XRJ45F,1.34M,CAT-5E FE-SPL-1xRJ45F-to-2xRJ45F FE splitter 1xRJ45F to 2xRJ45F
13.7.2 Ethernet RJ45 - RJ45 Cables Ethernet RJ45 - RJ45 Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-0.6m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 0.6m,str. (yellow) IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-1m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 1m, str. (yellow) IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-2m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 2m, str. (yellow) IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-XED-0.6m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 0.6m, cross(orange) IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-XED-1m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 1m, cross (orange) IP10-CBL-ETH-RJ45-XED-2m IP-10 ETH RJ45 cable 2m, cross (orange) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 385 of 403 13.7.3 WSC Protection Cable A 0.2 meter Ethernet CAT-5E cross-connect cable (male male) is used to connect two IDUs in a protected (HSB) configuration. This cable is not necessary when a nodal enclosure is used. WSC Protection Cable
WSC Protection Cable Marketing Model Marketing Model Marketing Description X-WSC-E1/T1 E1/T1 WSC x-ed cable 13.7.4 Ethernet Cross-Connect Cable A 2 meter Fast Ethernet CAT- 5E cross-connect cable (RJ-45 RJ-45, 100 OHM) is used to connect between IDUs in multiple-IDU protected (HSB) configurations. This cable is not necessary when a nodal enclosure is used. Ethernet Cross-Connect Cable
Ethernet Protection Cable Marketing Model Marketing Model Marketing Description X-2FE-CON Dual channel Ethernet x-ed cable FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 386 of 403 13.7.5 Ethernet Y Cable A 1.34 meter CAT- 5E Y cable (1 x RJ-45 2 x RJ-45 female) is used to provide a single input/output to and from the two IDUs in the protected pair in protected (HSB) configurations. An Ethernet cross-cable (X-2FE-CON) is used to convert the common port to male. Ethernet Y Cable
Ethernet Y Cable Marketing Model Marketing Model Marketing Description 15P-PROT-CBL E1/T1/Ethernet protection cable
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 387 of 403 13.8 Ethernet Cables and Splitters (Optical) 13.8.1 Optical Y Cables, Adaptors, and Extension Cables An optical Y splitter (3 x male) is required to provide a single input/output to and from the optical GbE interface in the IDUs in the protected pair in protected (HSB) configurations. Two cables are required for each protected optical interface, one for RX and one for TX. A female-female optical adaptor is required between the Y splitter and an extension cable. Two adaptors and two extension cables are required for each protected optical interface, one for RX and one for TX. Optical Y Cable, Adaptor, and Extension Cable
Optical Y Cables, Adaptors, and Extension Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description GBE-SPL-SM SM/LC Optical splitter conn. 1300nm 50/5 Optical Splitter (Single Mode) GBE-SPL-MM-0.6M MM/LC Optical splitter 62.5/125 0.6M Optical Splitter (Multi-Mode 0.6 meters) GBE-SPL-MM-1M MM/LC Optical splitter 62.5/125 1M Optical Splitter (Multi-Mode 1 meter) GBE-SPL-MM-2M MM/LC Optical splitter 62.5/125 2M Optical Splitter (Multi-Mode 2 meters) OP-SM-LC-LC-ADPT-DPLX Adaptor Female/Female LC-LC Duplex Optical Splitter Adaptor OP-SM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 3M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC SM 3M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-LC, 3 meters OP-SM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 10M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC SM 10M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-LC, 10 meters OP-SM-CBL-LC-SC-DPLX 3M Duplex Optical Cable LC-SC SM 3M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-SC, 3 meters (Single Mode) OP-MM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 0.5M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC MM 0.5M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-SC, 0.5 meters (Multi- Mode) OP-MM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 3M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC MM 3M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-SC, 3 meters (Multi-Mode) OP-MM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 6M Duplex Optical Cable LC-LC MM 6M Duplex Optical Cable, LC-SC, 6 meters (Multi-Mode) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 388 of 403 13.8.2 Optical H Cables Optical H cables are used to interconnect between two protected terminals. Two cables are required for each protected terminal, one for RX and one for TX. The TX of 1 unit should be connected to the RX of the other. Optical H Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description OP-SM-HSPL-LC-LC 0.5M/0.5M Opt. H-splt SM 1310nm, LC/LC, 0.5M/0.5M Optical H Cable (Single Mode, 0.5/0.5 meters) OP-SM-HSPL-LC-LC 1M/1M Opt. H-splt SM 1310nm, LC/LC, 1M/1M Optical H Cable (Single Mode, 1/1 meters) OP-MM-HSPL-LC-LC 0.5M/0.5M Opt. H-splt MM 850nm, LC/LC, 0.5M/0.5M Optical H Cable (Multi-Mode, 0.5/0.5 meters) OP-MM-HSPL-LC-LC 1M/1M Opt. H-splt MM 850nm, LC/LC, 1M/1M Optical H Cable (Multi-Mode, 1/1 meters) FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 389 of 403 13.9 E1 Cables 13.9.1 E1 Open-End Extension Cable A male SCSI68 left-angle120 ohm cable is used to connect from the IP-10G 16E1 connector on one end, with open ends for the 16E1 on the other end (120 ohm). When conversion to 75 ohm is required, a special adaptation panel is necessary. This cable can be ordered in lengths of 3, 5, 10, and 15 meters. E1 Open-End Extension Cable
E1 Open-End Extension Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-CBL-16E1-OE-3M IP-10 16E1 cable open-end, 3M IP10-CBL-16IO-5M IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 5M IP10-CBL-16IO-10M IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 10M IP10-CBL-16IO-25M IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 25M 13.9.2 E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End A male 0.3 meter SCSI68 left-angle120 ohm cable with RJ-45 female adaptors is used to connect from the IP-10G 16E1 connector on one end to four single E1s on the other end (120 ohm). E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End
E1 Extension Cable with RJ-45 Female End Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-CBL-4E1-RJ45F-0.3M IP-10 4E1 ports RJ45 socket (female), 0.3M FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 390 of 403 13.9.3 E1 RJ-45 Male-to-Male Extension Cable A male SCSI68 left-angle120 ohm cable with RJ-45 female adaptors is used to connect from the IP-10G 16E1 connector on one end to a single 8 single E1 (120 ohm) on the other end. When conversion to 75 ohm is required, a special adaptation panel is necessary. This cable can be ordered for 4 E1s in a length of 0.3 meters, and for 8 E1s in lengths of 0.3, 1.5, and 3 meters. E1 Male-to-Male Extension Cable
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 393 of 403 13.9.7 E1 Special Cables E1 Special Cables
Marketing Model Marketing Description Description IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-2xDTYPE-1.5m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68/2xDB37 1.5m IP10-CBL-16E1MDRRA-RJ45-XD1.5m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 1.5M,RA,crs IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-RJ45-XED-1.5m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 1.5M, cross IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-RJ45-1.5m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 1.5M IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-RJ45-XED-3m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 3M, cross IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45F-XED-0.3m IP-10 E1 RJ45 to RJ45F cable 0.3m, cross IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-EXT-0.6m IP-10 16E1 Extension cable 0.6m, MDR68 CABLE,SCSI68 LEFT ANGLE TO SCSI68 FEMALE,0.6M,120 OHM, WITH ADAPTATION. IP10-CBL-16E1-OE-PROT-5M IP-10 16 E1s cable open-end ,5M w/ prot. CABLE,2xSCSI68 LEFT ANGLE TO OE,0.6M+5M,120 OHM, WITH ADAPTATION
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 394 of 403 13.9.8 E1 Y Cable A 0.6 meter SCSI168 left angle 120 ohm Y splitter cable (2 x male, 1 x female) is used to provide a single input/output to and from the two 16 E1 ports of the IDUs in the protected pair to a single external source in protected (HSB) configurations. E1 Y Cable
E1 Y Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-CBL-16E1-PROT-Y IP-10 16E1 protection Y cable, MDR68
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 395 of 403 13.10 E1 Expansion Panels 13.10.1 E1 Expansion Panel with RJ-45 Female Sockets An expansion panel with RJ-45 female sockets is used for 16 E1 expansion to single E1 RJ-45 sockets in a panel (120 ohm). Two kits of 8 female-female adaptors should be ordered for 16 E1. The panel is used with a male SCS168 left angle 120 ohm cross cable with RJ-45 adaptors. The cable can be ordered in sizes of 1.5 and 3 meters. E1 Expansion Panel with RJ-45 Female Sockets
Expansion Panel, Adaptor, and Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description IP10-PANEL-32E1/T1-RJ45 IP-10 32E1/T1 panel, for RJ45F adapters Expansion Panel IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-E1/T1-XED x8 IP-10 RJ45F/RJ45F adapter,E1/T1,cross x8 Adaptor (Cross) IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-RJ45F x8 IP-10 RJ45F/RJ45F adapter, straight x8 Adaptor (Straight) IP10-CBL-16E1MDRLA-RJ45-XD1.5m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 1.5M,LA,crs 1.5 meter male termination cable IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-LA-RJ45-XD3m IP-10 16E1 cable MDR68-RJ45 3M,LA,cross 3 meter male termination cable FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 396 of 403 13.10.2 E1 Expansion Panel to 75 ohm A 75 ohm panel is available for expansion to unbalanced 75 ohm connectors with BNC. A two-way male SCS168 cable is used with this panel. E1 75 ohm Expansion Panel
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 397 of 403 13.10.3 E1 75 ohm Extension for 1+1 HSB Configurations A 75 ohm extension is available for 1+1 HSB configurations. A 0.6 meter 16E1 SCSI68 Y splitter cable (2 x male, 1 x female) is used with this extension, as well as a two-way male SCS168 cable. E1 75 ohm Extension for 1+1 HSB Configurations
75 ohm Extension Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description Description IP10-PANEL-16E1-ADAP-75ohm-BNC IP-10 16E1 panel w/ 75ohm adap , BNC Expansion Panel IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-0.6m IP-10 16 E1 ports cable straight 0.6m E1 Straight Cable (0.6 meters) IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-1.5m IP-10 16 E1 ports cable straight 1.5m E1 Straight Cable (1.5 meters) IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-5m IP-10 16 E1 ports cable straight 5m E1 Straight Cable (5 meters) IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-10m IP-10 16 E1 ports cable straight 10m E1 Straight Cable (10 meters) IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-25m IP-10 16 E1 ports cable straight 25m E1 Straight Cable (25 meters) IP10-CBL-16T1-PROT-Y IP-10 16T1 protection Y-cable, MDR68 Y Cable FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 398 of 403 13.11 Alarms Cables Alarms cable can be used to connect to the IP-10Gs alarms interfaces. In a 1+1 HSB protected system, an alarms Y cable is used to connect to the alarms interfaces of each unit. The alarms cables are not connectorized at the other end. The length of the cables is 2.5 meter. Alarms Cable
Alarms Y Cable
Alarm Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5m IP-10 Ext. Alarms open cable 2.5m IP10-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5m-PROT Ext. Alarms cable 2.5m with protection
FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 399 of 403 13.12 User Channel Cables A 2.5 meter cable is used for the user channel connection in 1+0 configurations. A synchronous or asynchronous cable can be ordered. The cables are not connectorized on the other end. For a protected 1+1 or 2+2 HSB configuration, a Y cable must also be used. If synchronous cables are being used, two Y cables should be ordered in order to support protection mode. User Channel Cable
User Channel Cable with Y Cable
User Channel Cable with Two Y Cables (Synchronous)
User Channel Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description 15P-PROT-CBL E1/T1/Ethernet protection cable 15R-USER-CHAN-ASYNC-CBL-2.5M 1500R Async User Channels open cable 2.5 15R-USER-CHAN-SYNC-CBL-2.5M 1500R Sync User Channels open cable 2.5m FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 400 of 403 13.13 IF Cable Each IDU-RFU connection requires an RG8 IF cable and two N-Type BNC connectors. IF Cable Marketing Models Marketing Model Marketing Description IDU_ODU_CBL IDU-ODU Cable FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 401 of 403 13.14 Software License Marketing Models 13.14.1 ACM License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-ACM IP-10 IDU ACM Enabled 13.14.2 L2 Switch License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-Metro IP-10 IDU Metro Switch Enabled 13.14.3 Capacity Upgrade License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-CAP-25 IP-10 IDU Capacity 25 Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-50 IP-10 IDU Capacity 50 Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-100 IP-10 IDU Capacity 100 Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-150 IP-10 IDU Capacity 150 Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-200 IP-10 IDU Capacity 200 Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-300 IP-10 IDU Capacity 300Mbps IP10-SL-CAP-ALL SW license: Capacity All IP10-SL-UPG-010-025 SW license Cap Upg 10-25 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-050 SW license Cap Upg 10-50 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-100 SW license Cap Upg 10-100 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-150 SW license Cap Upg 10-150 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-200 SW license Cap Upg 10-200 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-300 SW license Cap Upg 10-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-010-ALL SW license Cap Upg 10-All IP10-SL-UPG-025-050 SW license Cap Upg 25-50 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-025-100 SW license Cap Upg 25-100 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-025-150 SW license Cap Upg 25-150 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-025-200 SW license Cap Upg 25-200 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-025-300 SW license Cap Upg 25-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-025-ALL SW license Cap Upg 25-All IP10-SL-UPG-050-100 SW license Cap Upg 50-100 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-050-150 SW license Cap Upg 50-150 Mbps FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 402 of 403 Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-UPG-050-200 SW license Cap Upg 50-200 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-050-300 SW license Cap Upg 50-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-050-ALL SW license Cap Upg 50-All IP10-SL-UPG-100-150 SW license Cap Upg 100-150 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-100-200 SW license Cap Upg 100-200 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-100-300 SW license Cap Upg 100-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-100-ALL SW license Cap Upg 100-All IP10-SL-UPG-150-200 SW license Cap Upg 150-200 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-150-300 SW license Cap Upg 150-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-150-ALL SW license Cap Upg 150-All IP10-SL-UPG-200-300 SW license Cap Upg 200-300 Mbps IP10-SL-UPG-200-ALL SW license Cap Upg 200-All IP10-SL-UPG-300-ALL SW license Cap Upg 300-All IP10-SL-UPG-Metro IP-10 IDU SW license:Upg to Metro switch IP10-SL-UPG-ACM IP-10 IDU SW license:Upg to ACM 13.14.4 Network Resiliency License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-Network-Resiliency IP-10 IDU Network Resiliency Enabled 13.14.5 TDM Traffic Only License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-CAP-32E1 IP-10 IDU Capacity TDM only - 32 E1 IP10-SL-CAP-48E1 IP-10 IDU Capacity TDM only - 48 E1 IP10-SL-CAP-64E1 IP-10 IDU Capacity TDM only - 64 E1 IP10-SL-CAP-75E1 IP-10 IDU Capacity TDM only - 75 E1 13.14.6 Synchronization Unit License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-Sync-Unit IP-10 IDU Sync. Unit Enabled FibeAir IP-10G Product Description Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 403 of 403 13.14.7 Enhanced QoS License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-Enhanced-QoS IP-10 IDU Enhanced QoS Enabled IP10-SL-UPG-Enhanced-QoS IP-10 SW license:Upg to Enhanced QoS 13.14.8 Asymmetrical Scripts License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL-Asymmetrical links IP-10 IDU Asymmetrical Links Enabled 13.14.9 Enhanced Header Compression License Marketing Model Marketing Description IP10-SL- Enhanced Compression IP-10 IDU Enhanced Compression Enabled